Home

IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference

1. company po_num address1 ship_date res_dtime address2 ship_weight res_descr state city ship_charge paid_date unit cat_advert unit_descr de aseqejeg ouap seJojs ay Primary Foreign Key Relationships Primary Foreign Key Relationships The tables of the stores_demo database are linked by the primary foreign key relationships that Figure A 10 shows and are identified in this section This type of relationship is called a referential constraint because a foreign key in one table references the primary key in another table Figure A 11 through Figure A 18 show the relationships among tables and how information stored in one table supplements information stored in others The customer and orders Tables The customer table contains a customer_num column that holds a number that identifies a customer and columns for the customer name company address and telephone number For example the row with information about Anthony Higgins contains the number 104 in the customer_num column The orders table also contains a customer_num column that stores the number of the customer who placed a particular order In the orders table the customer_num column is a foreign key that references the customer_num column in the customer table Figure A 11 shows this relationship Figure A 11 customer Table detail Tables That the customer_num customer_
2. pathname specifies the location of the XBSA message log file If you do not set ISM_DEBUG_FILE the XBSA message log is located in the INFORMIXDIR ism applogs xbsa messages directory on UNIX or in the c nsr applogs xbsa messages directory on Windows systems ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL Set the ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL environment variable in the ON Bar environment to control the level of reporting detail recorded in the XBSA messages log The XBSA shared library writes to this log SM_DEBUG_LEVEL value value specifies the level of reporting detail You can specify a value between 0 and 9 IfISM_DEBUG_LEVEL is not set has a NULL value or has a value outside this range the default detail level is 1 A detail level of 0 suppresses all XBSA debugging records A detail level of 1 reports only XBSA failures Environment Variables 3 75 ISM_ENCRYPTION setenv ISM_ENCRYPTION Set the ISM_ENCRYPTION environment variable in the ON Bar environment to specify whether Informix Storage Manager ISM uses data encryption ISM_ENCRYPTION setenv XOR uses encryption NONE does not use encryption TRUE uses encryption If ISM_ENCRYPTION is set to NONE or is not set the ISM server does not use encryption If the ISM_ENCRYPTION is set to TRUE or XOR in the environment of the ON Bar process that makes a request the ISM server uses encryption to store or retrieve the
3. A tabauth value with an asterisk symbol means column level privileges exist In DB Access the Privileges option of the Info command for a specified table can display the column level privileges on that table A composite index on tabid grantor and grantee allows only unique values A composite index on tabid and grantee allows duplicate values SYSTABLES The systables system catalog table contains one row for each table view sequence or synonym defined in the database including the system catalog Column Type Explanation tabname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of table view sequence or synonym CHAR 18 XPS owner CHAR 32 IDS Name of owner of table informix for system CHAR 8 XPS catalog tables and user name for database tables partnum INTEGER Physical location code tabid SERIAL System assigned sequential identifying number rowsize SMALLINT Row size ncols SMALLINT Number of columns in the table nindexes SMALLINT Number of indexes on the table nrows INTEGER Number of rows in the table created DATE Date when the table was created 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 69 SYSTABLES 1 70 Column Type version INTEGER tabtype CHAR 1 locklevel CHAR 1 npused INTEGER fextsize INTEGER nextsize INTEGER flags SMALLINT site VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 dbname VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 type_xid INTEGER IDS only am_id INTEGER IDS only IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference IDS XPS IDS XPS Explanation
4. Figure B 9 The cust_calls Table Description Customer number foreign key to customer table Date and time call received Name of person logging call default is user login name Type of call foreign key to call_type table Description of call Date and time call resolved Description of how call was resolved The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 9 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables The customer retail_customer and whlsale_customer Tables In this hierarchy retail_customer and whlsale_customer are sub tables that are created under the customer supertable as Figure B 25 on page B 25 shows For information about table hierarchies see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation The customer Table The customer table contains information about the retail stores that place orders from the distributor Figure B 10 shows the columns of the customer table Name customer_num customer_type customer_name customer_loc contact_dates cust_discount IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Type SERIAL CHAR 1 name_t INTEGER LIST DATETIME YEAR TO DAY NOT NULL percent Figure B 10 The customer Table Description Unique customer identifier Code to indicate type of customer m R retail m W wholesale Name of customer Location of customer foreign key to location table Dates of contact with customer Customer discount 1 of 2 Name
5. For example you might enter a value of 1 1000001 in a SMALLFLOAT field and after processing the SQL statement the application development tool might display this value as 1 1 This difference occurs when a value has more digits than the floating point number can store In this case the value is stored in its approximate form with the least significant digits treated as Zeros SMALLFLOAT data types usually require 4 bytes per value Conversion of a SMALLFLOAT value to a DECIMAL value results in 9 digits of precision SM ALLINT The SMALLINT data type stores small whole numbers that range from 32 767 to 32 767 The maximum negative number 32 768 is a reserved value and cannot be used The SMALLINT value is stored as a signed binary integer Integer columns typically store counts quantities and so on Because the SMALLINT data type takes up only 2 bytes per value arithmetic operations are performed efficiently However this data type stores a limited range of values If the values exceed the range between the minimum and maximum numbers the database server does not store the value and provides you with an error message DataTypes 2 43 2 44 TEXT The TEXT data type stores any kind of text data It can contain both single byte and multibyte characters that the locale supports The TEXT data type has no maximum size A TEXT column has a theoretical limit of 2 bytes and a practical limit that your available disk sto
6. If you do not set INFORMIXOPCACHE the default cache size is 128 kilobytes or the size specified in the configuration parameter OPCACHEMAX The default for OPCACHEMAX is 128 kilobytes If you set INFORMIXOPCACHE to a value of 0 Optical Subsystem does not use the cache INFORMIXSERVER The INFORMIXSERVER environment variable specifies the default database server to which an explicit or implicit connection is made by an SQL API client the DB Access utility or other Informix products INFORMIXSERVER must be set before you can use Informix client products It has the following syntax INFORMIXSERVER dbservername dbservername is the name of the default database server IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference XPS UNIX INFORMIXSHMBASE The value of INFORMIXSERVER can be a local or remote server but must correspond to a valid dbservername entry in the INFORMIXDIR etc sqlhosts file on the computer running the application The dbservername must begin with a lower case letter and cannot exceed 128 characters It can include any printable character except the following uppercase characters field delim iters space or tab newline character hyphen or minus For example to specify the coral database server as the default for connection enter the following command setenv INFORMIXSERVER coral INFORMIXSERVER specifies the database server to which an application connects
7. I I I I I I I I I IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference 3 46 3 48 3 48 3 52 3 53 3 53 3 54 3 55 3 56 3 56 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 60 3 61 3 61 3 62 3 62 3 63 3 63 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 3 67 3 68 3 68 3 69 3 70 3 71 3 72 3 73 3 74 3 74 3 75 3 75 3 76 3 76 3 77 JAR_TEMP_PATH 3 77 JAVA_COMPILER 2 ee en 3 78 JVM_MAX_HEAP SIZE o 3 78 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 2 ee 3 79 EIBPATER S Le Gon eg Ma do A ey ee Bee A as 3 79 NODEFDAG 2 wi wi ved ok Yo Gee OE SR 3 80 ONCONFIG ee e i pal o aa 3 80 OPTCOMPIND lt lt 00 a RA Be ea 3 81 ORTMSG oe I pre i bat 2 te e A et 3 82 OPTORC Ge aoe oh get ho od RON Ye Ee So ee 3 83 OPEGOIAL be cay Bd Ba ade otis up dr rbd ohn ad 3 83 PATH 2 44 bo amp a ee ee A ee a A aana 3 84 PDQPRIORITY gt ceo oy o de a a a a 3 85 PLCONFIG gt a oson 2 s m e a i e a 3 87 PLOAD LO PATH s s a w oeo ew a e a 3 87 PLOAD SHMBASE oo 3 88 PSORT_DBTEMP B 4 3 89 PSORT_NPROCS ee eee 3 89 SHLIB PATH gt somo s so e ee me we 3 91 STMT_CACHE i soso a 02 m0 8b da 3 92 TERM a ee ee a a a te 3 92 TERMCAP uo a a ee a a 3 93 TERMINFO s a ceos a eon YO a a a 3 94 THREADLIB oo 0 2 2 e e do 3 94 XFER CONFIG s sa soa odoare Kyd 3 95 Index of Environment Variables 0a a a a aaa 0 3 95 Appendix A The stores_demo Database Appendix B The sales_
8. Global Language Support GLS global variable globally detached index GLS GLS API hash fragmentation hash rule See routine overloading A type of checkpoint where only certain pages on disk are synchronized with the pages in the shared memory buffer pool and the logical log is used to synchronize the rest of the pages during fast recovery A device that establishes data communications between networks A type of index for static tables with Extended Parallel Server that can speed certain queries by storing the result of an expression as a key in a B tree or bitmap index Three types of GK index are selective virtual column and join A unit of storage equal to 1024 megabytes or 1024 bytes A feature that enables Informix APIs and database servers to support differ ent languages cultural conventions and code sets For information about the GLS feature see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality A variable or identifier whose scope of reference is all modules of a program Compare with local variable For Extended Parallel Server a type of index that has a fragmentation strat egy that is independent of the table fragmentation and where the database server cannot verify that each index row resides on the same coserver as the referenced data row You can use an expression system defined hash or hybrid distribution scheme to create globally detached indexes for any table See also locally detached index Se
9. IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference nformix Extended Parallel Server Version 8 3 nformix Dynamic Server Version 9 3 August 2001 Part No 000 8338 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001 All rights reserved Trademarks AIX DB2 DB2 Universal Database Distributed Relational Database Architecture NUMA Q OS 2 OS 390 and OS 400 IBM Informix C ISAM Foundation 2000 IBM Informix 4GL IBM Informix DataBlade Module Client SDK Cloudscape Cloudsync IBM Informix Connect IBM Informix Driver for JDBC Dynamic Connect IBM Informix Dynamic Scalable Architecture DSA IBM Informix Dynamic Server IBM Informix Enterprise Gateway Manager Enterprise Gateway Manager IBM Informix Extended Parallel Server i Financial Services J Foundation MaxConnect M Object Translator Red Brick Decision Server IBM Informix SE IBM Informix SQL InformixXML RedBack SystemBuilderM U2 UniData9 UniVerse wintegrate are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Windows Windows NT and Excel are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries UNIX is a registered trademark in the United State
10. The locale that a product uses unless you specify a different nondefault locale For Informix products U S English is the default locale 16 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference default value delete delimited identifier delimiter deluxe mode descriptor detached index device array diagnostic area diagnostics table Dirty Read A value that is used when no explicit value is specified For example you can assign default values to columns with the ALTER TABLE and CREATE TABLE statements and to variables in SPL routines To remove any row or combination of rows with the DELETE statement If the DELIMIDENT environment variable is set this is an SOL identifier enclosed between double quotation marks This supports identifiers that are SQL reserved keywords or that contain whitespace or other characters outside the default SQL character set for identifiers A character used as a boundary on a field or as the terminator for a column or row Some files and prepared objects require semicolon comma blank space or tab delimiters between statements Statements of SOL can have semicolon or other delimiters in some programming contexts A method of loading or unloading data that uses regular inserts A quoted string or variable that identifies an allocated system descriptor area or an sqlda structure It is used for the Informix SQL APIs See also identifier As index whose distribution scheme sp
11. in the Page column indicates a GLS environment variables that is valid in nondefault locales and that is described in the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference List of Environment Variables Figure 3 1 Alphabetical List Of Environment Variables Environment Variable XPS IDS Restrictions Page AC_CONFIG Y wv None 3 24 AFDEBUG 3 24 CC8BITLEVEL ESQL C only GLS CLIENT_LOCALE YV Y None GLS CPFIRST Y Y None 3 25 DBACCNOIGN Y wv DB Accessonly 3 26 DBANSIWARN YV wv None 3 27 DBBLOBBUF Y Y None 3 28 DBCENTURY SQL APIs only 3 28 DBDATE Y Y None 3 32 GLS DBDELIMITER YV wv None 3 35 DBEDIT Y Y None 3 35 DBFLTMASK Y wv DB Accessonly 3 36 DBLANG Y Y None 3 37 GLS DBMONEY Y Y None 3 38 GLS DBNLS Vv 3 40 DBONPLOAD VY HPLonly 3 41 DBPATH Y Y None 3 42 DBPRINT Y vY UNIXonly 3 44 DBREMOTECMD Y vY UNIX only 3 45 DBSPACETEMP YV Y None 3 46 DBTEMP DB Access 3 48 Gateways only 1 of 5 Environment Variables 3 19 List of Environment Variables Environment Variable DBTIME DBUPSPACE DB_LOCALE DEFAULT_ATTACH DELIMIDENT ENVIGNORE ESOLMF FET_BUF_SIZE GLS8BITSYS GL_DATE GL_DATETIME IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE IFX_DIRECTIVES IFX_LONGID IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE IFX_NETBUF_SIZE IFX_UPDDESC IMCADMIN IMCCONFIG IMCSERVER INFORMIXC INFORMIXCONCSMCFG IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference XPS SS SSS NNN SUS 8 aN SSNS NN NN XS
12. owner tabid idxtype clustered partl part2 part3 part4 part5 part6 part7 part8 SYSINDEXES The sysindexes table is a view on the SYSINDICES table It contains one row for each index in the database The sysindexes table has the following Type VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 CHAR 32 char 8 INTEGER CHAR 1 CHAR 1 SMALLINT IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference IDS XPS IDS XPS Explanation Index name Name of owner of index informix for system catalog tables and user name for database tables IDS only Unique identifying code of table Index type U Unique D Duplicates allowed G Nonbitmap generalized key index XPS g Bitmap generalized key index XPS u unique bitmap XPS d nonunique bitmap XPS Clustered or nonclustered index C Clustered Column number colno of a single index or the 1st component of a composite index 2nd component of a composite index 3rd component of a composite index 4th component of a composite index 5th component of a composite index 6th component of a composite index 7th component of a composite index 8th component of a composite index 1 of 2 SYSINDEXES Column Type Explanation part9 SMALLINT 9th component of a composite index partl0 SMALLINT 10th component of a composite index part11 SMALLINT 11th component of a composite index part12 SMALLINT 12th component of a composite index part13 SM
13. tuple An attribute of any file index or table that is used only during a single session Temporary files or resources are typically removed or freed when program execution terminates or an online session ends A data type for a simple large object that stores text and can be as large as 2 bytes See also BYTE A piece of work or task for a virtual processor just as a virtual processor is a task for a CPU A virtual processor is a task that the operating system sched ules for execution on the CPU a database server thread is a task that a virtual processor schedules internally for processing Threads are sometimes called lightweight processes because they are like processes but make fewer demands on the operating system See also multithreading and user thread Acronym for Transport Layer Interface It is the interface designed for use by application programs that are independent of a network protocol To keep a running list of the values of program variables arguments expres sions and so on in a program or SPL routine A collection of one or more SQL statements that is treated as a single unit of work If one statement in a transaction fails the entire transaction can be rolled back canceled If the transaction is successful the work is committed and all changes to the database from the transaction are accepted See also explicit transaction implicit transaction and singleton implicit transaction A lock on an R tree in
14. 1 1 h VD DAN DD Ua aA 0 ee A WO WY N 101 101 102 102 103 104 105 105 HRO HSK SMT HRO HSK SHM HSK HRO PRC PRC PRC PRC SHM description baseball gloves baseball gloves baseball gloves baseball baseball bat baseball bat football football tennis racquet tennis racquet tennis racquet tennis ball tennis ball basketball volleyball volleyball net bicycle tires bicycle tires bicycle brakes bicycle brakes front derailleur rear derailleur bicycle wheels bicycle wheels Data in the stores_ demo Database unit_price 250 00 800 00 450 00 126 00 240 00 280 00 960 00 480 00 28 00 25 00 19 80 36 00 48 00 600 00 840 00 20 00 88 00 68 00 220 00 480 00 20 00 58 00 53 00 80 00 unit case case case case case case case case each each each case case case case each box box case case each each pair pair unit_descr 10 gloves case 10 gloves case 10 gloves case 24 case 12 case 12 case 24 case 24 case each each each 24 cans case 24 cans case 24 case 24 case each 4 box 4 box 4 sets case 4 sets case each each pair pair 1 of 3 The stores_demo Database A 27 Data in the stores_ demo Database A 28 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference stock_num manu_code description unit_price unit unit_descr 106 PRC bicycle stem 23 00 each each 107 PRC bicycle saddle 70 00 pair pair 108 SHM crankset 45 00 each each 109 PRC pedal binding
15. 1 73 user messages syserrors 1 39 DATE data type abbreviated year values 2 16 3 28 casting to integer 2 65 converting to DATETIME 2 65 description 2 16 display format 3 32 in expressions 2 51 2 54 international date formats 2 16 source data 2 55 DATETIME data type abbreviated year values 3 28 converting to DATE 2 65 description 2 17 display format 3 48 EXTEND function 2 54 extending precision 2 52 field qualifiers 2 17 in expressions 2 51 to 2 56 international formats 2 20 length syscolumns 1 33 literal values 2 19 precision and size 2 17 source data 2 55 two digit year values and DBDATE variable 2 19 year to fraction example 2 19 DATE function 2 55 3 34 DAY keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 17 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 UNITS operator 2 16 2 56 DBA privilege 1 40 1 72 1 73 1 76 DBA routines 1 61 DB Access utility 1 12 1 81 3 7 3 36 3 42 3 48 3 68 DBACCNOIGN environment variable 3 26 DBANSIWARN environment variable 3 27 DBBLOBBUF environment variable 3 28 DBCENTURY environment variable description 3 28 effect on functionality of DBDATE 3 33 expanding abbreviated years 2 16 2 19 3 29 Index 5 A BC D E F GH DBDATE environment variable 2 16 3 32 DBDELIMITER environment variable 3 35 DBEDIT environment variable 3 35 dbexport utility 3 35 DBFLTMASK environment variable 3 36 DBLANG environment variable 3 37 dbload utility 2 10 2 11 2 44 3 35 D
16. 1 75 updating 1 13 use by database server 1 7 user defined aggregates 1 17 user defined data types 1 78 1 79 views 1 70 1 76 See also System catalog System control panel 3 18 System environment variable 3 18 System requirements database 4 software 4 System security officer DBSSO 3 73 Index 17 A BC D E F GH SYSTEM command on NT 3 74 systraceclasses system catalog table 1 72 systracemsgs system catalog table 1 73 systrigbody system catalog table 1 74 systriggers system catalog table 1 75 sysusers system catalog table 1 76 sysutils database 1 6 sysuuid database 1 6 sysviews system catalog table 1 76 sysviolations systems catalog table 1 77 sysxtddesc system catalog table 1 78 sysxtdtypeauth system catalog table 1 78 sysxtdtypes system catalog table 1 79 2 35 T tabid description 1 8 1 71 Table changing a column data type 2 62 dependencies in sysdepend 1 37 fragmented 1 43 hashing parameters 1 67 hierarchy 1 50 2 37 B 25 inheritance sysinherits data 1 50 lock mode 3 56 nonfragmented 3 53 separate from large object storage 2 48 structure in superstores_demo database B 7 synonyms in syssyntable 1 66 system catalog tables 1 17 to 1 79 temporary 3 46 3 48 temporary in SE 3 48 typed and named ROW type 2 37 untyped and unnamed ROW 2 38 Table based fragmentation 1 44 18 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvYvY Z Table level privilege PUBLIC 1 81 sysfragauth data 1
17. B 12 cust_calls table columns B 9 description B 6 items table columns B 13 manufact table columns B 17 orders table columns B 14 B 15 B 16 B 18 primary foreign key relationships B 25 to B 28 sales_rep table columns B 19 stock table columns B 20 stock_discount table columns B 21 structure of tables B 7 Supertable 1 50 B 14 B 25 Supertype 1 50 2 36 Support function routine identifier 1 58 Support functions 2 34 2 59 Symbol table 1 58 1 59 Synonym syssynonyms data 1 66 syssyntable data 1 66 systables data 1 69 Syntax conventions description of 10 sysaggregates system catalog table 1 17 sysams system catalog table 1 18 sysattrtypes system catalog table 1 21 sysblobs system catalog table 1 22 sysbuiltintypes table 1 6 syscasts system catalog table 1 23 2 62 syschecks system catalog table 1 24 syscheckudrdep system catalog table 1 25 syscolattribs system catalog table 1 26 syscolauth system catalog table 1 27 syscoldepend system catalog table 1 28 syscolumns system catalog table 1 29 sysconstraints system catalog table 1 34 syscrd database 1 6 sysdefaults system catalog table 1 35 sysdepend system catalog table 1 37 sysdistrib system catalog table 1 37 sysdomains system catalog table 1 39 syserrors system catalog table 1 39 sysextcols system catalog table 1 40 sysextdfiles system catalog table 1 41 sysexternal system catalog table 1 41 sysfragauth system catalog table 1 42 sysfragments system catalog tabl
18. City for address country VARCHAR 25 Country for address province_code CHAR 2 Province code zipcode CHAR 9 Zip code phone CHAR 15 Phone number The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 15 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables B 16 The location_us Table The location_us table contains specific address information for locations addresses that are in the United States Figure B 16 shows the columns of the location_us table Figure B 16 The location_us Table Name Type Description g u location_id SERIAL Unique identifier for location loc_type CHAR 2 Code to indicate type of location company VARCHAR 20 Name of company street_addr LIST VARCHAR 25 Street address NOT NULL city VARCHAR 25 City for address country VARCHAR 25 Country for address state_code CHAR 2 State code foreign key to state table zip CHAR 9 Zip code phone CHAR 15 Phone number IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables The manufact Table Information about the manufacturers whose sporting goods are handled by the distributor is stored in the manufact table Figure B 17 shows the columns of the manufact table Name manu_code manu_name lead_time manu_loc manu_account account_status terms_net discount Type CHAR 3 VARCHAR 15 INTERVAL DAY 3 TO DAY INTEGER CHAR 32 CHAR 1 SMALLINT percent Figure B 17 The manufact Table Description Manufacturer code
19. Data in the stores_ demo Database A 46 code GA HI IA ID IL IN KY LA MA MD ME MI MN MO MS IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference sname Georgia Hawaii Iowa Idaho Illinois Indiana Kentucky Louisiana Massachusetts Maryland Maine Michigan Minnesota Missouri Mississippi code OK OR PA PR SC TN TX UT VA VT WA WI WV WY sname Oklahoma Oregon Pennsylvania Puerto Rico Rhode Island South Carolina Tennessee Texas Utah Virginia Vermont Washington Wisconsin West Virginia Wyoming 2 of 2 Appendix The sales demo and superstores demo Databases In addition to the stores_demo database that is described in detail in Appendix A Informix products include the following demonstration databases m The sales_demo database illustrates a dimensional schema for data warehousing applications m The superstores_demo database illustrates an object relational schema This appendix discusses the structures of these two demon stration databases For information on how to create and populate the demon stration databases including relevant SQL files see the DB Access User s Manual For conceptual information about demonstration databases see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation The sales_demo Database Your database server product contains SQL scripts for the sales_demo dimensional database The sales_demo database provides an example of a simpl
20. Description Customer code references customer District code references geography Time code references time Product code references product Number of units sold Amount of sales revenue Cost of sale Net profit of sale The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 5 The superstores_ demo Database B 6 The time Table The time table contains time information about the sale Figure B 6 shows the columns of the time table Figure B 6 The time Table Name Type Description time_code INTEGER Time code order_date DATE Order date month_code SMALLINT Month code month_name CHAR 10 Name of month quarter_code SMALLINT Quarter code quarter_name CHAR 10 Name of quarter year INTEGER Year The superstores_demo Database SQL files and user defined routines UDRs that are provided with DB Access let you derive the superstores_demo object relational database The superstores_demo database uses the default locale and is not ANSI compliant This section provides the following superstores_demo information The structure of all the tables in the superstores_demo database A list and definition of the extended data types that superstores_demo uses A map of table hierarchies The primary foreign key relationships among the columns in the database tables IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Structure of the superstores_demo Tables For information on how to create and populate the superstores_demo database se
21. Name of manufacturer Lead time for shipment of orders Manufacturer location foreign key to location table Distributor account number with manufacturer Status of account with manufacturer Distributor terms with manufacturer in days Distributor volume discount with manufacturer The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 17 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables B 18 The orders Table The orders table contains information about orders placed by the customers of the distributor Figure B 18 shows the columns of the orders table Figure B 18 The orders Table Name Type Description g u order_num SERIAL8 1001 System generated order number order_date DATE Date order entered customer_num INTEGER Customer number foreign key to customer table shipping ship_t Special shipping instructions backlog BOOLEAN Indicates order cannot be filled because the item is back ordered po_num CHAR 10 Customer purchase order number paid_date DATE Date order paid The region Table The region table contains information about the sales regions for the distributor Figure B 19 shows the columns of the region table Figure B 19 The region Table Name Type Description g u region_num SERIAL System generated region number region_name VARCHAR 20 Name of sales region UNIQUE region_loc INTEGER Location of region office foreign key to IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference location table Structure of t
22. Not for Extended Parallel Server A database server installation option that allows different users to perform different administrative tasks The process that reverses an action or series of actions on a database The database is returned to the condition that existed before the actions were executed See also transaction and commit work The initial dbspace that the database server creates It contains reserved pages and internal tables that describe and track all other dbspaces blobspaces sbspaces tblspaces chunks and databases A single index page that contains node pointers to branch nodes The database server allocates the root node when you create an index for an empty table The named row type at the top of a type hierarchy A root supertype has no super type above it A dbslice that contains the root dbspaces for all coservers for Extended Par allel Server See also dbslice logslice and physslice A distribution scheme in which the database server distributes rows sequen tially and evenly across specified dbspaces A group of program statements that perform a particular task A routine can be a function or a procedure All routines can accept arguments See also built in and user defined routine A keyword in the WITH clause of a CREATE FUNCTION CREATE PROCE DURE ALTER FUNCTION ALTER PROCEDURE or ALTER ROUTINE statement that specifies a particular attribute or usage of a user defined routine The ability to as
23. Number that changes when table is altered Code indicating the type of object T Table V View P Private synonym S Public synonym Type Sis not available in an ANSI compliant database E External Table Lock mode for the table B Page P Page R Row T Table XPS Number of data pages that have ever been initialized in the tablespace by the database server Size of initial extent in kilobytes Size of all subsequent extents in kilobytes Codes for classifying permanent tables ST_RAW 0x00000010 IDS RAW 0x00000002 XPS STATIC 0x00000004 XPS OPERATIONAL 0x00000008 XPS STANDARD 0x00000010 XPS EXTERNAL 0x00000020 XPS Reserved for future use Reserved for future use Code from sysxtdtypes extended_id for typed tables or 0 for untyped tables Access method code key to sysams table NULL or 0 indicates built in storage manager 2 of 2 GLS SYSTABLES Each table view synonym and sequence recorded in the systables table is assigned a tabid which is a system assigned SERIAL value that uniquely identifies the object The first 99 tabid numbers are reserved for system catalog tables values for user defined objects begin with 100 The tabid column is indexed and contains only unique values A composite index on the tabname and owner columns also requires unique values The version column contains an encoded number that is stored in systables when a
24. PATH The PATH environment variable tells the operating system where to search for executable programs You must include the directory that contains your Informix product to your PATH environment variable before you can use the product This directory should appear before INFORMIXDIR bin which you must also include The UNIX PATH environment variable tells the shell which directories to search for executable programs You must add the directory that contains your Informix product to your PATH setting before you can use the product pathname specifies the search path for the executables You can specify the correct search path in various ways Be sure to include a colon separator between the pathnames on UNIX systems Use semicolon as the separator between pathnames on Windows systems For additional information about how to modify your path see Modifying an Environment Variable Setting on page 3 10 3 84 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference PDQPRIORITY PDQPRIORITY The PDQPRIORITY environment variable determines the degree of parallelism that the database server uses and affects how the database server allocates resources including memory processors and disk reads XPS For Extended Parallel Server the PDOPRIORITY environment variable deter mines only the allocation of memory resources setenv PDQPRIORITY resources resources Is an integer in the range 0 to 100 Value 0 is the
25. SPL function SPL procedure SPL routine SPL variable SQL SQL API A large object that is stored in an sbspace which has read write and seek prop erties similar to a UNIX file is recoverable obeys transaction isolation modes and can be retrieved in segments by an application Smart large objects include BLOB and CLOB data types Acronym for system monitoring interface See symmetric multiprocessing system A text file that contains instructions in a high level language such as C A C source file is compiled into an executable file called an object file An SPL source file is compiled into its own executable format See also compile The data type from which a DISTINCT type is derived A name that you can assign to an overloaded user defined routine to uniquely identify a particular signature of the user defined routine See also routine overloading and routine signature The ability to add computing hardware to achieve correspondingly faster performance for a DSS query or OLTP operation of a given volume See Stored Procedure Language SPL An SPL routine that returns one or more values An SPL routine that does not return a value A user defined routine that is written in Stored Procedure Language SPL Its name parameters executable format and other information are stored in the system catalog tables of a database An SPL routine can be an SPL procedure or an SPL function A variable that is declared with the D
26. With aggregate functions With the IN clause With the MATCHES or LIKE clauses With the GROUP BY clause With the ORDER BY clause BYTE operands are valid in Boolean expressions only when you are testing for NULL values with the IS NULL or IS NOT NULL operators You can insert data into BYTE columns in the following ways m With the dbload or onload utilities m With the LOAD statement DB Access m From BYTE host variables Informix ESQL C DataTypes 2 11 CHAR n GLS You cannot use a quoted text string number or any other actual value to insert or update BYTE columns When you select a BYTE column you can choose to receive all or part of it To retrieve it all use the regular syntax for selecting a column You can also select any part of a BYTE column by using subscripts as the following example shows SELECT cat_picture 1 75 FROM catalog WHERE catalog_num 10001 This statement reads the first 75 bytes of the cat_picture column associated with the catalog number 10001 The database server provides a cast to convert BYTE values to BLOB values For more information see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation If you select a BYTE column using the DB Access Interactive Schema Editor only the string lt BYTE value gt is returned no data value is displayed Important Ifyou try to return a BYTE column from a subquery you get an error message even when the BYTE
27. coding scheme that assigns unique integer values to letters digits punctua tion marks and certain other nonprintable and printable characters used in computers and telecommunication It contains 128 characters each of which can be represented with 7 bits of information The code set of every Informix locale includes the ASCII characters as a subset See also single byte character Acronym for Associated Services Facility The code in the ASF portion of Informix products controls the connections between client applications and database servers System developers use this term users of Informix prod ucts see this term only in occasional error messages A class of legacy products that support various multibyte code sets whose characters can require up to 32 bits of storage ALS servers and tools were available for certain Version 6 x and earlier families of products that were designed to handle East Asian language processing The functionality of ALS is replaced by Global Language Support GLS in current Informix products For more information about ALS and GLS see the Informix Migration Guide Glossary 3 attached index audit event audit file audit mask auxiliary statements B tree An index that is created without an explicit fragmentation strategy You create an attached index by omitting both the distribution scheme specified by the FRAGMENT BY clause and the storage option specified by the IN clause of the CREATE IND
28. database B 8 CARDINALITY function 2 30 2 33 2 42 Cascading delete 1 63 Cast 2 62 to 2 69 built in 1 23 2 63 to 2 67 distinct data type 2 68 explicit 1 23 2 66 2 67 from BYTE to BLOB 2 12 from TEXT to CLOB 2 45 implicit 1 23 2 66 2 67 rules of precedence 2 67 syscasts data 1 23 CAST AS keywords 2 66 Cast operator 2 66 2 70 CHAR data type built in casts 2 64 collation 2 12 2 13 2 48 conversion to NCHAR 2 34 3 40 3 41 description 2 12 multibyte values 2 14 nonprintable characters 2 13 storing numeric values 2 13 Character data types Boolean comparisons 2 47 casting between 2 63 data strings 2 8 listed 2 48 syscolumns data 1 32 CHARACTER data type See CHAR data type Character string CHAR data type 2 12 CHARACTER VARYING data type 2 14 CLOB data type 2 14 ABCDEFGH I DATETIME literals 2 19 2 55 3 51 INTERVAL literals 2 28 LVARCHAR data type 2 31 NCHAR data type 2 34 NVARCHAR data type 2 34 TEXT data type 2 44 VARCHAR data type 2 46 with DELIMIDENT set 3 54 CHARACTER VARYING data type description 2 14 length syscolumns 1 32 See also VARCHAR data type Character based applications 3 72 3 92 Check constraint creation time value 3 31 3 34 syschecks data 1 24 syscheckudrdep data 1 25 syscoldepend data 1 28 sysconstraints data 1 35 chkenv utility 3 8 error message 3 12 syntax 3 11 Chunk 2 49 3 46 Client server Datablade API 2 51 default database 3 68 INFORMIXSOLHOSTS environment variabl
29. lt function id gt col1 coln operator class id Unique identifying code of the access method that implements this index Value am_id for that access method in the sysams table List of parameters used to customize the behavior of this access method 2 of 2 Tip This system catalog table is changed from the 7 2 version of Informix database servers The earlier schema of this system catalog table is still available as a view and can be accessed under its original name sysindexes Changes that affect existing indexes are reflected in this system catalog table only after you run the UPDATE STATISTICS statement The fields within the indexkeys columns have the following significance m The function id appears only if the index is on return values of a function that is defined over the columns of the table That is if the index is a functional index Here the function id is the same as the procid value for the function in the sysprocedures table m The list of the columns col1 coln in the second field identifies the columns over which the index is defined m The operator class id shows the secondary access method that is used to build and to search the index Here the operator class id is the same as the opclassid of the access method in the sysopclasses table The tabid column is indexed and allows duplicate values A composite index on the idxname owner and tabid columns allows only unique values Syste
30. m Asan argument to the CARDINALITY or mi_collection_card function to determine the number of elements in a MULTISET column You cannot use MULTISET values as arguments to an aggregate function such as AVG MAX MIN or SUM Two MULTISET data values are equal if they have the same elements even if the elements are in different positions within the set The following examples are both MULTISET values but are not equal MULTISET blue green yellow MULTISET blue green yellow blue The following MULTISET values are equal MULTISET blue green blue yellow MULTISET blue green yellow blue Named Row See Row Named on page 2 35 Data Types 2 33 NCHAR n GLS GLS NCHAR n The NCHAR data type stores fixed length character data The data can be a sequence of single byte or multibyte letters digits and other symbols The main difference between CHAR and NCHAR data types is the collation order While the collation order of the CHAR data type is defined by the code set order the collation order of the NCHAR data type depends on the locale specific localized order For more information about NCHAR see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality See also the description of DBNLS on page 3 40 NUMERIC p s The NUMERIC data type is a synonym for fixed point DECIMAL NVARCHAR m r The NVARCHAR data type stores strings of varying lengths The string can include digit
31. only the tabid and btabid columns are used If you define a synonym for a table that is external to your current database the btabid column is not used but the tabid servername dbname owner and tabname columns are used The tabid column maps to systables tabid With the tabid information you can determine additional facts about the synonym from systables An index on the tabid column allows only unique values The btabid column is indexed to allow duplicate values In an ANSI compliant database public synonyms are not supported for this reason the syssyntable table remains empty SYSTABAM DATA The systabamdata system catalog table stores the parameter options table specific hashing parameters that you chose when you created a table using a primary access method The systabamdata table has the following columns Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Identifying code of the table am_param CHAR 256 Access method parameter choices am_space VARCHAR 128 Name of the space where the data values are stored System Catalog Tables 1 67 SYSTABAUTH The am_param column stores configuration parameters that determine how a primary access method accesses a given table Each configuration parameter in the am_param list has the format keyword value or keyword The am_space column specifies the location of the table It might reside in a cooked file a different database or an sbspace within the database server The tabid co
32. or if it adds additional fields then the database server returns an error All fields of a DATETIME column are two digit numbers except for the year and fraction fields The year field is stored as four digits When you enter a two digit value in the year field how the abbreviated year is expanded to four digits depends on the setting of the DBCENTURY environment variable DataTypes 2 19 DATETIME GLS For example if you enter 02 as the year value whether the year is interpreted as 1902 2002 or 2102 depends on the setting of DBCENTURY and on the value of the system clock calendar at execution time If you do not set DBCENTURY then the leading digits of the current year are appended by default For information about setting DBCENTURY see DBCENTURY on page 3 28 The fraction field requires n digits where 1 n 5 rounded up to an even number You can use the following formula rounded up to a whole number of bytes to calculate the number of bytes that a DATETIME value requires total number of digits for all fields 2 1 For example a YEAR TO DAY qualifier requires a total of eight digits four for year two for month and two for day According to the formula this data value requires 5 or 8 2 1 bytes of storage For information on how to use DATETIME values in arithmetic and relational expressions see Manipulating DATE with DATETIME and INTERVAL Values on page 2 54 For more information on the D
33. prompt utilities Setting Environment Variables for Native Windows Applications Native Windows Informix applications such as the database server itself store their configuration information in the Windows registry To modify this information you must use the Registry Editor regedt32 exe To manipulate environment variables with the Registry Editor 1 Launch the Registry Editor regedt32 exe and choose the window titled HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE 2 Inthe left pane double click the SOFTWARE registry key shown as a small yellow file folder icon The SOFTWARE registry key expands to show several subkeys one of which is Informix Continue down the tree in the following sequence OnLine dbservername Environment Substitute the name of your database server in place of dbservername 3 With the Environment registry key selected in the left pane you should see a list of environment variables and their values in the right pane for example CLIENT_LOCALE REG_SZ EN_US CP1252 Environment Variables 3 13 Setting Environment Variables for Native Windows Applications 4 Change existing environment variables if needed a Double click the environment variable b Type the new value in the String Editor dialog box c Click OK to accept the value 5 Add new environment variables if needed a Choose Edit gt Add Value in the Registry Editor b Enter the name of the environment variable in the Value Name edit box and choose REG_SZ as the d
34. sible Markup Language XML data The term smart large object refers to CLOB and BLOB data types The CLOB data type supports special operations for character strings that are inappropriate for BLOB values A CLOB value can be up to 4 terabytes in length Use the BLOB data type see BLOB on page 2 9 for random access to binary data For general information about the CLOB and BLOB data types see Smart Large Objects on page 2 50 2 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS CLOB You can use the following SQL functions to perform some operations on a CLOB column FILETOCLOB copies a file into a CLOB column LOTOFILE copies a CLOB or BLOB value into an operating system file m LOCOPY copies an existing smart large object to a new smart large object For more information on these SQL functions see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax No casts exist for CLOB data Therefore the database server cannot convert data of the CLOB type to any other data type Within SQL you are limited to the equality comparison operation for CLOB data To perform additional operations you must use one of the application programming interfaces from within your client application Multibyte Characters with CLOB You can insert data into CLOB columns in the following ways m With the dbload or onload utilities m With the LOAD statement DB Access m From CLOB ifx_lo_t host variables Informix ESQL C For more information and
35. the first fragment of a globally detached index XPS 2 of 3 Column dbspace levels npused nrows clust hybdpos XPS Type VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 SMALLINT INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER IDS XPS SYSFRAGMENTS Explanation Name of dbspace for fragment Number of B tree index levels For table fragmentation strategy npused is the number of data pages for index fragmentation strategy npused is the number of leaf pages For tables nrows represents the number of rows in the fragment for indexes nrows represents the number of unique keys Degree of index clustering smaller numbers correspond to greater clustering Contains the relative position of the hybrid fragment within a dbslice or list of dbspaces associated with a particular expression IDS The hybrid fragmentation strategy and the set of fragments against which the hybrid strategy is applied determines the relative position The first fragment has a hybdpos value of zero 0 XPS 3 of 3 The strategy type T is used for attached indexes This is a fragmented index whose fragmentation is the same as the table fragmentation A composite index on the fragtype tabid indexname and evalpos columns allows duplicate values A composite index on the fragtype tabid indexname evalpos and hybdpos columns allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 45 SYSINDEXES 1 46 columns Column idxname
36. 1 68 3 80 PDATE statement 1 77 2 11 2 44 3 61 PDATE STATISTICS FOR PROCEDURE statement 1 62 PDATE STATISTICS statement 3 52 and DBUPSPACE environment variable 3 52 JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvY ze effect on sysdistrib table 1 38 sysindices data 1 49 sysindices index statistics 1 55 update system catalog 1 13 pdate trigger 1 75 ppercase mode codes 1 61 ppercase privilege codes 1 10 1 27 1 42 1 68 1 78 sage privilege 1 78 SEOSTIME configuration parameter 2 20 ser environment variable 3 18 ser informix 1 12 1 23 ser name 1 86 ser privileges syscolauth data 1 27 sysfragauth data 1 42 syslangauth data 1 50 sysprocauth data 1 56 systabauth data 1 68 sysusers data 1 76 sysxtdtypeauth data 1 78 User defined aggregates 1 17 User defined casts 1 23 2 66 User defined data type casting 2 66 casting into built in type 2 62 opaque 2 61 sysxtddesc data 1 78 sysxtdtypes data 1 78 1 79 UDT indexes 3 53 User defined routine casts syscasts 1 23 check constraints syscheckudrdep 1 25 error messages syserrors 1 39 for opaque data types 2 35 language authorization syslangauth 1 50 privileges 1 56 3 80 protected 1 61 secondary access method 1 34 sysprocedures data 1 58 Utility archecker 3 24 chkenv 3 8 3 11 DB Access 1 12 1 81 3 7 3 27 3 36 3 68 B 2 dbexport 3 35 GENE ENE CE Ere dbload 2 10 2 11 2 44 dbschema 1 40 1 41 1 42 1 61 dce_login 3 67 env 3 11 export 3 9 gec 3 63 getenv 3
37. 2 21 detached indexes 3 53 detail level 3 75 disk space for sorting 3 52 fetch buffer size 3 55 heap size 3 78 isolation level 1 86 join method 3 81 level of parallelism 3 86 lock mode 3 57 message directory 3 37 MONEY scale 2 32 operator class 1 18 1 53 printing program 3 44 query optimizer goal 3 83 sysdefaults default 1 35 table privileges 3 80 temporary dbspace 3 47 termcap file 3 93 text editor 3 35 Default locale 5 DEFAULT_ATTACH environment variable 3 53 DEFINE statement of SPL 2 39 2 40 DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE configuration parameter 3 57 Delete privilege 1 43 1 68 3 80 DELETE statement 1 13 1 77 Delete trigger 1 75 DELIMIDENT environment variable 3 53 DELIMITED files 1 40 1 41 Delimited identifiers 3 53 Delimiter for DATETIME values 2 18 for fields 1 41 3 35 for identifiers 3 53 for INTERVAL values 2 28 Demonstration database structure of tables B 7 tables A 2 to A 8 Dependencies software 4 Descending index 1 47 DESCRIBE statement 3 61 Describe for updates 3 61 Detached index 3 53 Deutsche mark DM currency symbol 3 39 Diagnostics table 1 77 DIRECTIVES configuration parameter 3 58 Directives for query optimization 3 58 3 81 3 84 Disabled object 1 77 Disk space for data distributions 3 52 for temporary data 3 47 Distinct data type casts 2 68 description 2 23 sysxtddesc data 1 78 sysxtdtypes data 1 79 1 80 2 24 Distributed Computing Environment DCE 3 94 Distributed query 3 56 Documentation n
38. 3 56 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Documentation Conventions Documentation Conventions This section describes the conventions that this manual uses These conventions make it easier to gather information from this and other volumes in the documentation set Typographical Conventions This manual uses the following conventions to introduce new terms illustrate screen displays describe command syntax and so forth Convention Meaning KEYWORD All primary elements in a programming language statement keywords appear in uppercase letters in a serif font italics Within text new terms and emphasized words appear in italics italics Within syntax and code examples variable values that you are italics to specify appear in italics boldface Names of program entities such as classes events and tables boldface environment variables file and pathnames and interface elements such as icons menu items and buttons appear in boldface monospace Information that the product displays and information that you monospace enter appear ina monospace typeface KEYSTROKE Keys that you are to press appear in uppercase letters in a sans serif font This symbol indicates the end of product or platform specific information gt This symbol indicates a menu item For example Choose Tools gt Options means choose the Options item from the Tools menu Tip When you are instructed to enter cha
39. 3 70 for C map file 3 66 for database server 3 42 for dynamic link libraries 3 79 3 91 for environment configuration file 3 12 for executable programs 3 84 for installation 3 67 for keytab file 3 67 for message files 3 37 for parallel sorting 3 89 for remote shell 3 45 for smart large object handles 3 87 for temporary jar files 3 77 for termcap file 3 93 for terminfo directory 3 94 for XBSA messages 3 75 JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze for xfer_config file 3 95 separator symbols 3 84 PDQ OPTCOMPIND environment variable 3 81 PDQPRIORITY environment variable 3 85 PDQPRIORITY configuration parameter 3 86 Percentage symbol 3 49 Period DATE delimiter 3 33 DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 Permissions 3 8 3 37 Platform icons 8 PLCONFIG environment variable 3 87 plconfig file 3 87 PLOAD_LO_PATH environment variable 3 87 PLOAD_SHMBASE environment variable 3 88 PostScript 2 14 Precedence rules for casts 2 67 for lock mode 3 57 for native Windows application 3 18 for SQL operators 2 70 for UNIX environment variables 3 12 for Windows environment variables 3 18 Precision of currency values 2 31 of numbers 2 21 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 43 2 64 of time values 2 17 2 26 2 52 2 57 PREPARE statement 1 71 Prepared statement 1 71 Primary access method 1 19 1 67 Primary key 1 35 1 63 1 77 2 39 2 40 A 2 B 8 Primary thread 3 71 printenv utility 3 11 Printing with DBPRINT 3 45 Private environment
40. 30 00 case 6pairs case 109 SHM pedal binding 200 00 case 4pairs case 110 PRC helmet 236 00 case 4 case 110 ANZ helmet 244 00 case 4 case 110 SHM helmet 228 00 case 4 case 110 HRO helmet 260 00 case 4 case 110 HSK helmet 308 00 case 4 case 111 SHM 10 spd assmbld 499 99 each each 112 SHM 12 spd assmbld 549 00 each each 113 SHM 18 spd assmbld 685 90 each each 114 PRC bicycle gloves 120 00 case 10 pairs case 201 NKL golf shoes 37 50 each each 201 ANZ golf shoes 75 00 each each 201 KAR golf shoes 90 00 each each 202 NKL metal woods 174 00 case 2 sets case 202 KAR std woods 230 00 case 2 sets case 203 NKL irons wedges 670 00 case 2 sets case 204 KAR putter 45 00 each each 205 NKL 3 golf balls 312 00 case 24 case 205 ANZ 3 golf balls 312 00 case 24 case 205 HRO 3 golf balls 312 00 case 24 case 301 NKL running shoes 97 00 each each 2 of 3 stock_num manu_code 301 301 301 301 301 302 302 303 303 304 304 305 306 306 307 308 309 309 310 310 311 312 312 313 313 HRO SHM PRC KAR ANZ HRO KAR PRC KAR ANZ HRO HRO PRC SHM PRC PRC HRO SHM SHM ANZ SHM SHM HRO SHM ANZ description running shoes running shoes running shoes running shoes running shoes ice pack ice pack socks socks watch watch first aid kit tandem adapter tandem adapter infant jogger twin jogger ear drops ear drops kick board kick board water gloves racer goggles racer goggles swim cap swim cap Data
41. 6 2 VARCHAR 40 Table Hierarchies Table Hierarchies Figure B 25 shows how the hierarchical tables of the superstores_demo database are related customer customer_num location customer_type location_id customer_name loc_type customer_loc company contact_dates street_addr cust_discount city credit_status country retail_customer whlsale_customer credit_num expiration location_us location_non_us resale_license oe He ed terms_net p p phone phone Referential Relationships references the primary key in another table The customer and orders Tables the customer_num column in the customer table Figure B 25 Hierarchies of superstores_demo Tables The tables of the superstores_demo database are linked by the primary foreign key relationships that are identified in this section This type of relationship is called a referential constraint because a foreign key in one table The customer table contains a customer_num column that holds a number that identifies a customer The orders table also contains a customer_num column that stores the number of the customer who placed a particular order In the orders table the customer_num column is a foreign key that references The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 25 Referential Relationships B 26 The orders and items Tables The orders and items tables are linked by an order_num column that contains an identification number
42. An arithmetic expression contains the operators x and so on and evaluates as a number A distribution scheme that distributes rows to fragments according to a user specified expression that is defined in the WHERE clause of an SOL statement A term used to refer to data types that are not built in namely complex data types opaque data types and distinct data types A continuous segment of disk space that a database server allocated to a tbl space a table The user can specify both the initial extent size for a table and the size of all subsequent extents that a database server allocates to the table An external routine that returns a single value An external routine that does not return a value A user defined routine that is written in an external language that the database supports These external languages include the C and Java languages The routine names parameters and other information are registered in the sys tem catalog tables of a database However the executable code of an external routine is stored outside the database An external routine can be an external function or an external procedure Glossary 21 external space external table extspace family name fault tolerance fetch fetch buffer field file file server filename extension filter filtering mode Storage space that a user defined access method manages rather than the database server The IN clause of the CREA
43. Delimiter Placement in DATETIME Expression Hyphen Between the YEAR and MONTH portions of the value Blank space Between the DAY and HOUR portions of the value Colon cag the HOUR MINUTE and SECOND portions of the value Decimal point Between the SECOND and FRACTION portions of the value You can also enter INTERVAL values as character strings The character string must include information for the same sequence of time units that was declared for the column The INSERT statement in the following example shows an INTERVAL value entered as a character string INSERT INTO manufact manu_code manu_name lead_time VALUES BRO Ball Racquet Originals 160 2 28 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference LIST e Because the lead_time column is defined as INTERVAL DAY 3 TO DAY this INTERVAL value requires only one field the span of days required for lead time If the character string does not contain information for all fields or adds additional fields the database server returns an error For more infor mation on entering INTERVAL values as character strings see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax By default all fields of an INTERVAL column are two digit numbers except for the year and fraction fields The year field is stored as four digits The fraction field requires n digits where 1 n 5 rounded up to an even number You can use the following formula rounded up to a whole number of bytes to calculate the number of bytes req
44. Description of call type The manufact Table Information about the nine manufacturers whose sporting goods are handled by the distributor is stored in the manufact table Figure A 8 shows the columns of the manufact table Figure A 8 The manufact Table Column Name Data Type Description manu_code CHAR 3 Manufacturer code manu_name CHAR 15 Name of manufacturer lead_time INTERVAL DAY 3 TO DAY Lead time for shipment of orders The stores_demo Database A 7 The state Table The state Table The state table contains the names and postal abbreviations for the 50 states of the United States Figure A 9 shows the columns of the state table Figure A 9 The state Table Column Name Data Type Description code CHAR 2 State code sname CHAR 15 State name The stores_demo Database Map Figure A 10 displays the joins in the stores_demo database The grey shading that connects a column in one table to a column with the same name in another table indicates the relationships or joins between tables A 8 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Figure A 10 Joins in the stores_demo Database orders catalog catalog_num cust_calls customer order_date Ma utadl 6 Y sseqejeg ouep SeJO s ay call_type code_descr call_dtime fname ship_instruct quantity description cat_descr manu_name user_id call_descr Iname backlog total_price unit_price cat_picture lead_time
45. Figure A 13 shows this relationship stock Table detail stock_num manu_code 1 HRO 1 HSK 1 SMT IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference items Table detail item_num order_num stock_num manu_code 1 1001 1 HRO 1 1002 4 HSK 2 1002 3 HSK 1 1003 9 ANZ 2 1003 8 ANZ 3 1003 5 ANZ 1 1004 1 HRO description baseball gloves baseball gloves baseball gloves The items table and the stock table are joined by two columns the stock_num column which stores a stock number for an item and the manu_code column which stores a code that identifies the manufacturer You need both the stock number and the manufacturer code to uniquely identify an item For example the item with the stock number 1 and the manufacturer code HRO is a Hero baseball glove the item with the stock number 1 and the manufacturer code HSK is a Husky baseball glove The same stock number and manufacturer code can appear in more than one row of the items table if the same item belongs to separate orders In the items table the stock_num and manu_code columns are foreign keys that reference the stock_num and manu_code columns in the stock table Figure A 13 Tables That the stock_num and manu_code Columns Join The stock and catalog Tables The stock and catalog Tables The stock table and catalog table are joined by two columns the stock_num column which stores a stock number for an item and the manu_code column which stores a code that identifies
46. Guide to Database Design and Implementation DISTINCT Data Types A DISTINCT data type has the same internal structure as some other source data type in the database The source data type can be either a built in type or an extended type What distinguishes a DISTINCT type from the source type are the functions defined on this type For more information see the description in Distinct on page 2 23 OPAQUE Data Types An OPAQUE data type is a user defined data type that is fully encapsulated that is whose internal structure is unknown to the database server For more information see the description in Opaque on page 2 34 DataTypes 2 61 Data Type Casting and Conversion 2 62 Data Type Casting and Conversion Occasionally the data type that was assigned to a column with the CREATE TABLE statement is inappropriate You might want to change the data type of acolumn when you need to store larger values than the current data type can accommodate The database server allows you to change the data type of the column or to cast its values to a different data type with either of the following methods m Use the ALTER TABLE statement to modify the data type of a column For example if you create a SMALLINT column and later find that you need to store integers larger than 32 767 you must change the data type of that column to store the larger value You can use ALTER TABLE to change the data type to INTEGER The conver
47. LVARCHAR 2 31 MONEY 2 31 MULTISET 2 32 NCHAR 2 34 NUMERIC 2 34 NVARCHAR 2 34 OPAQUE 2 34 REAL 2 35 ROW 2 35 2 37 SERIAL 2 39 SERIAL8 2 40 SET 2 41 SMALLFLOAT 2 43 SMALLINT 2 43 TEXT 2 44 VARCHAR 2 46 Data types approximate 1 83 casting 2 62 to 2 69 classified by category 2 5 collection 2 59 complex 2 58 conversion 2 62 distinct 2 23 2 61 exact numeric 1 83 extended 2 57 fixed point 2 21 floating point 2 21 2 25 2 43 inheritance 2 36 JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvY ze internal 2 9 named ROW 2 35 opaque 2 34 2 61 sequential integer 2 40 simple large object 2 49 smart large object 2 50 summary list 2 6 unique numeric value 2 40 unnamed ROW 2 37 Data warehousing B 1 Database data types 2 5 dimensional B 2 identifiers 3 53 joins in stores_demo A 9 object relational B 1 objects sysobjectstate data 1 52 privileges 1 76 sales_demo B 1 stores_demo A 1 superstores_demo B 3 B 6 syscrd 1 6 sysmaster 1 6 sysutils 1 6 sysuuid 1 6 Database identifiers 3 54 Database server attributes in Information Schema view 1 85 codeset 1 86 coserver name 3 69 default connection 3 68 default isolation level 1 86 optimizing queries 3 84 pathname for 3 42 remote 3 56 role separation 3 73 server name 1 36 3 43 DATABASE statement 3 42 Database system administrator DBSA 1 6 Database system security officer DBSSO 3 73 DataBlade module Client and Server API 2 51 data types sysbuiltintypes 1 6 trace messages systracemsgs 1 72
48. SELECT statement to search for matching row values For more information see the Condition section in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax 2 38 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SERIAL n SERIAL n The SERIAL data type stores a sequential integer that is automatically assigned by the database server when a new row is inserted You can define only one SERIAL column in a table SERIAL values in a column are not automatically unique You must apply a unique index or primary key constraint to this column to prevent duplicate SERIAL numbers If you use the interactive schema editor in DB Access to define the table a unique index is applied automatically to a SERIAL column Also SERIAL numbers might not be contiguous due to such factors as multiuser systems and rollbacks The DEFINE variable LIKE column syntax of SPL for indirect typing declares a variable of the INTEGER data type if column is a SERIAL data type The default SERIAL starting number is 1 but you can assign a non default initial value n when you create or alter the table Any number greater than 0 can be your starting number The maximum SERIAL is 2 147 483 647 If you assign a number greater than 2 147 483 647 you receive a syntax error Use the SERIAL8 data type rather than SERIAL if you need a larger range After a nonzero number is assigned it cannot be changed You can insert a value into a SERIAL column using the INSERT statement or reset a SERIAL colum
49. SYSTRACECLASSES 2 s 2 en 1 72 SYSTRACEMSGS 2 ee een 1 73 SYSTRIGBODY s op a ee a OR a ee ok 1 74 SYSTRIGGERS 2 ww en 1 75 SYSUSERS lt 2 all eae ok Yee OE a BA 1 76 SYSVIEWS amp if ode ca Ba dee Selb A is Heed wd de cn ee 1 76 SYSVIOLATIONS 2s 40 ee e a e o 1 77 SYSXTIDDESG so aclh ao eB A es 1 78 SYSXTDTYPEAUTH grar 2 2 ee ee en 1 78 SYSXTDIXPES cd 46 2 de Se obs fe Rote iai oh has 1 79 Information Schema rado a ee Oe ets 1 80 Generating the tomo serena Views a eee ie Sh ye Le 1 81 Accessing the Information Schema Views 1 81 Structure of the Information Schema Views 1 82 Chapter 2 Data Types In This Chapter eisean a a A ac cay ete 2 5 Summary of Data Types 2 1 ee eee 2 5 Description of Data Dee ate ee Be KA Te ae Na Nee Gap F 2 9 BLOB 3 ecc ke a Ee e oR OE a es 2 9 BOOLEAN oo s aose 4 de oe a we 2 10 BYTE 2 ue Se TA oie oe fe ea ae 2 11 CHAR 22 4e 4 4 ad ak Se a et te cs 2 12 CHARACTER n pa Git OS Spm Te te YE ng 2 14 CHARACTER VARYING m D Ls AA 2 14 CLOB 4 4 48 os ii e A Gh ae 2 14 DATE da oo a ide ok el ad a wns 2 16 DATETIME 2 2 2 48 2 17 DEE ee ow le ge ee Oe a e a e A E 2 21 DECIMAL san f ai i A ds a GA le A 2 21 Distinct te he Me eh tae Bh eG oS 2 23 DOUBLE PRECISION weal wits gin fe ody Ree en te an A 2 24 FEOA Tis eh oe Some Ge be e 3 2 24 TIN Bahr A wa i ade 3 Gn th Se 2 25 TING OS
50. Table detail customer_num call_dtime call_code 106 1998 06 12 08 20 D 127 1998 07 31 14 30 I 116 1997 11 28 13 34 I 116 1997 12 21 11 24 I A 16 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The state and customer Tables The state and customer Tables The state table and the customer table are joined by a column that contains the state code This column is called code in the state table and state in the customer table If several customers live in the same state the same state code appears in several rows of the table In the customer table the state column is a foreign key that references the code column in the state table Figure A 18 shows this relationship Figure A 18 customer Table detail Relationship Between the state Column and the 101 Ludwig Pauli code Column 102 Carole Sadler 103 Philip Currie customer_num fname Iname state Table detail code sname AK Alaska AL Alabama AR Arkansas AZ Arizona CA California Data in the stores_demo Database The following tables display the data in the stores_demo database The stores_demo Database A 17 81 V eoueJejey TOS 019P ING xILOJU Wel customer Table customer_num fname Iname company address1 address2 city state zipcode phone 101 Ludwig Pauli All Sports 213 Erstwild Sunnyvale CA 94086 408 789 Supplies Court 8075 102 Carole Sadler Sports Spot 785 Geary Street San CA 94117 415 822 Francisco 1289 103 Philip Currie Phil s Sports 654
51. The highest precedence goes to the value that is defined in the environment by explicitly setting the value at the command prompt 2 The second highest precedence goes to the value that is defined in the System control panel as a User Environment Variable 3 The third highest precedence goes to the value that is defined in the System control panel as a System Environment Variable 4 The lowest precedence goes to the default value Important Because Windows services access only environment variables that are set in the registry the preceding rules of precedence do not apply for Informix native Windows applications For native Windows applications the highest precedence goes to variables that are explicitly defined in the registry and the lowest precedence goes to the default value In addition if you set one or more environment variables before you start the database server and you do not explicitly set the same environment variables for client products the clients will adopt the original settings List of Environment Variables Figure 3 1 on page 3 19 contains an alphabetical list of the environment variables that you can set for an Informix database server and SQL API products Most of these environment variables are described in this chapter on the pages listed in the Page column The Y symbol indicates that XPS or Dynamic Server or both if both columns are so marked support the environment variable The notation GLS
52. The syslogmap system catalog table contains fragmentation information Column Type Explanation tabloc INTEGER Code for the location of an external table tabid INTEGER Unique identifying code of the table fragid INTEGER Identifying code of the fragment flags INTEGER Bitmap of modifiers from declaration of fragment A simple index on the tabloc column and a composite index on the tabid and fragid columns do not allow duplicate values SYSNEWDEPEND The sysnewdepend system catalog table contains information about gener alized key indexes that is not available in the sysindexes table The dependencies between a generalized key index and the tables in the FROM clause of the CREATE INDEX statement are stored in the sysnewdepend table which has the following columns Column Type Explanation scrid1 char 18 Name of the generalized key index scrid2 INTEGER Unique identifying code tabid of the indexed table type INTEGER Code for the type of generalized key index destidl INTEGER The systables tabid value for the table on which the gener alized key index depends destid2 INTEGER The column number within the destid1 table A composite index on the scrid1 scrid2 and type columns allows duplicate values Another composite index on the destid1 destid2 and type columns also allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 51 SYSOBJSTATE rps SYSOBJSTATE The sysobjstate system catalog table stores information about the state
53. VARCHAR 128 CHAR 32 INTEGER CHAR 1 CHAR 3 INTEGER The sysams system catalog table contains information that is needed to use built in access methods as well as those created by the CREATE ACCESS METHOD statement of SQL that is described in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax The sysams table has the following columns Explanation Name of the access method Name of the owner of the access method Unique identifying code for an access method This corresponds to the am_id columns in the systables sysindices and sysopclasses tables Type of access method P Primary S Secondary Types of spaces in which the access method can exist Aor a all types extspaces dbspaces and sbspaces If the access method is not user defined that is if it is built in or registered during database creation by the server it supports dbspaces D or d dbspaces only Sors sbspaces only smart large object space X or x extspaces only Unique identifying code for default operator class Value is the opclassid from the entry for this operator class in the sysopclasses table 1 of 3 Column am_keyscan am_unique am_cluster am_rowids am_readwrite am_parallel am_costfactor am_create am_drop am_open Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER SMALLFLOAT INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER SYSAMS Explanation Whether a secondary access method supports a key sca
54. Water Compartment Combines freezer for instant first aid Extra capacity to accommodate water and ice With Ice to Provide Optimal Orthopedic Treatment 13 of 13 asege eg OWwep seJojs y ul eeg b y aseqejeq owap sajo s ay customer_num call_dtime 106 110 119 121 1998 06 12 8 20 1998 07 07 10 24 1998 07 01 15 00 1998 07 10 14 05 cust_calls Table user_id maryj riche riche maryj call_code call_descr D Order was received but two of the cans of ANZ tennis balls within the case were empty Order placed one month ago 6 7 not received Bill does not reflect credit from previous order Customer likes our merchandise Requests that we stock more types of infant joggers Will call back to place order res_dtime 1998 06 12 8 25 1998 07 07 10 30 1998 07 02 8 21 1998 07 10 14 06 res_descr Authorized credit for two cans to customer issued apology Called ANZ buyer to report the QA problem Checked with shipping Ed Smith Order sent yesterday we were waiting for goods from ANZ Next time will call with delay if necessary Spoke with Jane Akant in Finance She found the error and is sending new bill to customer Sent note to marketing group of interest in infant joggers 1 of 2 asegejeg Owepsai0 s ay ul eeg trv eoueJejey TOS 019P ING xILOJU Wel customer_num call_dtime user_id call_code call_descr res_dtime
55. Whether routine is a procedure or a function t procedure f function Specific name for the routine Location of the external routine This item is language specific in content and format Parameter style I Informix Language code in sysroutinelangs table Data types of parameters 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 59 SYSPROCEDURES Column variant client handlesnulls iterator percallcost commutator negator selfunc internal class stack parallel izable costfunc selconst 1 60 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Type BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN INTEGER VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 BOOLEAN CHAR 18 INTEGER BOOLEAN VARCHAR 128 SMALLFLOAT Explanation Whether the routine is VARIANT or not t is VARIANT isnot VARIANT Reserved for future use NULL handling indicator t handles NULLs f does not handle NULLs Whether the routine is an iterator function t is an iterator function f is not an iterator function Amount of CPU per call integer cost to execute UDR cost call 0 2 31 1 Name of commutator function Name of negator function Name of function to estimate selectivity of UDR Whether the routine can be called from SQL t routine is internal not callable from SQL f routine is external callable from SQL CPU class in which routine should be executed Stack size in bytes required per invocation Parall
56. already have a corresponding entry in sysindexes or sysindices table Because indexes can be shared more than one constraint can be associated with an index The sysconstraints table has the following columns Column Type Explanation constrid SERIAL Code uniquely identifying the constraint constrname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of the constraint CHAR 18 XPS owner CHAR 32 Name of the owner of the constraint CHAR 8 tabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the table 1 of 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSDEFAULTS Column Type Explanation constrtype CHAR 1 Code identifying the constraint type C Check constraint N Not NULL P Primary key R Referential T Table U Unique idxname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of index corresponding to the CHAR 18 XPS constraint 2 of 2 A composite index on the constrname and owner columns allows only unique values An index on the tabid column allows duplicate values and an index on the constrid column allows only unique values For check constraints where constrtype C the idxname is always NULL Additional information about each check constraint is contained in the syschecks and syscoldepend system catalog tables SYSDEFAULTS The sysdefaults system catalog table lists the user defined defaults that are placed on each column in the database One row exists for each user defined default value The sysdefaults table has the following columns Column Type Explanation
57. an 8 byte pattern such as s Select u Update column level privilege i Insert d Delete x Index a Alter and r References to identify the type of privilege In this example the user nhowe has column level privileges on the customer table Where a hyphen appears the user has not been granted the privilege whose position the hyphen occupies within the tabauth value If the tabauth privilege code appears in uppercase for example s for Select the user has this privilege and can also grant it to others but if the privilege code is lowercase for example s for Select the user cannot grant it to others In addition three rows are added to the syscolauth system catalog table These rows correspond to the user privileges that are granted on specific columns in the customer table as the following example shows colauth u u u Using the System Catalog The colauth column specifies the column level privileges that are granted on the customer table This column uses a 3 byte pattern such as s Select u Update and r References to identify the type of privilege For example the user nhowe has Update privileges on the second column because the colno value is 2 of the customer table indicated by tabid value of 101 The CREATE SCHEMA block adds two rows to the sysindexes system catalog table the sysindices table for Dynamic Server These rows correspond to the indexes created on the custome
58. an index cluster key clustersize code point A program that requests services from a server program typically a file server or a database server For the GLS feature the term client application includes database server utilities The computer on which a client application runs The locale that a client application uses to perform read and write operations on the client computer The CLIENT_LOCALE environment variable can specify a nondefault locale See also server locale A hardware and software design that allows the user interface and database server to reside on separate nodes or platforms ona single computer or over a network See also ASF client application and server processing locale The SQL statements that can make connections with databases These state ments include CONNECT DISCONNECT and SET CONNECTION Acronym for character large object A data type for a smart large object that stores large text items such as PostScript or HTML files It can be stored and retrieved in pieces and has database properties such as recovery and transaction rollback See also BLOB To drop the association between a cursor and the active set of rows that results from a query To deactivate the connection between a client application and a database Only one database can be active at a time To deactivate the association between a file and a program To rearrange the physical data of a table according to a specific index The
59. and compiler You can however compile an ESQL C program source file in the following order 1 Run the C preprocessor 2 Run the ESQL C preprocessor 3 Run the C compiler and linker To use a nondefault compilation order for a specific program you can either give the program source file a ecp extension run the cp option with the esql command on a program source file with a ec extension or set CPFIRST Set the CPFIRST environment variable to TRUE uppercase only to run the C preprocessor on all ESQL C source files The C preprocessor will run before the ESOL C preprocessor on all ESQL C source files in your environment irrespective of whether the cp option is passed to the esql command or the source files have the ec or the ecp extension To restore the default order on a system where the CPFIRST environment variable has been set to TRUE you can set CPFIRST to FALSE On UNIX systems that support the C shell the following command has the same effect unsetenv CPFIRST Environment Variables 3 25 DBACCNOIGN DBACCNOIGN The DBACCNOIGN environment variable affects the behavior of the DB Access utility if an error occurs under one of the following circumstances m You run DB Access in nonmenu mode D m You execute the LOAD command with DB Access in menu mode Set the DBACCNOIGN environment variable to 1 to roll back an incomplete transaction if an error occurs while you run the DB Access utility under ei
60. and produces code that a standard language compiler such as C can compile An access method whose routines access a table with such operations as insert ing deleting updating and scanning See also secondary access method 38 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference primary key primary key constraint printable character privilege procedure procedure overloading process project projection promotable lock protocol query query optimization information statements query unnesting The information from a column or set of columns that uniquely identifies each row in a table The primary key sometimes is called a unique key Specifies that each entry in a column or set of columns contains a unique non NULL value A character that can be displayed on a terminal screen or printer Printable characters include A Z a z 0 9 and punctuation marks Compare with control character The right to use or change the contents of a database table table fragment or column See also access privileges A routine that does not return values See also user defined procedure See routine overloading A discrete task generally a program that the operating system executes A group of related components that the High Performance Loader HPL uses See also component Taking a subset from the columns of a single table Projection is implemented through the select list in the SELECT clause of a SELECT statement
61. and starts gener ating values beginning at 1 After a nonzero number is assigned it cannot be changed You can however insert a value into a SERIAL8 column using the INSERT statement or reset the serial value n using the ALTER TABLE statement as long as that value does not duplicate any existing values in the table 2 40 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SET e When you insert a number into a SERIAL8 column or reset the next value of a SERIAL8 column your database server assigns the next number in sequence to the number entered If you reset the next value of a SERIAL8 column to a value that is less than the values already in that column however the next value is computed using the following formula maximum existing value in SERIAL8 column 1 For example if you reset the serial value of the customer_num column in the customer table to 50 when the highest assigned customer number is 128 the next customer number assigned is 129 Using SERIAL8 with INT8 All the arithmetic operators that are valid for INT8 such as and and all the SOL functions that are legal for INT8 such as ABS MOD POW and so on are also valid for SERIAL8 values Data conversion rules that apply to INT8 also apply to SERIAL8 but with a NOT NULL constraint on SERIAL8 The value of a SERIAL8 column of one table can be stored in an INT8 columns of another table In the second table however the INT8 values are not subject to the co
62. and the colmax value is 4 Storing the second smallest and second largest data values lets the database server make assumptions about the range of values in a given column and in turn further optimize searching strategies System Catalog Tables 1 33 SYSCONSTRAINTS 1 34 The colmin and colmax columns contain values only if the column is indexed and you have run the UPDATE STATISTICS statement If you store BYTE or TEXT data in the tblspace the colmin value is 1 The colmin and colmax columns are valid only for data types that fit into four bytes SMALLFLOAT SMALLINT INTEGER and the first four bytes of CHAR The values for all other noninteger column types are the initial 4 bytes of the maximum or minimum value which are treated as an integer It is better to use UPDATE STATISTICS MEDIUM than to depend on colmin and colmax values UPDATE STATISTICS MEDIUM gives better information and is valid for all data types The database server does not calculate colmin and colmax values for user defined data types These columns however have values for user defined data types if a user defined secondary access method supplies them SYSCONSTRAINTS The sysconstraints system catalog table lists the constraints placed on the columns in each database table An entry is also placed in the sysindexes system catalog table or sysindices view for Dynamic Server for each unique primary key NOT NULL or referential constraint that does not
63. as A NULL value is represented as NULL A function that returns a Boolean value true or false A Boolean function can act as a filter An index page that contains pointers to a leaf node or other branch nodes The database server creates a branch node when the root node and subse quent leaf nodes become full A portion of computer memory where a program temporarily stores data Data typically is read into or written out from buffers to disk Disk I O that the operating system controls instead of an application With buffered disk I O the operating system stores data in the kernel portion of memory before periodically writing the data to disk See also unbuffered disk I O and disk I O A type of logging that holds transactions in a memory buffer until the buffer is full regardless of when the transaction is committed or rolled back Informix database servers provide this option to speed up operations by reducing the number of disk writes Provided by the database server usually in the system catalog not defined by the user A predefined data type that the database server supports for example INTEGER CHAR or SERIAL An physical computer storage unit of 8 bits A character is not necessarily one byte In a multibyte code set a character can require more than one byte A data type for a simple large object that stores any type of binary data and can be as large as 2 bytes See also TEXT The set that results when you p
64. as orderdate lt 06 25 98 regardless of the value of DBDATE during inserts or updates on the orderdate column Suppose DBDATE is reset to DMY2 when a user inserts the value 30 01 98 into the orderdate column The date value inserted uses the date format DMy2 whereas the check constraint expression uses the date format MDY2 See the section Abbreviated Years and Expressions in Database Objects on page 3 31 for a discussion of legacy objects from earlier versions of Informix database servers that are always evaluated according to the runtime environment That section describes how to redefine objects so that dates are interpreted according to the setting of DBDATE and of other environment variables at the time when the object was defined or was last modified 3 34 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv setenv DBDELIMITER Important The behavior of DBDATE for Dynamic Server and Extended Parallel Server is not backwards compatible DBDELIMITER The DBDELIMITER environment variable specifies the field delimiter used with the dbexport utility and with the LOAD and UNLOAD statements DBDELIMITER delimiter delimiter is the field delimiter for unloaded data files The delimiter can be any single character except those in the following list m Hexadecimal digits 0 through 9 a through f A through F m Newline or CTRL J m The backslash 1 sym
65. at connection time if they use the DCE GSS commu nications support module CSM It contains key tables that store keys each of which contains a principal name database server or user name type version and value The database server uses the keytab file to find the key to register the database server and to acquire a credential for it A client application uses the key if the user did not execute dce_login with the current operating system user name which is the same as the DCE principle name or did not explicitly provide a credential INFORMIXKEYTAB pathname pathname specifies the full path of the keytab file Environment Variables 3 67 INFORMIXOPCACHE 3 68 setenv setenv For example the following command specifies that the name and location of the keytab file is usr myfiles mykeytab setenv INFORMIXKEYTAB usr myfiles mykeytab For more information about the DCE GSS communications support module see the Administrator s Guide INFORM IXOPCACHE The INFORMIXOPCACHE environment variable can specify the size of the memory cache for the staging area blobspace of the client application INFORMIXOPCACHE kilobytes kilobytes specifies the value you set for the optical memory cache Set the INFORMIXOPCACHE environment variable by specifying the size of the memory cache in kilobytes The specified size must be equal to or smaller than the size of the system wide configuration parameter OPCACHEMAX
66. ay ul eq 9e V eoueJejey TOS 0 pIND xIWOJU Wel catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10036 112 SHM Created for the beginner enthusiast lt BYTE value gt We Selected the Ideal Combi Ideal for club rides and light nation of Touring Bike touring Sophisticated triple butted Equipment then Turned It Into frame construction Precise index This Package Deal High Perfor shifting 28 Ibs mance on the Roads Maximum Pleasure Everywhere 10037 113 SHM Ultra lightweight Racing frame lt BYTE value gt Designed for the Serious geometry built for aerodynamic Competitor The Complete handlebars Cantilever brakes Racing Machine Index shifting High performance gearing Quick release hubs Disk wheels Bladed spokes 10038 114 PRC Padded leather palm and stretch lt BYTE value gt Riding Gloves for Comfort and mesh merged with terry back Protection Available in tan black and cream Sizes S M L XL 10039 201 NKL Designed for comfort and stability lt BYTE value gt Full Comfort Long Wearing Available in white amp blue or white Golf Shoes for Men and Women amp brown Specify size 10040 201 ANZ Guaranteed waterproof Full lt BYTE value gt Waterproof Protection Ensures leather upper Available in white bone brown green and blue Specify size Maximum Comfort and Durability In All Climates 7 of 13 asege eg OWwep sai0 s ay ul eeg Le y aseqejeq owep saiojs ay catalog
67. between the application and the database server setenv _ OPTOFC o UNIX 0 disables OPTOFC for all threads of the application 1 enables OPTOFC for every cursor in every thread of the application The default value is 0 zero If you set OPTOFC from the shell you must set it before you start the ESQL C application For more information about enabling OPTOFC and related features see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual OPT_GOAL Set the OPT_GOAL environment variable in the user environment before you start an application to specify the query performance goal for the optimizer setenv OPT_GOAL 1 Nal 0 specifies user response time optimization 1 specifies total query time optimization The default behavior is for the optimizer to choose query plans that optimize the total query time Environment Variables 3 83 PATH You can also specify the optimization goal for individual queries with optimizer directives or for a session with the SET OPTIMIZATION statement Both methods take precedence over the OPT_GOAL environment variable setting You can also set the OPT_GOAL configuration parameter for the Dynamic Server system this method has the lowest level of precedence For more information about optimizing queries for your database server see your Performance Guide For information on the SET OPTIMIZATION statement see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax
68. boxes display System Environment Variables and User Environment Vari ables System Environment Variables apply to an entire system and User Environment Variables apply only to the sessions of the indi vidual user 2 To change the value of an existing variable select that variable The name of the variable and its current value appear in the boxes at the bottom of the window 3 Highlight the existing value and type the new value 4 To add a new variable highlight an existing variable and type the new variable name in the box at the bottom of the window 5 Next enter the value for the new variable at the bottom of the window and click the Set button 6 To delete a variable select the variable and click the Delete button Important In order to use the System applet to change System environment variables you must belong to the Administrators group For information on assigning users to groups see your operating system documentation Environment Variables 3 15 Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities Using the Command Prompt to Work with Environment Variables The following diagram shows the syntax for setting an environment variable at a command prompt in Windows If no value is specified the environment variable is unset as if it did not exist For more information on how to read syntax diagrams see Syntax Conven tions on page 10 of the introduction To view your curre
69. bushing Aero levers Set includes calipers levers and cables 10021 103 PRC Compact leading action design lt BYTE value gt Climb Any Mountain enhances shifting Deep cage for ProCycle s Front Derailleur super small granny gears Extra Adds Finesse to Your ATB strong construction to resist off road abuse 3 of 13 asege eg OWwep seJojs y ul eeg y aseqejeq owap sajo s ay catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10022 104 PRC Floating trapezoid geometry with lt BYTE value gt Computer Aided Design extra thick parallelogram arms 100 Engineers 100 Tooth Capacity tooth capacity Optimum alignment Into ProCycle s Rear Derailleur with any freewheel 10023 105 PRC Front wheels laced with 15g spokes lt BYTE value gt Durable Training Wheels That in a 3 cross pattern Rear wheels Hold True Under Toughest laced with 14g spikes in a 3 cross Conditions pattern 10024 105 SHM Polished alloy Sealed bearing lt BYTE value gt Extra Lightweight Wheels for quick release hubs Double butted Training or High Performance Front wheels are laced 15g 2 cross Touring Rear wheels are laced 15 3 cross 10025 106 PRC Hard anodized alloy with pearl lt BYTE value gt ProCycle Stem with Pearl Finish finish 6mm hex bolt hardware Available in lengths of 90 140mm in 10mm increments 10026 107 PRC Available in three styles Men s lt BYTE value gt The Ultimate In Riding Comfort racing Men s
70. by default if you attempt to specify a character other than a hyphen period or zero as a separator or if you do not include any separator in the DBDATE specification The following table shows some examples for setting DBDATE DBDATE Setting January 8 2001 appears as MDY4 01 08 2001 DMY2 08 01 01 MDY4 01 08 2001 Y2DM 01 08 01 MDY20 010801 Y4MD 2001 01 08 Formats Y4MD because asterisk is not a valid separator and mDY4 with no separator defined both display the default symbol slash as the separator Important Ifyou use the Y2 format the setting of the DBCENTURY environment variable can also affect how literal DATE values are evaluated in data entry If DBDATE is not set on the client any DBDATE setting on the database server overrides the MDY4 default on the client If DBDATE is set on the client that value rather than the setting on the database server is used by the client Also certain routines that Informix ESOL C calls can use the DBTIME variable rather than DBDATE to set DATETIME formats to international specifications For more information see the discussion of the DBTIME environment variable in DBTIME on page 3 48 and the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual The setting of the DBDATE variable takes precedence over that of the GL_DATE environment variable as well as over any default DATE format that CLIENT_LOCALE specifies For information about GL_DATE and CLIENT_LOCALE see the Infor
71. chime waterproof to 50m velcro band 10059 304 HRO Split timer waterproof to 50m lt BYTE value gt Waterproof Triathlete Watch In Indicate color Hot pink mint Competition Colors green space black 10060 305 HRO Contains ace bandage anti lt BYTE value gt Comprehensive First Aid Kit bacterial cream alcohol cleansing Essential for Team Practices pads adhesive bandages of Team Traveling assorted sizes and instant cold pack 10061 306 PRC Converts a standard tandem bike lt BYTE value gt Enjoy Bicycling With Your Child into an adult child bike User tested assembly instructions ona Tandem Make Your Family Outing Safer 11 of 13 asege eg OWwep seJojs y ul eeg Lp W aseqejeq owap sajo s ay catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10062 306 SHM Converts a standard tandem bike lt BYTEvalue gt Consider a Touring Vacation for into an adult child bike Light the Entire Family A Light weight model weight Touring Tandem for Parent and Child 10063 307 PRC Allows mom or dad to take the baby lt BYTE value gt Infant Jogger Keeps A Running out too Fits children up to 21 Family Together pounds Navy blue with black trim 10064 308 PRC Allows mom or dad to take both lt BYTE value gt As Your Family Grows Infant children Rated for children up to 18 Jogger Grows With You pounds 10065 309 HRO Prevents swimmer s ear lt BYTE value gt Swimmers Can Prevent Ear Infection All Sea
72. code point greater than 127 Non ASCII characters include 8 bit characters and multibyte characters A user defined function that returns a single group of values one row of data and therefore does not require a cursor when it is executed Compare with cur sor function A user defined function that always returns the same value when passed the same arguments A nonvariant function must not contain SQL statements Compare with variant function A constraint on a column that specifies that the column cannot contain NULL values A keyword of SQL indicating that a value that is unknown missing or not applicable A NULL value is not the same as a value of zero or blank See database object The state of a database object as recorded in the sysobjstate system catalog table A constraint or unique index can be in enabled disabled or filtering mode A trigger or duplicate index can be in enabled or disabled mode You use SET statements to change the object mode of an object A database that adds object oriented features to a relational database includ ing support for user defined data types user defined routines user defined casts user defined access methods and inheritance Acronym for Online Transaction Processing See also online transaction pro cessing application Characterized by quick indexed access to a small number of data items The applications are typically multiuser and response times are measured in fractions
73. colno column the fname column of the customer table is assigned the value 2 and the fname column of the view california is assigned the value 1 The colmin and colmax columns contain no entries These two columns contain values when a column is the first key or the only key in an index and has no NULL or duplicate values and the UPDATE STATISTICS statement has been run The database server also adds rows to the sysviews system catalog table The sysviews table contains the CREATE VIEW statement that creates the view Each line of the CREATE VIEW statement in the current schema is stored in this table In the viewtext column the x0 that precedes the column names in the statement for example x0 fname operates as an alias name that distin guishes among the same columns that are used in a self join System Catalog Tables 1 9 Using the System Catalog california tables as the following example shows The CREATE SCHEMA block also adds rows to the systabauth system catalog table These rows correspond to the user privileges granted on customer and grantor maryl maryl maryl 1 10 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference grantee nhowe nhowe nhowe tabid 101 101 101 grantor grantee tabid tabauth maryl public 101 su idx maryl cathl 101 SU IDXAR maryl nhowe 101 maryl 102 SU ID The tabauth column specifies the table level privileges granted to users on the customer and california tables This column uses
74. column is not used in a comparison condition or with the IN predicate CHAR n The CHAR data type stores any sequence of letters numbers and symbols It can store single byte and multibyte characters based on the database locale For more information on East Asian locales that support multibyte code sets see Multibyte Characters with CHAR on page 2 14 A CHAR n column has a length n bytes where 1 n 32 767 If you do not specify n CHAR 1 is the default length Character columns typically store alphanumeric strings such as names addresses phone numbers and so on When a value is retrieved or stored as CHAR n exactly n bytes of data are transferred If the string is shorter than n bytes the string is extended with blank spaces up to the declared length If the data value is longer than n bytes a data string of length n that has been truncated from the right is inserted or retrieved without the database server raising an exception This does not create partial characters in multibyte locales In right to left locales such as Arabic Hebrew or Farsi the truncation is from the left 2 12 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS CHAR n Treating CHAR Values as Numeric Values If you plan to perform calculations on numbers stored in a column you should assign a number data type to that column Although you can store numbers in CHAR columns you might not be able to use them in some arith metic operat
75. configuration file is stored in the user s home directory as informix For information on creating or modifying an environment configuration file see Setting Environment Variables in a Configuration File on page 3 8 ENVIGNORE itself cannot be set in an environment configuration file FET_BUF_SIZE The FET_BUF_SIZE environment variable can override the default setting for the size of the fetch buffer for all data types except BYTE and TEXT values setenv FET_BUF_SIZE size is a positive integer that is larger than the default buffer size but no greater than 32 767 specifying the size in bytes of the fetch buffer that holds data retrieved by a query For example to set a buffer size to 5 000 bytes on a UNIX system that uses the C shell set the FET_BUF_SIZE environment variable by entering the following command setenv FET_BUF_SIZE 5000 When FET_BUF_SIZE is set to a valid value the new value overrides the default value or any previously set value of FET_BUF_SIZE The default setting for the fetch buffer is dependent on row size The processing of BYTE and TEXT values is not affected by FET_BUF_SIZE No error is raised if FET_BUF_SIZE is set to a value that is less than the default size or that is out of the range of SMALLINT values In these cases however the invalid fetch buffer size is ignored and the default size is in effect Environment Variables 3 55 IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZ
76. data type 2 67 IMPEXBIN data type 2 67 Implicit cast 1 23 2 66 Implicit connection 3 69 Implicit temporary tables 3 46 Important paragraphs icon for 8 IN keyword 1 44 2 11 2 33 2 38 2 42 2 44 2 70 Index attached 1 45 3 31 3 53 3 90 B tree 1 47 3 53 Index 9 A BC D E F GH clustered 1 46 1 48 composite 1 46 1 47 default values for attached 3 90 descending 1 47 detached 3 53 fragmented 1 43 functional 1 47 2 60 generalized key 1 46 1 51 1 64 globally detached 1 44 nonfragmented 3 53 of data types 2 6 of environment variables 3 95 of system catalog 1 14 R tree 3 53 sysindexes data 1 46 sysindices data 1 48 sysobjstate data 1 52 threads for sorting 3 90 unique 1 35 1 46 2 39 2 40 Index privilege 1 68 Indexkey structure 1 49 Indirect typing 2 39 2 40 Industry standards See Compliance Industry standards compliance with 15 Information Schema views accessing 1 81 columns 1 83 description 1 80 generating 1 81 server_info 1 85 sql_languages 1 84 tables 1 82 Informational messages 1 39 Informix Dynamic Server IDS 1 14 Informix ESQL C 3 25 3 33 3 49 3 59 3 82 Informix Extended Parallel Server XPS 1 14 3 18 Informix extension checking DBANSIWARN 3 27 informix owner name 1 12 1 23 1 38 1 48 1 69 3 37 3 73 Informix Storage Manager ISM 3 74 3 77 Informix subkey 3 13 10 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvYvY Z INFORMIXC environment variable 3 63 INFORMI
77. date The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 21 User Defined Routines and Extended Data Types B 22 The units Table The units table contains information about the units in which the inventory items can be ordered Each item in the stock table is available in one or more types of container Figure B 24 shows the columns of the units table Figure B 24 The units Table Name Type Description unit_name CHAR 4 Units by which an item is ordered each pair case box unit_descr VARCHAR 15 Description of units User Defined Routines and Extended Data Types The superstores_demo database uses user defined routines UDRs and extended data types A UDR is a routine that you define that can be invoked within an SQL statement or another UDR A UDR can either return values or not The data type system of Dynamic Server is an extensible and flexible system that supports the creation of following kinds of data types m Extensions of existing data types by redefining some of the behavior for data types that the database server provides m Definitions of customized data types by a user This section lists the extended data types and UDRs created for the superstores_demo database For information about creating and using UDRs and extended data types see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types The superstores_demo database creates the distinct data type PERCENT ina UDR as follows CREATE DISTIN
78. determine where to create the table 3 46 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference UNIX DBSPACETEMP If you create an explicit temporary table with the SELECT INTO TEMP statement the database server uses the settings in DBSPACETEMP to determine where to create the table If DBSPACETEMP is not set the database server uses the ONCONFIG parameter DBSPACETEMP If this parameter is not set the database server creates the explicit temporary table in the same dbspace where the database resides The database server creates implicit temporary tables for its own use while executing join operations SELECT statements with the GROUP BY clause SELECT statements with the ORDER BY clause and index builds When it creates these implicit temporary tables the database server uses disk space for writing the temporary data in the following order 1 The operating system directory or directories that the environment variable PSORT_DBTEMP specifies if it is set 2 The dbspace or dbspaces that the environment variable DBSPACETEMP specifies if it is set 3 The dbspace or dbspaces that the ONCONFIG parameter DBSPACETEMP specifies 4 The operating system file space in tmp UNIX or temp Windows Important If the DBSPACETEMP environment variable is set to an invalid value the database server defaults to the root dbspace for explicit temporary tables and to tmp for implicit temporary tables not to the DBSPACETEMP
79. e a lr e 168 SYSTABLES s u goe S boao e a eosar kir e a 1 69 SYSTRACECLASSES 2 2 esoe ola ve o dea 1 72 SYSTRACEMSGS aa aaa 18 SYSTRIGBODY a aaa 1 74 SYSTRIGGERS aa a aaa 1275 SYSUSERS aoaaa 1 76 SYSVIEWS 21 eo deh ee e UR Rk eh ee EZ SYSVIOLATIONS 2 2 1 2 k vra hoe a 177 SYSXTDDESC m te thiu k ee 1 78 SYSXTDTYPEAUTH 2 1 78 SYSXTDTYPES 2 d aore k das B e wiara 9 1 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Information Schema L Se uae A a 2 toe 8180 Generating the Information Schema Views 1 81 Accessing the Information Schema Views 181 Structure of the Information Schema Views 1 82 The tables Information Schema View 1 82 The columns Information Schema View 1 83 The sql_languages Information Schema View 1 84 The server_info Information Schema View 1 85 System Catalog Tables 1 3 1 4 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference In This Chapter The system catalog consists of tables that describe the structure of the database Sometimes called the data dictionary these tables contain every thing that the database knows about itself Each system catalog table contains specific information about elements in the database This chapter provides information about the structure contents and use of th
80. e ch oi fo A oh oe ch OR a ew Be 127 SYSCOLDEPEND 2 2 1 2 ee ee 1 28 SYSCOLUMNS 2 e a d w a b a a 129 SYSCONSTRAINTS oaa eee ee 184 SYSDEFAULTS op 2 2 2 e o 85 SYSDEPEND a sc seca te ds Bed Seed Sl ele 1587 SYSDISTRIB 2 2 e le a aLa wak Le 187 SYSDOMAINS 2 2 2 ww ee 89 SYSERRORS at a8 oa pee a acne a wae wf ate 89 SYSEXTCOLS eras y ane Foa ee 1 40 SYSEXTDFILES 2 2 2 2 ee A SYSEXTERNAL 0 ee 1241 SYSFRAGAUTH 2 2 eee 1 42 SYSFRAGMENTS 2 o 1 48 SYSINDEXES 2 1 2 ee aa 1 46 SYSINDICES 2 2 2 ww E e 1 48 SYSINHERITS 2 2 ee eee 150 SYSLANGAUTH 2 2 ee 150 SYSLOGMAP ee ee 151 SYSNEWDEPEND 0 0 02 2 4 1451 SYSOBJSTATE 2 2 a eee 452 SYSOPCLASSES 2 1 53 SYSOPCLSTR e o o 1454 SYSPROCAUTH 2 ee 1 56 SYSPROCBODY 2 2 2 2 1 57 SYSPROCEDURES 1 58 SYSPROCPLAN aaa 1 62 SYSREFERENCES 0 ee 1 68 SYSREPOSITORY 2 we 1 64 SYSROLEAUTH 2 ee 165 SYSROUTINELANGS ee 1 65 SYSSYNONYMS 2 ee der dopen e 1 66 SYSSYNTABLE a aoao a e a a ee 1 66 SYSTABAMDATA aa a a a 1 67 SYSTABAUTA atete a
81. examples for using the CLOB data type see the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial and the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation With GLS the following rules apply m Multibyte CLOB characters must be supported by the database locale m The CLOB data type is collated in code set order m For CLOB columns the database server handles any required code set conversions for the data For more information on database locales collation order and code set conversion see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality DataTypes 2 15 DATE GLS 2 16 DATE The DATE data type stores the calendar date DATE data types require 4 bytes A calendar date is stored internally as an integer value equal to the number of days since December 31 1899 Because DATE values are stored as integers you can use them in arithmetic expressions For example you can subtract a DATE value from another DATE value The result a positive or negative INTEGER value indicates the number of days that elapsed between the two dates You can use a UNITS DAY expression to convert the result to an INTERVAL DAY TO DAY data type The following example shows the default display format of a DATE column mm dd yyyy In this example mm is the month 1 12 dd is the day of the month 1 31 and yyyy is the year 0001 9999 You can specify a different order of time units and a different time unit separator than or no separator by setting the DBDA
82. if the CONNECT DEFAULT statement is executed It also defines the database server to which an initial implicit connection is established if the first statement in an application is not a CONNECT statement Important You must set INFORMIXSERVER even if the application or DB Access does not use implicit or explicit default connections For Extended Parallel Server the INFORMIXSERVER environment variable specifies the name of a dbserver group To specify a coserver name use the following format dbservername coserver_number Here dbservername is the value that you assigned to the DBSERVERNAME configuration parameter in the ONCONFIG configuration file and coserver_number is the value that you assigned to the COSERVER configu ration parameter for the connection coserver Strictly speaking INFORMIXSERVER is not required for initialization If INFORMIXSERVER is not set however Extended Parallel Server does not build the sysmaster tables INFORM IXSHM BASE The INFORMIXSHMBASE environment variable affects only client applications connected to Informix databases that use the interprocess communications IPC shared memory ipeshm protocol Important Resetting INFORMIXSHMBASE requires a thorough understanding of how the application uses memory Normally you do not reset INFORMIXSHMBASE Environment Variables 3 69 INFORMIXSQLHOSTS setenv INFORMIXSHMBASE specifies where shared memory communication segments are attached to the c
83. implicit cast and each explicit cast that a user defines The syscasts table has the following columns Column Type Explanation owner CHAR 32 Owner of cast user informix for built in casts and user name for implicit and explicit casts argument_type SMALLINT Source data type on which the cast operates argument_xid INTEGER Code for the source data type specified in the argument_type column result_type SMALLINT Code for the data type returned by the cast result_xid INTEGER Data type code of the data type named in the result_type column routine name VARCHAR 128 Function or procedure implementing the cast routine_owner CHAR 32 Name of owner of the function or procedure specified in the routine_name column class CHAR 1 Type of cast E Explicit cast I Implicit cast S Built in cast If routine_name and routine_owner have NULL values it indicates that the cast is defined without a routine This can occur if the data types specified in the argument_type and result_type columns both have the same length and alignment and are both passed by reference or are both passed by value A composite index on columns argument_type argument_xid result_type and result_xid allows only unique values A composite index on columns result_type and result_xid allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 23 SYSCHECKS SYSCHECKS The syschecks system catalog table describes each check constraint defined in the database Because
84. in floating point values set DBFLTMASK to the desired number of digits DBFLTMASK _ scale scale is the number of decimal digits that you want the Informix client application to display in the floating point values Here scale must be smaller than 16 the default number of digits displayed If the floating point value contains more digits to the right of the decimal than DBFLTMASK specifies DB Access rounds the value to the specified number of digits If the floating point value contains fewer digits to the right of the decimal DB Access pads the value with zeros If you set DBFLTMASK to a value greater than can fit into the 14 character buffer however DB Access rounds the value to the number of digits that can fit IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DBLANG DBLANG The DBLANG environment variable specifies the subdirectory of INFORMIXDIR or the full pathname of the directory that contains the compiled message files that an Informix product uses setenv DBLANG E Tios es full_path relative_path is a subdirectory of INFORMIXDIR full_path is the pathname to the compiled message files By default Informix products put compiled messages in a locale specific subdirectory of the INFORMIXDIR msg directory These compiled message files have the file extension iem If you want to use a message directory other than INFORMIXDIR msg where for example you can store message fi
85. in the stores_ demo Database unit_price 42 50 102 00 75 00 87 00 95 00 4 50 5 00 48 00 36 00 170 00 280 00 48 00 160 00 190 00 250 00 280 00 40 00 40 00 80 00 89 00 48 00 96 00 72 00 72 00 60 00 unit each each each each each each each box box box box case each each each each case case case case box box box box box unit_descr each each each each each each each 24 pairs box 24 pair box 10 box 10 box 4 case each each each each 20 case 20 case 10 case 12 case 4 pairs box 12 box 12 box 12 box 12 box 3 of 3 The stores_demo Database A 29 0 V eoueJejey TOS 019P ING xILOJU Wel catalog Table catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10001 1 HRO Brown leather Specify first lt BYTE value gt Your First Season s Baseball baseman s or infield outfield style Glove Specify right or left handed 10002 1 HSK Babe Ruth signature glove Black lt BYTEvalue gt All Leather Hand Stitched leather Infield outfield style Deep Pockets Sturdy Webbing Specify right or left handed that Won t Let Go 10003 1 SMT Catcher s mitt Brown leather lt BYTE value gt A Sturdy Catcher s Mitt With Specify right or left handed the Perfect Pocket 10004 2 HRO Jackie Robinson signature glove lt BYTE value gt Highest Quality Ball Available Highest Professional quality used from the Hand Stitching to the by National League Robi
86. invoke Target Type Opaque Distinct Named Unnamed Collection Built in gt Type Type Row Type Row Type Type Type Opaque Explicit Explicit Explicit Not Not Explicit Type or Allowed Allowed or implicit implicit Distinct Explicit Explicit Explicit Not Not Explicit Type Allowed Allowed or implicit Named Explicit Explicit Explicit Explicit Not Not Row Type Allowed Allowed Unnamed Not Not Explicit Implicit Not Not Row Type Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Collection Not Not Not Not Explicit Not Type Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Built in Explicit Explicit Not Not Not System Type or or Allowed Allowed Allowed defined implicit implicit implicit 1 Applies when two row types are structurally equivalent or casts exist to handle data conversions where corresponding field types are not the same 2 Applies when a cast exists to convert between the element types of the respective collection types 3 Applies when a user defined cast exists to convert between the two data types Data Types 2 69 Operator Precedence 2 70 Operator Precedence An operator is a symbol or keyword that can appear in an SQL expression Most SQL operators are restricted in the data types of their operands and returned values Some operators only support operands of built in data types others can support built in and extended data types as operands The following table shows the precedence of the operators that Informix da
87. is the default display and input format for DATETIME YEAR TO FRACTION 5 literal values in the default locale Here the percentage symbol gives special significance to the special placeholder symbol that follows Without a preceding symbol any character within the formatting mask is interpreted as a literal character even if it is the same character as one of the placeholder characters in the following list Note also that the special placeholder symbols are case sensitive Environment Variables 3 49 DBTIME 3 50 b B d En H l M m p S y YoY The following characters within a DBTIME format string are placeholders for time units or for other features within a DATETIME value is replaced by the abbreviated month name is replaced by the full month name is replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number 01 31 is replaced by the value of the fraction of a second with precision that the integer n specifies The default value of n is 2 the range ofnis0 n 5 is replaced by the hour 24 hour clock is replaced by the hour 12 hour clock is replaced by the minute as a decimal number 00 59 is replaced by the month as a decimal number 01 12 is replaced by A M or P M or the equivalent in the locale file is replaced by the second as a decimal number 00 59 is replaced by the year as a four digit decimal number If the user enters a two digit value this value is
88. lock in that only one update lock can be acquired on an object at a time An aggregate function that is not provided by the database server built in that includes extensions to built in aggregates and newly defined aggregates The database server manages all aggregates See opaque data type A cast that a user creates with the CREATE CAST statement A user defined cast typically requires a cast function A user defined cast can be an explicit cast or an implicit cast 54 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference user defined data type user defined function user defined procedure user defined routine user ID user ID password user name user password user thread variable variant function view violations table A data type that you define for use in a relational database You can define opaque data types and distinct data types A user defined routine that returns at least one value You can write a user defined function in SPL SPL function or in an external language that the data base server supports external function A user defined routine that does not return a value You can write a user defined procedure in SPL SPL procedure or in an external language that the database server supports external procedure A routine that you write and register in the system catalog tables of a data base and that an SQL statement or another routine can invoke You can write a user defined routine in SPL SPL r
89. new table is created Portions of this value are incremented when data definition statements such as ALTER INDEX ALTER TABLE DROP INDEX and CREATE INDEX are performed on the table In the flags column ST_RAW represents a nonlogging permanent table in a database that supports transaction logging When a prepared statement that references a database table is executed the version value is checked to make sure that nothing has changed since the statement was prepared If the version value has changed the prepared statement is not executed and you must prepare the statement again The npused column does not reflect the number of pages used for BYTE or TEXT data nor the number of pages that are freed in DELETE operations The systables table has two rows that store information about the database locale GL_COLLATE with a tabid of 90 and GL_CTYPE with a tabid of 91 To view these rows enter the following SELECT statement SELECT FROM systables WHERE tabid 90 OR tabid 91 System Catalog Tables 1 71 SYSTRACECLASSES SYSTRACECLASSES The systraceclasses system catalog table contains the names and identifiers of trace classes The systraceclasses table has the following columns Column Type Explanation name CHAR 18 Name of the class of trace messages classid SERIAL Identifying code of the trace class A trace class is a category of trace messages that you can use in the devel opment and testing of new DataBlade modules and use
90. of seconds See also decision support application 34 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference online transaction processing queries opaque data type opaque type support function open operational table operator operator binding operator class operator class function operator class strategy function The transactions that OLTP applications handle are usually simple and pre defined A typical OLTP system is an order entry system where only a limited number of rows are accessed by a single transaction many times See also deci sion support query A fundamental data type that you define which contains one or more values encapsulated with an internal length and input and output functions that convert text to and from an internal storage format Opaque types need user defined routines and user defined operators that work on them Synonym for base type and user defined base type One of a group of user defined functions that the database server uses to per form operations on opaque data types such as converting between the internal and external representations of the type The process of making a resource available such as preparing a file for access activating a column or initiating a window A logging permanent table that uses light appends for fast update opera tions Operational tables do not perform record by record logging In an SQL statement a symbol such as gt lt or that invokes an
91. on how to design and implement a relational database see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation A 2 Structure of the Tables Structure of the Tables The stores_demo database contains information about a fictitious sporting goods distributor that services stores in the western United States This database includes the following tables customer page A 2 orders page A 3 items page A 4 stock page A 4 catalog page A 5 cust_calls page A 6 call_type page A 7 manufact page A 7 state page A 8 Sections that follow describe each table The unique identifying value for each table primary key is shaded and indicated by a key u symbol The customer Table The customer table contains information about the retail stores that place orders from the distributor Figure A 1 shows the columns of the customer table The zipcode column in Figure A 1 is indexed and allows duplicate values Figure A 1 The customer Table Column Name Data Type Description customer num SERIAL 101 System generated customer number fname CHAR 15 First name of store representative Iname CHAR 15 Last name of store representative 1 of 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Column Name company address1 address2 city state zipcode phone Data Type CHAR 20 CHAR 20 CHAR 20 CHAR 15 CHAR 2 CHAR 5 CHAR 18 The orders Table The orders Table Description Name of store
92. opaque data types A built in opaque data type is one for which the database server provides the type definition Because these data types are built in opaque types they do not have a unique coltype value Instead they have one of the coltype values for opaque types 41 fixed length opaque type or 40 varying length opaque type The different fixed length opaque types are distinguished by the extended_id column in the sysxtdtypes system catalog table The following are the coltype values for the built in opaque data types Predefined Data Type Value for coltype Column BLOB 41 CLOB 41 BOOLEAN 41 LVARCHAR 40 System Catalog Tables 1 31 SYSCOLUMNS Storing Column Length The collength column value depends on the data type of the column Length of Integer Based Columns A collength value for a DATE INTEGER INT8 SERIAL SERIAL8 or SMALLINT column is not machine dependent The database server uses the following lengths for these integer based data types of SQL Integer Based Data Type Length in bytes SMALLINT 2 DATE 4 INTEGER 4 SERIAL 4 INT8 8 SERIAL8 8 Length of Fixed Point Columns The collength value for a MONEY or DECIMAL p s column can be calculated using the following formula precision 256 scale Length of Varying Length Character Columns For columns of type VARCHAR the max_size and min_space values are encoded in the collength column using one of the following formulas m Ifthe colle
93. oper ator function The operands to the operator are arguments to the operator func tion The implicit invocation of an operator function when an operator is used in an SQL statement An association of operator class functions with a secondary access method The database server uses an operator class to optimize queries and build an index of that secondary access method One of the operator class support functions or operator class strategy functions that constitute an operator class For user defined operator classes the opera tor class functions are user defined functions An operator class function that can appear as a filter in a query The query opti mizer uses the strategy functions to determine if an index of a particular sec ondary access method can be used to process the filter You register operator class strategy functions in the STRATEGIES clause of the CREATE OPCLASS statement Glossary 35 operator class support function operator function optical cluster optical family optical platter optical statements optical volume outer join outmigration output overloading owner privileged packed decimal pad An operator class function that a secondary access method uses to build or search an index You register operator class support functions in the SUPPORT clause of the CREATE OPCLASS statement A function that processes one or more arguments its operands and returns a value Many operato
94. or CD onto a computer and preparing it for use Refers to a program that accepts input from the user processes the input and then produces output on the screen in a file or on a printer The process of making Informix products easily adaptable to the conventions of various cultures and natural languages Among other features interna tionalized software can support culturally specific collation and date time and money formats See also the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality The ability to process multiple queries simultaneously to avoid a perfor mance delay when multiple independent queries access the same table See also intraquery parallelization A signal from a user or another process that can stop the current process temporarily or permanently See also signal Glossary 27 interrupt key intraquery parallelization IPX SPX ISAM ISAM error ISO 1 08859 1 isolation iterator function jagged rows A key used to cancel or abort a program or to leave a current menu and return to the menu one level above On many systems the interrupt key is CONTROL C on some others the interrupt key is DEL or CONTROL Break Breaking of a single query into subqueries by a database server using PDQ and then processing the subqueries in parallel Parallel processing of this type has important implications when each subquery retrieves data from a fragment of a table Because each partial query operates on a smaller amount of
95. order of CHAR values is the order of characters as they appear in the code set An exception is the MATCHES operator with ranges see Collating VARCHAR Values on page 2 47 For more infor mation about collation order see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality DataTypes 2 13 CHARACTER n GLS Multibyte Characters with CHAR For multibyte code sets the database locale must support any multibyte characters that a database uses If you are storing multibyte characters make sure to calculate the number of bytes needed For more information on multibyte characters and locales see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality CHARACTER n The CHARACTER data type is a synonym for CHAR CHARACTER VARYING m r The CHARACTER VARYING data type stores a string of letters digits and symbols of varying length where m is the maximum size of the column and ris the minimum amount of space reserved for that column The CHARACTER VARYING data type complies with ANSI ISO standard for SQL the non ANSI Informix VARCHAR data type supports the same function ality See the description of the VARCHAR data type in VARCHAR m r on page 2 46 CLOB The CLOB data type stores any kind of text data in random access chunks called sbspaces Text data can include text formatting information as long as this information is also textual such as PostScript Hypertext Markup Language HTML Standard Graphic Markup Language SGML or Exten
96. page 3 15 Environment Variables 3 23 AC_CONFIG setenv AC_CONFIG You can set the AC_CONFIG environment variable to specify the path for the ac_config std configuration file for the archecker utility The archecker utility checks the validity and completeness of an ON Bar storage space backup The ac_config std file contains default archecker configuration parameters AC_CONFIG pathname pathname is the location of the ac_config std configuration file in INFOR MIXDIR etc or INFORMIXDIR etc For information on archecker see your Backup and Restore Guide AFDEBUG You can create files to hold verbose messages from the Java virtual machine JVM about releasing memory that had been allocated to objects by setting the AFDEBUG environment variable setenv _ AFDEBUG 3 24 No value is required You can also set the configuration parameter AFCRASH to 0x00000010 to achieve the same result IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference CPFIRST CPFIRST Set the CPFIRST environment variable to specify the default compilation order for all ESQL C source files in your programming environment setenv _ CPFIRST pa TRUE v FALSE When compiling an ESQL C program with CPFIRST not set the default order is to run the ESQL C preprocessor on the program source file and pass the resulting file to the C language preprocessor
97. prefixing the abbreviated year value with 19 and 20 Both dates are compared to the current date and the most recent date that is earlier than the current date is used F Future Expanded dates are created by prefixing the abbreviated year value with 20 and 21 Both dates are compared to the current date and the earliest date that is later than the current date is used C Closest Expanded dates are created by prefixing the abbreviated year value with 19 20 and 21 These three dates are compared to the current date and the date that is closest to the current date is used Settings are case sensitive and no error is issued for invalid settings If you enter f for example then the default R setting takes effect The P and F settings cannot return the current date which is not in the past or future When DBCENTURY is not set or is set to R the first two digits of the current year are used to expand the year value For example if today s date is 09 30 2000 then the abbreviated date 12 31 99 expands to 12 31 2099 and the abbreviated date 12 31 00 expands to 12 31 2000 Years entered as a single digit are prefixed with 0 and then expanded Three digit years are not expanded Pad years earlier than 100 with leading zeros Examples of Expanding Year Values The following examples illustrate how various settings of DBCENTURY cause abbreviated years to be expanded in DATE and DATETIME v
98. release of Dynamic Server can support attached indexes that were created by Version 7 x of Dynamic Server Important DEEAULT_ATTACH might not continue to be supported in future releases of Informix database servers It is not recommended that you develop new database applications that depend on this deprecated feature DELIMIDENT The DELIMIDENT environment variable specifies that strings enclosed between double quotation marks are delimited database identifiers setenv DELIMIDENT Y No value is required DELIMIDENT takes effect if it exists and it remains in effect while it is on the list of environment variables Delimited identifiers can include white space such as Vitamin E or can be identical to reserved keywords such as TABLE or USAGE You can also use them to declare database identifiers that contain characters outside the default character set for SOL identifiers such as Column 6 In the default locale this set consists of letters digits and the underscore _ symbol Environment Variables 3 53 ENVIGNORE You cannot however use DELIMIDENT to declare storage identifiers that contain characters outside the default SQL character set Database identifiers also called SQL identifiers are names for database objects such as tables and columns Storage identifiers are names for storage objects such as dbspaces blobspaces and sbspaces smart blob spaces D
99. res_descr 127 1998 07 31 maryj I Received Hero watches Sent memo to shipping to 14 30 item 304 instead of send ANZ item 304 to ANZ watches customer and pickup HRO watches Should be done tomorrow 8 1 116 1997 11 28 mannyn I Received plain white 1997 11 28 Shipping found correct case 13 34 swim caps 313 ANZ 16 47 in warehouse and express instead of navy with team mailed it in time for swim logo 313 SHM meet 116 1997 12 21 mannyn I Second complaint from 1997 12 27 Memo to shipping Ava 11 24 this customer Received 08 19 Brown to send case of left two cases right handed handed gloves pick up outfielder gloves 1 HRO instead of one case lefties wrong case memo to billing requesting 5 discount to placate customer due to second offense and lateness of resolution because of holiday 2 of 2 asege eg OWwepsaiojs y ul eeg manufact Table manu_code ANZ HSK HRO NRG SMT SHM KAR NKL PRC state Table code AK AL AR AZ CA CT CO DC DE FL manu_name Anza Husky Hero Norge Smith Shimara Karsten Nikolus ProCycle sname Alaska Alabama Arkansas Arizona California Connecticut Colorado Washington D C Delaware Florida code MT Data in the stores_ demo Database lead_time 5 5 30 21 sname Montana Nebraska North Carolina North Dakota New Hampshire New Jersey New Mexico Nevada New York Ohio 1 of 2 The stores_demo Database A 45
100. same as OFF for supported database servers other than Extended Parallel Server only Value 1 is the same as LOW high_value Optional integer value that requests the maximum percentage of memory for Extended Parallel Server only When you specify this value after the resources value you request a range of memory expressed as a percentage Here the HIGH LOW and OFF keywords have the following effects HIGH When the database server allocates resources among all users it gives as many resources as possible to the query LOW Data is fetched from fragmented tables in parallel OFF PDQ processing is turned off for supported database servers other than Extended Parallel Server Environment Variables 3 85 PDQPRIORITY XPS For supported database servers other than Extended Parallel Server the resources value specifies the query priority level and the amount of resources that the database server uses to process the query When you specify LOW the database server uses no forms of parallelism When PDQPRIORITY is not set the default value is OFF When PDQPRIORITY is set to HIGH the database server determines an appropriate value to use for PDQPRIORITY based on several criteria These include the number of available processors the fragmentation of tables queried the complexity of the query and additional factors The resources value establishes the minimum percentage of memory when you also specify high_value to
101. same state the same state code appears in several rows of the table In the customer table the state column is a foreign key that references the code column in the state table The customer and location Tables In the customer table the customer_loc column is a foreign key that refer ences the location_id of the location table The customer_loc and location_id columns each uniquely identify the customer location The manufact and location Tables The manu_loc column in the manufact table is a foreign key that references the location_id column which is the primary key in the location table Both manu_loc and location_id uniquely identify the manufacturer location The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 27 Referential Relationships B 28 The state and location_us Tables The state and location_us tables are joined by the column that contains the state code The state_code column in the location_us table is a foreign key that references the code column in the state table The sales_rep and region Tables The region_num column is the primary key in the region table Itis a system generated region number The region_num column in the sales_rep table is a foreign key that references and joins the region_num column in the region table The region and location Tables The region_loc column in the region table identifies the regional office location It is a foreign key that references the location_id column in the loc
102. selecting a column You can also select any part of a TEXT column by using subscripts as the following example shows SELECT cat_descr 1 75 FROM catalog WHERE catalog_num 10001 This statement reads the first 75 bytes of the cat_descr column associated with the catalog_num value 10001 The database server provides a cast to convert TEXT objects to CLOB objects For more information see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Important If you try to return a TEXT column from a subquery you get an error message even when the TEXT column is not used in a comparison condition or with the IN predicate Nonprintable Characters with TEXT Both printable and nonprintable characters can be inserted in TEXT columns Informix products do not do any checking of data values that are inserted in a column of the TEXT data type Applications may have difficulty however in displaying TEXT values that include non printable characters For detailed information on entering and displaying nonprintable characters refer to Nonprintable Characters with CHAR on page 2 13 Collating TEXT Data The TEXT data type is collated in code set order For more information on collation orders see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Multibyte Characters with TEXT The database locale must support multibyte TEXT characters For more infor mation see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality DataTypes 2 45 Unnamed Row
103. servers in the DBPATH setting are accessed at least once even though the INFORMIXCONTIME value might be exceeded Thus the CONNECT statement might take longer than the INFORMIXCONTIME time limit to return an error that indicates connection failure or that the database was not found m INFORMIXCONRETRY specifies how many additional connection attempts should be made for each database server entry in DBPATH Environment Variables 3 65 INFORMIXCPPMAP 3 66 setenv m The INFORMIXCONTIME value is divided among the number of database server entries specified in DBPATH Thus if DBPATH contains numerous servers you should increase the INFORMIX CONTIME value accordingly For example if DBPATH contains three entries to spend at least 30 seconds attempting each connection set INFORMIXCONTIME to 90 The default value for INFORMIXCONTIME is 15 seconds The setting for INFORMIXCONTIME takes precedence over the INFORMIXCONRETRY setting Retry efforts could end after the INFORMIXCONTIME value is exceeded but before the INFORMIXCONRETRY value is reached INFORM IXCPPM AP Set the INFORMIXCPPMAP environment variable to specify the fully qualified pathname of the map file for C programs Information in the map file includes the database server type the name of the shared library that supports the database object or value object type the library entry point for the object and the C library for which an object was built INFORMIXC
104. stock table CHAR 3 Manufacturer code foreign key to manufact table 1 of 2 The stores_demo Database A 5 The cust_calls Table A 6 Column Name cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert The cust_calls Table Data Type Description TEXT Description of item BYTE Picture of item binary data VARCHAR 255 65 Tag line underneath picture 2 of 2 All customer calls for information on orders shipments or complaints are logged The cust_calls table contains information about these types of customer calls Figure A 6 shows the columns of the cust_calls table Figure A 6 The cust_calls Table Column Name Data Type Description g u customer num INTEGER Customer number foreign key to customer table g u call_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE Date and time when call was received user_id CHAR 18 Name of person logging call default is user login name call_code CHAR 1 Type of call foreign key to call_type table call_descr CHAR 240 Description of call res_dtime DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE Date and time when call was resolved res_descr CHAR 240 Description of how call was IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference resolved The call_ type Table The call_type Table The call codes associated with customer calls are stored in the call_type table Figure A 7 shows the columns of the call_type table Figure A 7 The call_type Table Column Name Data Type Description call_code CHAR 1 Call code code_descr CHAR 30
105. structure that specifies which events should be audited or excluded from auditing by the database secure audit ing facility The SQL statements that you use to obtain auxiliary information about tables and databases These statements include INFO OUTPUT WHENEVER and GET DIAGNOSTICS A method of organizing an index into a tree structure for efficient record retrieval 4 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference B tree index backup base table base type before image big endian bitmap index blob BLOB blobpage blobspace Boolean A type of index that uses a balanced tree structure for efficient record retrieval A B tree index is balanced when the leaf nodes are all at the same level from the root node B tree indexes store a list of rowids for any duplicate key value data in ascending or descending order See also bitmap index and R tree index A duplicate of a computer file on another device or tape to preserve existing work in case of a computer failure or other mishap A backup refers to dupli cating logical log files while archiving refers to duplicating data See table See opaque data type The image of a row page or other item before any changes are made to it A hardware determined storage method in which the most significant byte of a multibyte number has the lowest address See also little endian A type of index that stores a bitmap for any highly duplicate key value The bitmap indicates which
106. such that only one group called root exists at the highest level and each group except root is related to only one parent group on a higher level The ability of a system to resist failure and data loss High availability includes features such as fast recovery and mirroring It is sometimes referred to as fault tolerance The High Performance Loader HPL utility is part of Dynamic Server The HPL loads and unloads data using parallel access to devices See also external table A rectangular inverse video area marking your place on the screen A high light can indicate the current option on a menu or the current character in an editing session If a terminal cannot display highlighting the current option can appear in angle lt gt brackets with the current character underlined A cursor that is created using the WITH HOLD keywords A hold cursor remains open past the end of a transaction It allows uninterrupted access to a set of rows across multiple transactions The page that contains the first byte of the data row specified by the rowid Even if a data row outgrows its original storage location the home page does not change The home page contains a forward pointer to the new location of the data row See also remainder page An SQL API program variable that you use in an embedded statement to transfer information between the SQL API program and the database See High Performance Loader A distribution scheme that le
107. tabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying a table colno SMALLINT Code uniquely identifying a column 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 35 SYSDEFAULTS Column Type Explanation type CHAR 1 Code identifying the type of default value C Current L Literal value N NULL S Dbservername T Today U User default CHAR 256 If sysdefaults type L the literal default value class IDS only CHAR 1 Code identifying what kind of column T table t row type 2 of 2 If a default is not explicitly specified in the CREATE TABLE statement no entry exists in this table If you specify a literal for the default value it is stored in the default column as ASCII text If the literal value is not of type NCHAR the default column consists of two parts The first part is the 6 bit representation of the binary value of the default value structure The second part is the default value in ASCII text A blank space separates the two parts If the data type of the column is not NCHAR or NVARCHAR a binary representation is encoded in the default column A composite index on the tabid colno and class columns allows only unique values For Extended Parallel Server this index does not include the class column 1 36 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSDEPEND SYSDEPEND The sysdepend system catalog table describes how each view or table depends on other views or tables One row exists in this table for each depen d
108. table are defined viotid INTEGER Identifying code of the violations table diatid INTEGER Identifying code of the diagnostics table maxrows INTEGER Maximum number of rows that can be inserted into the diagnostics table by a single insert update or delete operation on a target table that has a filtering mode object defined on it IDS The maximum number of rows allowed in the violations table for each coserver XPS The maxrows column also signifies the maximum number of rows that can be inserted in the diagnostics table during a single operation that enables a disabled object or that sets a disabled object to filtering mode provided that a diagnostics table exists for the target table If no maximum is specified for the diagnostics or violations table then maxrows contains a NULL value Extended Parallel Server does not use the diagnostic table when a constraint violation occurs Rather the database server stores additional information in the violations table The violations table contains the data that the transaction refused and an indication of the cause The primary key of this table is the targettid column An additional unique index is also defined on the viotid column Dynamic Server also has a unique index on the diatid column System Catalog Tables 1 77 SYSXTDDESC SYSXTDDESC The sysxtddesc system catalog table provides a text description of each UDT defined in the database The sysxtddesc table has
109. table in a table hierarchy 28 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference join join index jukebox kernel key keyword kilobyte Language Supplement large object leaf node level of isolation The process of combining information from two or more tables based on some common domain of information Rows from one table are paired with rows from another table when information in the corresponding rows match on the joining criterion For example if a customer_num column exists in the customer and the orders tables you can construct a query that pairs each customer row with all the associated orders rows based on the common customer_num See also Cartesian product and outer join A type of generalized key GK index that contains keys that are the result of a query that joins multiple tables A physical storage device that consists of one or more optical disc drives slots that store optical platters when they are not mounted and a robotic arm that transfers platters between the slots and the drives A jukebox is also known as an autochanger The part of the operating system that controls processes and the allocation of resources The items of information that are used to locate a row of data A key defines the pieces of information for which you want to search as well as the order in which you want to process information in a table For example you can index the last_name column in a customer table to find specific customer
110. table stores the text of the routine each routine can have multiple rows The sysprocbody table has the following columns Column Type Explanation procid INTEGER Unique identifying code for the routine datakey CHAR 1 Type of information in the data column D User document text E Creation time information L Literal value that is literal number or quoted string P Interpreter instruction code p code R Return value type list S Routine symbol table T Actual routine source seqno INTEGER Line number within the routine data CHAR 256 Actual text of the routine The data column contains actual data which can be one of the following types Encoded return values list Encoded symbol table Literal data P code for the routine Compiled code for the routine Text of the routine and its documentation A composite index on the procid datakey and seqno columns allows only unique values System Catalog Tables 1 57 SYSPROCEDURES XPS 1 58 Column procname owner procid mode retsize symsize datasize codesize numargs SYSPROCEDURES The sysprocedures system catalog table lists the characteristics for each function and procedure in the database It contains one row for each routine Type CHAR 18 CHAR 8 SERIAL CHAR 1 INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Each function in sysprocedures has a unique value procid called a rout
111. temporarily in memory or in a file while being unloaded with the UNLOAD statement DBBLOBBUF setenv DBCENTURY size represents the maximum size of TEXT or BYTE data in kilobytes If a TEXT or BYTE simple large object data size is smaller than the default of 10 kilobytes or the setting of the DBBLOBBUF environment variable it is temporarily stored in memory If the TEXT or BYTE data is larger than the default or the setting of DBBLOBBUE it is written to a temporary file This environment variable applies to the UNLOAD command only For instance to set a buffer size of 15 kilobytes set the DBBLOBBUF environment variable as the following example shows setenv DBBLOBBUF 15 In the example any TEXT or BYTE data that is smaller than 15 kilobytes is stored temporarily in memory TEXT or BYTE data larger than 15 kilobytes is stored temporarily in a file DBCENTURY To avoid problems in expanding abbreviated years applications should require entry of 4 digit years and should always display years as four digits The DBCENTURY environment variable specifies how to expand literal DATE and DATETIME values that are entered with abbreviated year values 3 28 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DBCENTURY The R P E and C settings choose algorithms for expanding two digit years Setting Algorithm R Current Use the first two digits of the current year to expand the year value P Past Expanded dates are created by
112. that can query tables insert into tables delete from tables or update tables SELECT INSERT DELETE UPDATE The LOAD and UNLOAD utilities also are sometimes called data manipulation statements See table fragmentation The ability to allow database objects to have more than one representation at more than one distinct site Synonym for constraint A descriptor assigned to each column in a table or program variable which indicates the type of data the column or program variable is intended to hold Informix data types are discussed in Chapter 2 Data Types Informix data types for Global Language Support are discussed in the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality See also built in data type complex data type distinct data type opaque data type and user defined data type A collection of information contained in tables that is useful to some orga nization or that is used for a specific purpose See also relational database See DBA A program that applies database management techniques to implement specific data manipulation and reporting tasks Used in the CONNECT statement either the database server or the database server and database to which a user connects 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference database locale database management system database object database server database server process database server utility DataBlade API DataBlade module DBA DBA PRIVILEGED DBMS The lo
113. the external data file extlength SMALLINT External column length in bytes nullstr CHAR 256 Represents NULL in external data picture CHAR 256 Reserved for future use decimal SMALLINT Precision for external decimals extstype CHAR 18 External type name No entries are stored in sysextcols for DELIMITED or Informix format external files You can use the DBSCHEMA utility to write out the description of the external tables To query these system catalog tables about an external table use the tabid as stored in systables with tabtype E An index on the tabid column allows duplicate values 1 40 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference XPS XPS SYSEXTDFILES SYSEXTDFILES For each external table at least one row exists in the sysextdfiles system catalog table which has the following columns Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Unique identifying code of an external table dfentry CHAR 152 Data file entry You can use DBSCHEMA to write out the description of the external tables To query these system catalog tables about an external table use the tabid as stored in systables with tabtype E An index on the tabid column allows duplicate values SYSEXTERNAL For each external table a single row exists in the sysexternal system catalog table The tabid column associates the external table in this system catalog table with an entry in systables Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Unique identif
114. the most recent access of this smart large object column by a user No record is kept of the most recent access of this smart large object column by a user Data pages have headers and footers to detect incomplete writes and data corruption Data pages do not have headers and footers SYSCOLAUTH A composite index on the tabid colno and sbspace columns allows only unique combinations of these values SYSCOLAUTH The syscolauth system catalog table describes each set of privileges granted on a column It contains one row for each set of column privileges granted in the database The syscolauth table has the following columns Column Type Explanation grantor CHAR 32 IDS Name of the grantor of privilege CHAR 8 XPS grantee CHAR 32 IDS Name of the grantee of privilege CHAR 8 XPS tabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the table colno SMALLINT Column number within its table colauth CHAR 3 3 byte pattern that specifies column privileges sor S Select uor U Update ror R References If the colauth privilege code is uppercase for example s for Select a user who has this privilege can also grant it to others If the colauth privilege code is lowercase for example s for Select the user who has this privilege cannot grant it to others A hyphen indicates the absence of the privilege corre sponding to that position within the colauth pattern A composite index on the tabid grantor grantee and coln
115. the same as the range of the C double data type on your computer You can use n to specify the precision of a FLOAT data type but SQL ignores the precision The value n must be a whole number between 1 and 14 A column with the FLOAT data type typically stores scientific numbers that can be calculated only approximately Because floating point numbers retain only their most significant digits the number that you enter in this type of column and the number the database server displays can differ slightly IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The difference between the two values depends on how your computer stores floating point numbers internally For example you might enter a value of 1 1000001 into a FLOAT field and after processing the SQL statement the database server might display this value as 1 1 This situation occurs whena value has more digits than the floating point number can store In this case the value is stored in its approximate form with the least significant digits treated as zeros FLOAT data types usually require 8 bytes of storage per value Conversion of a FLOAT value to a DECIMAL value results in 17 digits of precision INT The INT data type is a synonym for INTEGER INT8 The INT8 data type stores whole numbers that can range in value from 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 to 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 or 2 1 to 26 1 for 18 or 19 digits of precision The number 9 223 372 036 854 775 808 is a re
116. the stores_demo database m The sales_demo database illustrates a dimensional schema for data warehousing applications For conceptual information about dimen sional data modeling see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation m The superstores_demo database illustrates an object relational schema The superstores_demo database contains examples of extended data types type and table inheritance and user defined routines Introduction 5 New Features in Dynamic Server Version 9 3 6 For information about how to create and populate the demonstration databases see the DB Access User s Manual For descriptions of the databases and their contents see the Informix Guide to SQL Reference The scripts that you use to install the demonstration databases reside in the INFORMIXDIR bin directory on UNIX platforms and in the INFORMIXDIR bin directory in Windows environments New Features in Dynamic Server Version 9 3 The following table provides information about the new features for Informix Dynamic Server Version 9 3 that this manual covers To go to the desired page click a blue hyperlink For a description of all new features see the Getting Started manual SQL Enhancements Version 9 3 includes an environment variable that allows the user or the DBA to specify default locking modes for the database New Features Reference Configurable default lock modes IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE on page
117. the syschecks table stores both the ASCII text and a binary encoded form of the check constraint it contains multiple rows for each check constraint The syschecks table has the following columns Column Type Explanation constrid INTEGER Unique code identifying the constraint type CHAR 1 Form in which the check constraint is stored B Binary encoded s Select T Text seqno SMALLINT Line number of the check constraint checktext CHAR 32 Text of the check constraint The text in the checktext column associated with B type in the type column is in computer readable format To view the text associated with a particular check constraint use the following query with the appropriate constrid code SELECT FROM syschecks WHERE constrid 10 AND type T Each check constraint described in the syschecks table also has its own row in the sysconstraints table A composite index on the constrid type and seqno columns allows only unique values 1 24 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSCHECKUDRDEP SYSCHECKUDRDEP The syscheckudrdep system catalog table describes each check constraint that is referenced by a user defined routine UDR in the database The syscheckudrdep table has the following columns Column Type Explanation udr_id INTEGER Unique code identifying the UDR constraint_id INTEGER Unique code identifying the check constraint Each check constraint described in the syscheckudrdep table also has its own row
118. touring and Women s Anatomical gel construction with lycra cover Black or black hot pink Lightweight With Anatomical Support 4 of 13 asegejeg op sei0 s ay ul eq ev eoueJejey TOS O pIND xILOJU Wel catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10027 108 SHM Double or triple crankset with choice of chainrings For double crankset chainrings from 38 54 teeth For triple crankset chainrings from 24 48 teeth 10028 109 PRC Steel toe clips with nylon strap Extra wide at buckle to reduce pressure 10029 109 SHM Ingenious new design combines button on sole of shoe with slot ona pedal plate to give riders new options in riding efficiency Choose full or partial locking Four plates mean both top and bottom of pedals are slotted no fishing around when you want to engage full power Fast unlocking ensures safety when maneuverability is paramount 10030 110 PRC Super lightweight Meets both ANSI and Snell standards for impact protection 7 5 oz Quick release shadow buckle lt BYTE value gt lt BYTE value gt lt BYTE value gt lt BYTE value gt Customize Your Mountain Bike With Extra Durable Crankset Classic Toeclip Improved to Prevent Soreness at Clip Buckle Ingenious Pedal Clip Design Delivers Maximum Power and Fast Unlocking Feather Light Quick Release Maximum Protection Helmet 5 of 13 asege eg OWwep seJojs y ul eeg Ge y aseqejeq o
119. trace message you must specify its name locale and text By default all users can view the systracemsgs table but only users with the DBA privilege can modify it The database cannot support tracing unless the MITRACE_OFF configuration parameter is undefined A unique composite index is defined on the name and locale columns Another unique index is defined on the msgid column System Catalog Tables 1 73 SYSTRIGBODY SYSTRIGBODY The systrigbody system catalog table contains the ASCII text of the trigger definition and the linearized code for the trigger Linearized code is binary data and code that is represented in ASCII format Important The database server uses the linearized code that is stored in systrigbody You must not alter the content of rows that contain linearized code The systrigbody table has the following columns Column Type Explanation trigid INTEGER Identifying code of the trigger datakey CHAR 1 Code specifying the type of data A ASCII text for the body triggered actions B Linearized code for the body D English text for the header trigger definition H Linearized code for the header S Linearized code for the symbol table seqno INTEGER Page number of this data segment data CHAR 256 English text or linearized code A composite index on the trigid datakey and seqno columns allows only unique values 1 74 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSTRIGG
120. type and unnamed row type An Informix ESQL C host variable or SPL variable that holds an entire row type and provides access to the individual fields of the row In nonfragmented tables rowid refers to an integer that defines the physical location of a row Rowids must be explicitly created to be used in fragmented tables and they do not define a physical location for a row Rowids in fragmented tables are accessed by an index that is created when the rowid is created this access method is slow Informix recommends that users creating new applications move toward using primary keys as a method of row identification instead of using rowids How a database server or a user determines into which fragment rows are placed The database server determines the rule for round robin fragmentation and system defined hash fragmentation The user determines the rule for expres sion based fragmentation and hybrid fragmentation See also arbitrary rule and range rule The hardware and operating system services available at the time a program runs An error that occurs during program execution Compare with compile time error Not for Extended Parallel Server A logical storage area that contains one or more chunks that store only BLOB and CLOB data The number of digits to the right of the decimal place in DECIMAL notation The number 14 2350 has a scale of 4 four digits to the right of the decimal point See also precision The ability to com
121. 21 201 ANZ 3 225 00 3 1021 202 KAR 3 690 00 4 1021 205 ANZ 2 624 00 1 1022 309 HRO 1 40 00 2 1022 303 PRC 2 96 00 3 1022 6 ANZ 2 96 00 1 1023 103 PRC 2 40 00 2 1023 104 PRC 2 116 00 3 1023 105 SHM 1 80 00 4 1023 110 SHM 1 228 00 5 1023 304 ANZ 1 170 00 6 1023 306 SHM 1 190 00 3 of 3 The stores_demo Database A 23 Data in the stores_ demo Database call_type Table call_code code_descr B billing error D damaged goods I incorrect merchandise sent L late shipment O other A 24 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GZ Y aseqeleq owep sejo s ay order_num order_date 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 05 20 1998 05 21 1998 05 22 1998 05 22 1998 05 24 1998 05 30 1998 05 31 1998 06 07 1998 06 14 1998 06 17 1998 06 18 1998 06 18 1998 orders Table customer_num ship_instruct 104 101 104 106 116 112 117 110 111 115 104 117 express PO on box deliver back door only express ring bell twice call before delivery after 10AM closed Monday door next to grocery deliver 776 King St if no answer express backlog po_num n B77836 n 9270 n B77890 y 8006 n 2865 y Q13557 n 278693 y LZ230 n 4745 n 429 n B77897 n 278701 ship_date 06 01 1998 05 26 1998 05 23 1998 05 30 1998 06 09 1998 06 05 1998 07 06 1998 06 21 1998 06 29 1998 07 03 1998 06 29 1998 ship_weight ship_charge paid_d
122. 3 55 3 68 3 72 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 35 3 74 3 75 3 76 3 54 3 28 10 of 10 Environment Variables 3 105 The stores demo Database The stores_demo database contains a set of tables that describe an imaginary business The examples in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial and other Informix manuals are based on this demonstration database The stores_demo database uses the default U S English locale and is not ANSI compliant This appendix contains the following sections m The first section describes the structure of the tables in the stores_demo database It identifies the primary key of each table lists the name and data type of each column and indicates whether the column has a default value or check constraint Indexes on columns are also identified and classified as unique allowing duplicate values m The second section The stores_demo Database Map on page A 8 shows a graphic map of the tables in the stores_demo database and indicates the relationships among columns m The third section Primary Foreign Key Relationships on page A 10 describes the primary foreign key relationships among columns in tables m The final section Data in the stores_demo Database on page A 17 lists the data contained in each table of the stores_demo database For information on how to create and populate the stores_demo database see the DB Access User s Manual For information
123. 34 134 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 7 Using the System Catalog 1 8 ncols nindexes nrows created version tabtype locklevel npused fextsize nextsize flags site dbname First row 10 2 0 01 26 1999 1 T P o 16 Second row 4 0 0 01 26 1999 0 V B 0 0 0 0 2 of 2 Each table recorded in the systables system catalog table is assigned a tabid a system assigned sequential ID number that uniquely identifies each table in the database The system catalog tables receive 2 digit tabid numbers and the user created tables receive sequential tabid numbers that begin with 100 The CREATE SCHEMA block adds 14 rows to the syscolumns system catalog table These rows correspond to the columns in the table customer and the view california as the following example shows IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference colname tabid colno coltype collength colmin colmax customer_num 101 1 262 4 fname 101 2 0 15 Iname 101 3 0 15 1 of 2 Using the System Catalog colname tabid colno coltype collength colmin colmax company 101 4 0 20 address1 101 5 0 20 address2 101 6 0 20 city 101 7 0 15 state 101 8 0 2 zipcode 101 9 0 5 phone 101 10 0 18 fname 102 1 0 15 Iname 102 2 0 15 company 102 3 0 20 phone 102 4 0 18 2 of 2 In the syscolumns table each column within a table is assigned a sequential column number colno that uniquely identifies the column within its table In the
124. 42 systabauth data 1 10 1 68 Tape management setting DBREMOTECMD 3 45 Temporary dbspace 3 46 Temporary files 3 48 in SE specifying directory with DBTEMP 3 48 setting DBSPACETEMP 3 46 setting PSORT_DBTEMP 3 89 Temporary tables 3 46 in SE specifying directory with DBTEMP 3 48 specifying dbspace with DBSPACETEMP 3 46 TERM environment variable 3 92 TERMCAP environment variable 3 93 termcap file setting INFORMIXTERM 3 72 setting TERMCAP 3 93 Terminal handling setting INFORMIXTERM 3 72 setting TERM 3 92 setting TERMCAP 3 93 setting TERMINFO 3 94 terminfo directory 3 72 3 94 TERMINFO environment variable 3 94 TEXT data type casting to CLOB 2 45 collation 2 45 description 2 44 increasing buffer size 3 28 inserting values 2 44 length syscolumns 1 33 nonprintable characters 2 45 queries 2 45 restrictions in Boolean expression 2 44 with GROUP BY 2 44 with LIKE or MATCHES 2 44 with ORDER BY 2 44 setting buffer size 3 28 sysblobs data 1 22 with control characters 2 44 Text editor 3 35 Thousands separator 2 32 thread flag of ESQL C 3 94 THREADLIB environment variable 3 94 Time data types arithmetic 2 51 length syscolumns 1 33 listed 2 48 time table in sales_demo database B 6 Time values DBCENTURY setting 3 28 DBDATE setting 3 32 DBTIME setting 3 48 GL_DATETIME settings 3 52 USEOSTIME parameter 2 20 Tip icons 8 TO keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 17 EXTEND function 2 54 INTERVAL qualifier 2 26 TODAY operator 1 36 Tra
125. 6 ifx_getenv 3 7 ifx_putenv 3 7 imcadmin 3 61 load 1 42 lp 3 44 Ipr 3 44 MaxConnect 3 62 ON Bar 3 74 3 75 3 76 oninit 3 57 onload 2 10 2 11 2 44 onpload 3 41 3 88 onxfer 3 95 printenv 3 11 putenv 3 6 regedt32 exe 3 13 set 3 16 setenv 3 10 Setnet32 3 7 source 3 9 unset 3 10 unsetenv 3 10 3 54 vi 3 36 V VARCHAR data type collation 2 47 conversion to NVARCHAR 3 40 3 41 description 2 46 length syscolumns 1 32 multibyte characters 2 47 nonprintable characters 2 47 storing numeric values 2 47 See also CHARACTER VARYING data type Variable length UDT 1 79 VARIANT routine 1 60 vi text editor 3 36 View columns view 1 83 Index 19 A BC D E F GH Information Schema 1 80 server_info view 1 85 sql_languages view 1 84 sysdepend data 1 37 sysindexes view 1 49 syssynonyms data 1 66 syssyntable data 1 66 systabauth data 1 68 systables data 1 69 sysviews data 1 76 tables view 1 82 Violations sysobjstate data 1 52 sysviolations data 1 77 Virtual machine 3 24 3 78 Virtual processor 3 91 W Warning icons 8 Warning message 1 40 3 27 WHERE keyword 1 12 1 24 2 45 Whitespace in identifiers 3 53 Window borders 3 72 Windows environments manipulating environment variables 3 13 setting environment variables 3 7 Windows NT default locale for 5 Windows registry 3 13 X X setting sysams am_sptype 1 18 systabauth tabauth 1 68 XBSA debugging records 3 75 message log file 3 75 shared libr
126. 7 3 67 3 68 3 68 3 69 3 70 3 71 3 72 3 73 3 74 3 74 3 75 3 75 3 76 3 76 oh lt 3 77 3 78 3 78 3 79 3 79 3 80 3 80 3 81 3 82 3 83 3 83 3 84 3 85 3 87 Environment Variables 3 3 3 4 PLOAD_LO_PATH PLOAD_SHMBASE PSORT_DBTEMP PSORT_NPROCS SHLIB_PATH STMT_CACHE TERM TERMCAP TERMINFO THREADLIB XFER_CONFIG Index of Environment Variables IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference 3 87 3 88 3 89 3 89 3 91 3 92 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 94 3 95 3 95 GLS In This Chapter Various environment variables affect the functionality of your Informix products You can set environment variables that identify your terminal specify the location of your software and define other parameters Some environment variables are required others are optional You must either set or accept the default setting for required environment variables This chapter describes how to use the environment variables that apply to one or more Informix products and shows how to set them Types of Environment Variables The following types of environment variables are discussed in this chapter m Informix specific environment variables Set Informix environment variables when you want to work with Informix products Each Informix product manual specifies the envi ronment variables that you must set to use that product m Operating system specific environment vari
127. 8 Floating point decimal 2 21 2 24 2 43 3 36 Foreign key A 10 B 3 Formatting DATE values with DBDATE 3 32 DATE values with GL_DATE 3 52 DATETIME values with DBTIME 3 48 DATETIME values with GL_DATETIME 3 52 DECIMAL p values with DBFLTMASK 3 36 FLOAT values with DBFLTMASK 3 36 A BC D E F GH MONEY values with DBMONEY 3 38 SMALLFLOAT values with DBFLTMASK 3 36 Formatting mask with DBDATE 3 32 with DBFLTMASK 3 36 with DBMONEY 3 38 with DBTIME 3 49 with GL_DATE 3 48 with GL_DATETIME 3 48 FRACTION keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 18 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 FRAGMENT BY clause 3 46 Fragmentation distribution strategy 1 44 expression 1 44 3 31 3 34 list 1 44 PDQPRIORITY environment variable 3 86 PSORT_NPROCS environment variable 3 90 round robin 1 44 setting priority levels for PDQ 3 85 sysfragauth data 1 42 sysfragments data 1 43 FROM keyword 1 12 1 24 Function for BLOB columns 2 10 for CLOB columns 2 15 for MULTISET columns 2 33 support for complex types 2 59 Function keys 3 72 Functional index 1 47 2 60 fwritable gcc option 3 63 G gcc compiler 3 63 Generalized key index sysindexes data 1 46 sysnewdepend data 1 51 sysrepository data 1 64 Generic B trees 1 47 geography table in sales_demo database B 4 JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze GET DIAGNOSTICS statement 1 39 Global Language Support GLS 5 3 40 Global network buffer pool 3 60 Globally detached index 1 44 GLS environment variables 3 13 GL_CO
128. 8 ANZ 1 840 00 3 1003 5 ANZ 5 99 00 1 1004 1 HRO 1 250 00 2 1004 2 HRO 1 126 00 3 1004 3 HSK 1 240 00 4 1004 1 HSK 1 800 00 1 1005 5 NRG 10 280 00 2 1005 5 ANZ 10 198 00 3 1005 6 SMT 1 36 00 4 1005 6 ANZ 1 48 00 1 1006 5 SMT 5 125 00 2 1006 5 NRG 5 140 00 3 1006 5 ANZ 5 99 00 4 1006 6 SMT 1 36 00 5 1006 6 ANZ 1 48 00 1 1007 1 HRO 1 250 00 2 1007 2 HRO 1 126 00 3 1007 3 HSK 1 240 00 4 1007 4 HRO 1 480 00 1 of 3 The stores_demo Database A 21 Data in the stores_ demo Database item_num order_num stock_num manu_code quantity total_price 5 1007 7 HRO 1 600 00 1 1008 8 ANZ 1 840 00 2 1008 9 ANZ 5 100 00 1 1009 1 SMT 1 450 00 1 1010 6 SMT 1 36 00 2 1010 6 ANZ 1 48 00 1 1011 5 ANZ 5 99 00 1 1012 8 ANZ 1 840 00 2 1012 9 ANZ 10 200 00 1 1013 5 ANZ 1 19 80 2 1013 6 SMT 1 36 00 3 1013 6 ANZ 1 48 00 4 1013 9 ANZ 2 40 00 1 1014 4 HSK 1 960 00 2 1014 4 HRO 1 480 00 1 1015 1 SMT 1 450 00 1 1016 101 SHM 2 136 00 2 1016 109 PRC 3 90 00 3 1016 110 HSK 1 308 00 4 1016 114 PRC T 120 00 1 1017 201 NKL 4 150 00 2 1017 202 KAR 1 230 00 3 1017 301 SHM 2 204 00 1 1018 307 PRC 2 500 00 2 of 3 A 22 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Data in the stores_ demo Database item_num order_num stock_num manu_code quantity total_price 2 1018 302 KAR 3 15 00 3 1018 110 PRC 1 236 00 4 1018 5 SMT 4 100 00 5 1018 304 HRO 1 280 00 1 1019 111 SHM 3 1499 97 1 1020 204 KAR 2 90 00 2 1020 301 KAR 4 348 00 1 1021 201 NKL 2 75 00 2 10
129. 9 sbspace defined 2 14 2 50 name 3 54 sysams data 1 18 syscolattribs data 1 26 systabamdata data 1 68 Scale of numbers 2 21 3 36 Scan cost 1 19 Schema Tools 3 7 SECOND keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 18 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 Secondary access method 1 19 1 34 1 49 1 53 2 34 SELECT INTO TEMP statement 3 47 Select privilege 1 27 1 68 1 81 3 80 SELECT statement 1 12 1 37 Select trigger 1 75 Selectivity constant 1 60 Self join 1 9 SENDRECV data type 2 67 Sequence syssynonyms data 1 66 syssyntable data 1 66 systabauth data 1 68 systables data 1 69 Sequential integers aggid code 1 17 am_id code 1 18 classid code 1 72 constrid code 1 34 extended_id code 1 79 id code 1 39 langid code 1 65 msgid code 1 73 opclassid code 1 53 planid code 1 62 procid code 1 58 1 59 SERIAL data type 2 39 SERIALS8 data type 2 40 tabid code 1 8 1 69 trigid code 1 75 udr_id code 1 25 SERIAL data type description 2 39 inserting values 2 39 length syscolumns 1 32 resetting values 2 39 SERIALS data type assigning a starting value 2 40 description 2 40 inserting values 2 41 ABCDEFGH I length syscolumns 1 32 resetting values 2 40 using with INT8 2 41 Serializable transactions 1 86 SET data type description 2 41 SET OPTIMIZATION statement 3 84 SET PDOPRIORITY statement 3 86 SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION statement 1 61 SET STMT_CACHE statement 3 92 set utility 3 16 setenv utility 3 10 Setnet32 utilit
130. A database server can create protected routines for internal use The sysprocedures table identifies these protected routines with the letter P or p in the mode column You cannot modify or drop protected routines nor can you display them through DBSCHEMA A unique index is on the procid column A composite index on the procname isproc numargs and owner columns allows duplicate values as does a composite index on the specificname and owner columns System Catalog Tables 1 61 SYSPROCPLAN SYSPROCPLAN The sysprocplan system catalog table describes the query execution plans and dependency lists for data manipulation statements within each routine Because different parts of a routine plan can be created on different dates this table can contain multiple rows for each routine The sysprocplan table has the following columns Column Type Explanation procid INTEGER Unique identifying code for the routine planid INTEGER Unique identifying code for the plan datakey CHAR 1 Type of information stored in data column D Dependency list I Information record Q Execution plan seqno INTEGER Line number within the plan created DATE Date when plan was created datasize INTEGER Size in bytes of the list or plan data CHAR 256 Encoded compiled list or plan IDS Text of the SPL routine XPS Before a routine is run its dependency list in the data column is examined If the major version number of a table that the plan a
131. ALEINT gt 22 ee be eS ae ae soD a sa DAB TEXT 45 437 a E Ake E a Meee ag ode ZA VARCHAR m r 2 2 ee eee ee 2 46 Built In Data Types athe a O A pe Gk e TLAS Large Object Data Types See Y tk Bh e pe Ue dew ZO Simple Large Objects ee ee ewe 2 49 Smart Large Objects 0 ee ee 2 50 Time Data Types aa e et Mae ye a br De ZO Manipulating DATETIME Valte ae a od E e 22502 Manipulating DATETIME with INTERVAL Values es 2 53 Manipulating DATE with DATETIME and INTERVAL Values 2 54 Manipulating INTERVAL Values 2 56 Multiplying or Dividing INTERVAL Values ow oh ok Ua d a o 297 Extended Data Types 2 2 2 2 we 0 2B Complex Data Types 2 2 ew eee ee ee 2 58 Collection Data Types 2 ee ee ew 259 Row Data Types 2 2 2 1 ee eee ee 2 60 DISTINCT Data Types 2 2 a 1 ee a 2 61 OPAQUE Data Types 2 2 2 2 ee ee 2 61 Data Type Casting and Conversion 262 Using Built in Casts oe te won 4 Me a 2769 Converting from Number to Naber Eoi oa de ead 2064 Converting Between Number and CHAR 2 64 Converting Between INTEGER and DATE or DATETIME 2 65 Converting Between DATE and DATETIME 2 65 Using User Defined Casts a a a 2 66 Implicit Casts 2 we ee ee 2 66 Explicit Casts 0 0 2 66 2 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL R
132. ALLINT 13th component of a composite index partl4 SMALLINT 14th component of a composite index partl5 SMALLINT 15th component of a composite index partl6 SMALLINT 16th component of a composite index levels SMALLINT Number of B tree levels leaves INTEGER Number of leaves nunique INTEGER Number of unique keys in the first column clust INTEGER Degree of clustering smaller numbers correspond to greater clustering idxflags INTEGER Bitmap storing the current locking mode of the index Normal 0x00000001 XPS only Coarse 0x00000002 XPS only 2 of 2 As with most system catalog tables changes that affect existing indexes are reflected in this table only after you run the UPDATE STATISTICS statement Each part1 through part16 column in this table holds the column number colno of one of the 16 possible parts of a composite index If the component is ordered in descending order the colno is entered as a negative value The columns are filled in for B tree indexes that do not use user defined types or functional indexes For generic B trees and all other access methods the part1 through part16 columns all contain zeros The clust column is blank until the UPDATE STATISTICS statement is run on the table The maximum value is the number of rows in the table and the minimum value is the number of data pages in the table System Catalog Tables 1 47 SYSINDICES XPS The tabid column is indexed and allows duplicate values A comp
133. AR 4 Unit by which item is ordered description VARCHAR 15 Description of item unit_price MONEY 6 2 Unit price min_reord_qty SMALLINT Minimum reorder quantity min_inv_qty SMALLINT Quantity of stock below which item should be reordered manu_item_num CHAR 20 Manufacturer item number unit_cost MONEY 6 2 Distributor cost per unit of item from manufacturer status CHAR 1 Status of item m A active m D discontinued m N no order bin_num INTEGER Bin number qty_on_hand SMALLINT Quantity in stock bigger_unit CHAR 4 Stock unit for next larger unit for same stock_num and manu_code per_bigger_unit SMALLINT How many of this item in bigger_unit The stock_discount Table Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables The stock_discount table contains information about stock discounts There is no primary key Figure B 23 shows the columns of the stock_discount table Name discount_id stock_num manu_code unit unit_discount start_date end_date Type SERIAL SMALLINT CHAR 3 CHAR 4 percent DATE DATE Figure B 23 The stock_discount Table Description System generated discount identifier Distributor stock number part of foreign key to stock table Manufacturer code part of foreign key to stock table Unit by which item is ordered each pair case and so on foreign key to units table part of foreign key to stock table Unit discount during sale period Discount start date Discount end
134. ARAS SSNS NS NLL LS Restrictions SQL APIs only None None Deprecated None UNIX only ESQL C only SQL APIs DB Access only None None None None None None None UNIX only None None ESQL C UNIX only None Page 3 48 GLS 3 52 GLS 3 53 3 53 3 54 GLS 3 55 List of Environment Variables Environment Variable XPS IDS Restrictions Page INFORMIXCONRETRY Y Y None 3 64 INFORMIXCONTIME Y Y None 3 65 INFORMIXCPPMAP Y None 3 66 INFORMIXDIR Y Y None 3 67 INFORMIXKEYTAB Y vY UNIX only 3 67 INFORMIXOPCACHE Y Optical 3 68 Subsystem only INFORMIXSERVER Y Y None 3 68 INFORMIXSHMBASE Y vY UNIXonly 3 69 INFORMIXSQLHOSTS Y Y None 3 70 INFORMIXSTACKSIZE Y Y None 3 71 INFORMIXTERM Y Y DB Access 3 72 UNIX only INF_ROLE_SEP Y None 3 73 INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF Y NTonly 3 74 ISM_COMPRESSION Y wv __ISM ON Bar only 3 74 ISM_DEBUG_FILE Y Y ISMonly 3 75 ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL Y W ISM ON Baronly 3 75 ISM_ENCRYPTION Y W ISM ON Baronly 3 76 ISM_MAXLOGSIZE Y Y IsMonly 3 76 ISM_MAXLOGVERS Y Y ISMonly 3 77 JAR_TEMP_PATH Y 3 77 JAVA_COMPILER Y 3 78 JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE Y 3 78 3 of 5 Environment Variables 3 21 List of Environment Variables Environment Variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH NODEFDAC ONCONFIG OPTCOMPIND OPTMSG OPTOFC OPT_GOAL PATH PDQPRIORITY PLCONFIG PLOAD_LO_PATH PLOAD_SHMBASE PSORT_DBTEMP PSORT_NPROCS SERVER_LOCALE SHLIB_PATH STMT_CACHE TERM TERMCAP IBM Informix Gui
135. ATE OPERATOR CLASS statement 1 53 CREATE OPTICAL CLUSTER statement 1 55 CREATE PROCEDURE statement 1 65 3 80 CREATE ROLE statement 1 65 JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze CREATE ROUTINE FROM statement 1 65 3 80 CREATE ROW TYPE statement 1 30 2 36 CREATE SCHEMA statement 1 6 CREATE SYNONYM statement 1 66 CREATE TABLE statement assigning data types 2 6 default lock mode 3 57 default privileges 3 80 SET constructor 2 42 typed tables 2 37 CREATE TEMP TABLE statement 3 46 CREATE TRIGGER statement 1 75 CREATE VIEW statement 1 9 1 76 Credential 3 67 Currency symbol 2 32 3 39 Current date 1 36 3 29 CURRENT keyword 2 52 customer table in sales_demo database B 3 customer table in stores_demo database A 2 customer table in superstores_demo database B 10 B 11 B 12 cust_calls table in stores_demo database A 6 cust_calls table in superstores_demo database B 9 C map file 3 66 D Data compression 3 74 Data corruption 1 12 1 26 Data dependencies syscheckudrdep data 1 25 syscoldepend data 1 28 sysdepend data 1 37 sysnewdepend data 1 51 Data dictionary 1 5 Data distributions 1 13 1 37 3 52 Data encryption 3 76 Data pages 1 26 1 47 1 70 A BC D E F GH Data type BLOB 2 9 BOOLEAN 2 10 BYTE 2 11 CHAR 2 12 CHARACTER 2 14 CHARACTER VARYING 2 14 CLOB 2 14 DATE 2 16 DATETIME 2 17 DEC 2 21 DECIMAL 2 21 DISTINCT 2 23 DOUBLE PRECISION 2 24 FLOAT 2 24 INT 2 25 INT8 2 25 INTEGER 2 26 INTERVAL 2 26 LIST 2 29
136. ATETIME data type see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality If you specify a locale other than U S English the locale defines the culture specific display formats for DATETIME values To change the default display format change the setting of the GL_DATETIME environment variable With an ESQL API the DBTIME environment variable also affects DATETIME formatting Non default locales and settings of the GL_DATE and DBDATE environment variables also affect the display of DATETIME data They do not however affect the internal storage format of a DATETIME column The USEOSTIME configuration parameter can affect the subsecond granu larity when the database server obtains the current time from the operating system in SQL statements for details see the Administrator s Reference For more information on DBTIME see DBTIME on page 3 48 For more information on DBCENTURY see DBCENTURY on page 3 28 For more information on locales and GLS environment variables see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality 2 20 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DEC DEC The DEC data type is a synonym for DECIMAL DECIMAL The DECIMAL data type can take two forms DECIMAL p floating point and DECIMAL p s fixed point In an ANSI compliant database however all DECIMAL numbers are fixed point By default literal numbers that include a decimal point are interpreted by the database
137. BLOB Stores binary data For more information about this data type see the description on page 2 9 CLOB Stores text data For more information about this data type see the description on page 2 14 Dynamic Server stores smart large objects in sbspaces An sbspace is a logical storage area that contains one or more chunks that store only BLOB and CLOB data For information on how to define sbspaces see your Performance Guide When you define a BLOB or CLOB column you can determine the following large object characteristics m LOG and NOLOG whether the database server should log the smart large object in accordance with the current database log mode m KEEP ACCESS TIME and NO KEEP ACCESS TIME whether the database server should keep track of the last time the smart large object was accessed m HIGH INTEG and MODERATE INTEG whether the database server should use page headers to detect data corruption Use of these characteristics can affect performance For information see your Performance Guide When you access a smart large object column with an SQL statement the database server does not send the actual BLOB or CLOB data Instead it estab lishes a pointer to the data and returns this pointer The client application can then use this pointer to perform the open read or write operations on the smart large object 2 50 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Time Data Types To access a BLOB or CLOB column from within a clie
138. BMONEY environment variable 2 32 3 38 DBNLS environment variable 3 40 DBONPLOAD environment variable 3 41 DBPATH environment variable 3 42 DBPRINT environment variable 3 44 DBREMOTECMD environment variable 3 45 Dbserver group 3 69 DBSERVERNAME configuration parameter 3 69 dbservername cmd batch file 3 17 dbslice 1 44 1 45 dbspace for BYTE or TEXT values 1 22 for system catalog 1 6 for table fragments 1 42 for temporary tables 3 46 name 3 54 DBSPACE keyword 1 44 DBSPACETEMP configuration parameter 3 46 DBSPACETEMP environment variable 3 46 DBTEMP environment variable 3 48 DBTIME environment variable 2 20 3 48 DBUPSPACE environment variable 3 52 DCE GSS communications support module CSM 3 67 DEC data type See DECIMAL data type 6 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvYvY Z DECIMAL data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 21 disk storage 2 22 display format 3 36 3 38 fixed point 2 21 floating point 2 21 length syscolumns 1 32 Decimal digits display of 3 36 Decimal point DBFLTMASK setting 3 36 DBMONEY setting 3 39 DECIMAL radix 2 22 Decimal separator 3 39 DECLARE statement 3 83 Default Ccompiler 3 63 century 3 29 3 50 CHAR length 2 12 character set for SQL identifiers 3 53 compilation order 3 25 configuration file 3 80 connection 3 69 data type 2 38 database server 3 43 3 68 DATE display format 2 16 DATE separator 3 33 DATETIME display format 2 20 DECIMAL precision
139. CALE 3 20 DEFAULT_ATTACH 3 53 DELIMIDENT 3 53 ENVIGNORE 3 54 ESQLME 3 20 FET_BUF_SIZE 3 55 GLS8BITSYS 3 20 GL_DATE 2 16 3 32 GL_DATETIME 2 20 3 32 IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_S IZE 3 56 IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE 3 57 IFX_DIRECTIVES 3 58 IFX_LONGID 3 59 IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE 3 60 IFX_NETBUF_SIZE 3 60 IFX_UPDDESC 3 61 IMCADMIN 3 61 MCCONFIG 3 62 MCSERVER 3 62 NFORMIXC 3 63 NFORMIXCONCSMCEG 3 63 NFORMIXCONRETRY 3 64 NFORMIXCONTIME 3 65 NFORMIXCPPMAP 3 66 NFORMIXDIR 3 67 NFORMIXKEYTAB 3 67 NFORMIXOPCACHE 3 68 I I I I I I I I I I T U VW X Y Z INFORMIXSERVER 3 68 INFORMIXSHMBASE 3 69 INFORMIXSQLHOSTS 3 70 INFORMIXSTACKSIZE 3 71 INFORMIXTERM 3 72 INF_ROLE_SEP 3 73 INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF 3 74 ISM_COMPRESSION 3 74 ISM_DEBUG_FILE 3 75 ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL 3 75 ISM_ENCRYPTION 3 76 ISM_MAXLOGSIZE 3 76 ISM_MAXLOGVERS 3 77 JAR_TEMP_PATH 3 77 JAVA_COMPILER 3 78 JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE 3 78 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 3 79 LIBPATH 3 79 NODEFDAC 3 80 ONCONFIG 3 80 OPTCOMPIND 3 81 OPTMSG 3 82 OPTOFC 3 83 OPT_GOAL 3 83 PATH 3 84 PDOPRIORITY 3 85 PLCONFIG 3 87 PLOAD_LO_PATH 3 87 PLOAD_SHMBASE 3 88 PSORT_DBTEMP 3 89 PSORT_NPROCS 3 89 SERVER_LOCALE 3 22 SHLIB_PATH 3 91 STMT_CACHE 3 92 TERM 3 92 TERMCAP 3 93 TERMINFO 3 94 THREADLIB 3 94 XFER_CONFIG 3 95 Environment variables 7 command line utilities 3 15 displaying current settings 3 11 3 16 how to set in Bourne shell 3 9 in C shell 3 9 in Korn shell 3 9 how to set i
140. CT TYPE percent AS DECIMAL 5 5 DROP CAST DECIMAL 5 5 AS percent CREATE IMPLICIT CAST DECIMAL 5 5 AS percent IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference User Defined Routines and Extended Data Types The superstores_demo database creates the following named row types m location hierarchy a location_t a loc_us_t Q loc_non_us_t m customer hierarchy o name_t o customer_t a retail_t a whlsale_t m orders table a ship_t location_t definition location_id SERIAL loc_type CHAR 2 company VARCHAR 20 street_addr LIST VARCHAR 25 NOT NULL city VARCHAR 25 country VARCHAR 25 loc_us_t definition state_code CHAR 2 zip ROW code INTEGER suffix SMALLINT phone CHAR 18 loc_non_us_t definition province_code CHAR 2 zipcode CHAR 9 phone CHAR 15 name_t definition first VARCHAR 15 last VARCHAR 15 The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 23 User Defined Routines and Extended Data Types B 24 customer_num customer_type customer_name customer_loc contact_dates cust_discount credit_status retail_t definition credit_num expiration whlsale_t definition resale_license terms_net ship_t definition date weight charge instruct IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference customer_t definition SERIAL CHAR 1 name_t INTEGER LIST DATETIME YEAR TO DAY NOT NULL percent CHAR 1 CHAR 19 DATE CHAR 15 SMALLINT DATE DECIMAL 8 2 MONEY
141. DBNLS is 2 If you enter at the command line setenv DBNLS 2 then automatic data type conversion between NCHAR and CHAR and between NVARCHAR and VARCHAR is supported if the client system has DBNLS set to 1 or 2 but the database server can have a different locale from the client system DBONPLOAD The DBONPLOAD environment variable specifies the name of the database that the onpload utility of the High Performance Loader HPL uses If DBONPLOAD is set onpload uses the specified name as the name of the database otherwise the default name of the database is onpload DBONPLOAD dbname dbname specifies the name of the database that the onpload utility uses For example to specify the name load_db as the name of the database enter the following command setenv DBONPLOAD load_db For more information see the Guide to the High Performance Loader Environment Variables 3 41 DBPATH DBPATH The DBPATH environment variable identifies database servers that contain databases DBPATH can also specify a list of directories in addition to the current directory in which DB Access looks for command scripts sq files The CONNECT DATABASE START DATABASE and DROP DATABASE statements use DBPATH to locate the database under two conditions m If the location of a database is not explicitly stated m If the database cannot be located in the default server The CREATE DATABASE statement does not use DBPATH To add a new DB
142. DISTINCT data types and complex data types named ROW type unnamed ROW type and COLLECTION type that is defined in the database The sysxtdtypes table has the following columns SYSXTDTYPES Column Type Explanation extended_id SERIAL Unique identifying code for extended data type domain CHAR 1 Code for the domain of the UDT mode CHAR 1 Code classifying the UDT B Base opaque type C Collection type or unnamed row type D Distinct type R Named row type blank Built in type owner CHAR 32 Name of the owner of the UDT name VARCHAR 128 Name of the UDT type SMALLINT Code classifying the UDT source INTEGER The sysxtdtypes reference for distinct types only Zero 0 indicates that a distinct UDT was created from a built in data type maxlen INTEGER The maximum length for variable length data types Zero indicates a fixed length UDT length INTEGER The length in bytes for fixed length data types Zero indicates a variable length UDT byvalue CHAR 1 T UDT is passed by value F UDT is not passed by value cannothash CHAR 1 T UDT is hashable by default hash function F UDT is not hashable by default function align SMALLINT Alignment 1 2 4 or 8 for this UDT locator INTEGER Locator key for unnamed ROW type System Catalog Tables 1 79 Information Schema 1 80 Each extended data type is characterized by a unique identifier called an extended identifier extended_id a da
143. D_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable 3 79 JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze Leaf pages 1 45 libos a library 3 59 LIBPATH environment variable 3 79 LIKE keyword of SPL 2 39 2 40 LIKE operator 2 11 2 44 2 70 Linearized code 1 74 List of data types 2 6 of environment variables 3 18 of environment variables by topic 3 95 of system catalog tables 1 14 LIST data type description 2 29 LOAD statement 2 10 2 11 2 44 3 35 Locale 5 collation order 1 71 2 48 default 5 en_us 8859 1 5 multibyte 2 14 of trace messages 1 73 right to left 2 12 specifying 3 96 3 101 LOCKMODE keyword 3 56 Lock table overflow 3 57 LOCOPY function 2 10 2 15 LOG keyword ALTER TABLE statement 2 50 CREATE TABLE statement 2 50 Logging mode 1 26 Long identifiers client version 3 59 IFX_LONGID setting 3 59 Information Schema views 1 82 LOTOFILE function 2 10 2 15 LOW keyword PDQPRIORITY 3 85 UPDATE STATISTICS 1 38 Lowercase mode codes 1 61 Lowercase privilege codes 1 10 1 27 1 42 1 68 1 78 LVARCHAR data type casting opaque types 2 67 coltype code 1 31 description 2 31 M Machine notes 13 3 72 Magnetic storage media 1 22 manufact table in superstores_demo database B 17 Map file for C programs 3 66 MATCHES operator 2 11 2 44 2 48 2 70 MaxConnect 3 61 3 62 MEDIUM keyword 1 13 1 38 Membership operator 2 70 Memory cache for staging blobspace 3 68 Message file specifying subdirectory with DBLANG 3 37 XBSA 3 75 Message file for err
144. Database server locale for file I O configuration file Index of Environment Variables Environment Variable CC8BITLEVEL INFORMIXCPPMAP THREADLIB ONCONFIG ENVIGNORE INFORMIXSERVER INFORMIXSERVER DBSPACETEMP IFX_DIRECTIVES INFORMIXOPCACHE OPTCOMPIND OPT_GOAL PDQPRIORITY INFORMIXSTACKSIZE INFORMIXCONRETRY INFORMIXCONTIME INFORMIXSERVER INFORMIXSOLHOSTS DBUPSPACE DB_LOCALE INFORMIXSERVER SERVER_LOCALE ONCONFIG Page GLS Guide 3 66 3 94 3 80 3 54 3 68 3 68 3 46 3 58 3 68 3 81 3 83 3 85 3 71 3 64 3 65 3 68 3 70 3 52 GLS Guide 3 68 GLS Guide 3 80 2 of 10 Environment Variables 3 97 Index of Environment Variables 3 98 Topic parallel sorting parallel sorting Database server restore parallelism role separation shared memory stacksize temporary tables temporary tables temporary tables Date and time values formats DB Access utility IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Environment Variable PSORT_DBTEMP PSORT_NPROCS PDOPRIORITY INF_ROLE_SEP INFORMIXSHMBASE INFORMIXSTACKSIZE DBSPACETEMP DBTEMP PSORT_DBTEMP DBCENTURY DBDATE DBTIME GL_DATE GL_DATETIME DBACCNOIGN DBANSIWARN DBDELIMITER DBEDIT DBFLTMASK DBNLS DBPATH DBTEMP FET_BUF_SIZE Page 3 89 3 89 3 24 3 85 3 73 3 69 3 71 3 46 3 48 3 89 3 28 3 32 GLS 3 48 GLS GLS 3 26 3 27 3 35 3 35 3 36 3 40 3 42 3 48 3 55 Guide Guide Guide 3 of 10 Topic dbexpor
145. E If you set FET_BUF_SIZE to a valid value that value is in effect for the local database server as well as for any remote database server from which you retrieve rows through a distributed query in which the local server is the coordinator and the remote database is subordinate The greater the size of the buffer the more rows can be returned and the less frequently the client application must wait while the database server returns rows A large buffer can improve performance by reducing the overhead of filling the client side buffer XPS IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE The IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE environment variable setting on the database server determines the threshold size of tables that are used in Small Table Broadcast when the table size exceeds 128 kilobytes setenv FMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE n n is a positive integer representing the size of the table in kilobytes gt Important Query performance can suffer if IIMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE is set beyond a certain table size The recommended upper limit on table size depends on your computer and on the configuration of your database server For more information about the IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE environment variable see your XPS documentation IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKM ODE The IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE environment variable can specify the default lock mode for database tables that are subsequently created without explicitly spe
146. E OPTICAL CLUSTER ALTER OPTICAL CLUSTER and DROP OPTICAL CLUSTER statements that have been executed on databases that support optical cluster subsystems Changes that affect existing optical clusters are reflected in this table only after you run the UPDATE STATISTICS statement A composite index on the clstrname and owner columns allows only unique values A simple index on the tabid column allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 55 SYSPROCAUTH SYSPROCAUTH The sysprocauth system catalog table describes the privileges granted on a procedure or function It contains one row for each set of privileges that are granted The sysprocauth table has the following columns Column Type Explanation grantor CHAR 32 IDS Name of grantor of privileges to access the routine CHAR 8 XPS grantee CHAR 32 IDS Name of grantee of privileges to access the routine CHAR 8 XPS procid INTEGER Unique identifying code of the routine procauth CHAR 1 Type of privilege granted on the routine e Execute privilege on routine E Execute privilege WITH GRANT OPTION A composite index on the procid grantor and grantee columns allows only unique values A composite index on the procid and grantee columns allows duplicate values 1 56 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSPROCBODY SYSPROCBODY The sysprocbody system catalog table describes the compiled version of each procedure or function in the database Because the sysprocbody
147. EFINE statement in an SPL routine Acronym for Structured Query Language SQL is a database query language that was developed by IBM and standardized by ANSI Informix relational database management products are based on an extended implementation of ANSI standard SQL An application programming interface that allows you to embed SQL statements directly in an application The embedded language product Informix ESQL C is an example of an SQL API See also host variable Glossary 47 SQLCA sqida sqlhosts stack operator staging area blobspace statement statement block statement identifier static table status variable storage space stored procedure Stored Procedure Language SPL strategy function Acronym for SQL Communications Area The SOLCA is a data structure that stores information about the most recently executed SQL statement The result code returned by the database server to the SOLCA is used for error handling by Informix SQL APIs Acronym for SQL descriptor area A dynamic SOL management structure that can be used with the DESCRIBE statement to store information about database columns or host variables used in dynamic SOL statements The sqlda struc ture is an Informix specific structure for handling dynamic columns It is available only within an Informix ESQL C program See also descriptor and system descriptor area A file that identifies the types of connections the database server supports Oper
148. ER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Explanation The routine specified for the AM_CLOSE purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_INSERT purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_DELETE purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_UPDATE purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_STATS purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_SCANCOST purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_CHECK purpose function for this access method Routine specified for the AM_BEGINSCAN purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_ENDSCAN purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_RESCAN purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_GETNEXT purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_GETBYID purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_BUILD purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_INIT purpose function for this access method 3 of 3 SYSATTRTYPES For each of the last 18 columns am_create through am_truncate the value is the sysprocedures procid value for the routine The am_sptype column can have multiple entries For examp
149. ERS The systriggers system catalog table contains information about the SQL triggers in the database This information includes the triggering event and the correlated reference specification for the trigger The systriggers table has the following columns SYSTRIGGERS Column trigid trigname owner tabid event old new mode Type SERIAL VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 CHAR 32 CHAR 8 INTEGER CHAR 1 VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 VARCHAR 128 CHAR 18 CHAR 1 IDS XPS IDS XPS IDS XPS IDS XPS Explanation Identifying code of the trigger Name of the trigger Name of the owner of the trigger Identifying code of the triggering table Code for the type of triggering event D Delete trigger I Insert trigger S Select trigger U Update trigger Name of value before update Name of value after update Reserved for future use A composite index on the trigname and owner columns allows only unique values An index on the trigid column also requires unique values An index on the tabid column allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 75 SYSUSERS 1 76 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSUSERS The sysusers system catalog table describes each set of privileges that are granted on the database It contains one row for each user who has privileges on the database This system catalog table has the following columns Column Type Explanation username CHAR 32 IDS Na
150. EX or ALTER FRAGMENT ON INDEX statements An attached index can be created on a fragmented table The location of the index data varies depending on the database server In most cases index pages reside in the same tblspaces as the data pages to which they refer For Dynamic Server index pages for user indexes reside in separate tbl spaces but within the same dbspaces as the data pages to which they refer Only the syscatalogs indexes reside in the same tblspace as the correspond ing data pages For Extended Parallel Server both user and system catalog index pages reside in separate tblspaces but in the same dbspaces as the corresponding data pages See also detached index Not for Extended Parallel Server Any database server activity or operation that could potentially access and alter data and which should be recorded and monitored by the database secure auditing facility Examples of audit events include accessing tables altering indexes dropping chunks granting database access updating the current row running database utilities and so forth For a complete list of audit events see the Trusted Facility Manual Not for Extended Parallel Server A file that contains records of audit events and resides in the specified audit directory Audit files form an audit trail of information that can be extracted by the database secure auditing facility for analysis by the database administrator Not for Extended Parallel Server A
151. First line of store address Second line of store address City State foreign key to state table Zipcode Telephone number 2 of 2 The orders table contains information about orders placed by the customers of the distributor Figure A 2 shows the columns of the orders table Column Name order_num order_date customer_num ship_instruct backlog po_num ship_date Data Type SERIAL 1001 DATE INTEGER CHAR 40 CHAR 1 CHAR 10 DATE Figure A 2 The orders Table Description System generated order number Date order entered Customer number foreign key to customer table Special shipping instructions Indicates order cannot be filled because the item is backlogged m y yes m n no Customer purchase order number Shipping date 1 of 2 The stores_demo Database A 3 The items Table A 4 Column Name ship_weight ship_charge paid_date Data Type Description DECIMAL 8 2 Shipping weight MONEY 6 DATE The items Table An order can include one or more items One row exists in the items table for each item in an order Figure A 3 shows the columns of the items table Shipping charge Date order paid 2 of 2 Figure A 3 The items Table Column Name Data Type Description Qt item_num SMALLINT Sequentially assigned item number for an order eu order num INTEGER Order number foreign key to orders table stock_num SMALLINT Stock number for item foreign key to stock table manu_code C
152. HAR 20 city CHAR 15 state CHAR 2 zipcode CHAR 5 phone CHAR 18 GRANT ALTER ALL ON customer TO cathl WITH GRANT OPTION AS maryl IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Using the System Catalog GRANT SELECT ON customer TO public GRANT UPDATE fname lname phone ON customer TO nhowe CREATE VIEW california AS SELECT fname lname company phone FROM customer WHERE state CA CREATE UNIQUE INDEX c_num_ix ON customer customer_num CREATE INDEX state_ix ON customer state To process this CREATE SCHEMA block the database server first accesses the system catalog to verify the following information m The new table and view names do not already exist in the database If the database is ANSI compliant the database server verifies that the new names do not already exist for the specified owners m The user has permission to create tables and grant user privileges m The column names in the CREATE VIEW and CREATE INDEX statements exist in the customer table In addition to verifying this information and creating two new tables the database server adds new rows to the following system catalog tables systables syscolumns sysviews systabauth syscolauth sysindexes sysindices The following two new rows of information are added to the systables system catalog table after the CREATE SCHEMA block is run First row Second row tabname customer california owner maryl maryl partnum 16778361 0 tabid 101 102 rowsize 1
153. HAR 3 Manufacturer code for item ordered foreign key to manufact table quantity SMALLINT Quantity ordered value must be gt 1 total_price MONEY 8 Quantity ordered unit price total price of item IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The stock Table The distributor carries 41 types of sporting goods from various manufac turers More than one manufacturer can supply an item For example the distributor offers racing goggles from two manufacturers and running shoes from six manufacturers The stock table is a catalog of the items sold by the distributor Figure A 4 shows the columns of the stock table TT Column Name stock_num manu_code description unit_price unit unit_descr Data Type SMALLINT CHAR 3 CHAR 15 MONEY 6 2 CHAR 4 CHAR 15 The catalog Table The catalog Table Figure A 4 The stock Table Description Stock number that identifies type of item Manufacturer code foreign key to manufact table Description of item Unit price Unit by which item is ordered m Each m Pair m Case m Box Description of unit The catalog table describes each item in stock Retail stores use this table when placing orders with the distributor Figure A 5 shows the columns of the catalog table Column Name catalog_num stock_num manu_code Figure A 5 The catalog Table Data Type Description SERIAL 10001 System generated catalog number SMALLINT Distributor stock number foreign key to
154. IME YEAR TO SECOND the database server converts existing DATE values to DATETIME values and fills in the additional DATETIME fields with zeros For example 08 15 2002 becomes 2002 08 15 00 00 00 m If you convert DATETIME YEAR TO SECOND to DATE the database server converts existing DATETIME to DATE values but drops fields more precise than DAY For example 2002 08 15 12 15 37 becomes 08 15 2002 DataTypes 2 65 Using User Defined Casts 2 66 Using User Defined Casts Implicit and explicit casts are owned by the users who create them They govern casts and conversions between user defined data types and other data types Developers of user defined data types must create certain implicit and explicit casts and the functions that are used to implement them The casts allow user defined types to be expressed in a form that clients can manipulate For information on how to register and use implicit and explicit casts see the CREATE CAST statement in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Implicit Casts The database server automatically invokes a single implicit cast when needed to evaluate and compare expressions or pass arguments Operations that require more than one implicit cast fail Implicit casts allow you to convert a user defined data type to a built in type or vice versa Users can explicitly invoke an implicit cast using the CAST AS keywords or the double c
155. Installation Guide for your operating system In Informix ESQL C you can set supported environment variables within an application with the ifx_putenv function and retrieve values with the ifx_getenv function if your Windows system supports them For more information on ifx_putenv and ifx_getenv see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual Environment Variables 3 7 Using Environment Variables on UNIX UNIX Using Environment Variables on UNIX The following sections discuss setting unsetting modifying and viewing environment variables If you already use an Informix product some or all of the appropriate environment variables might be set Setting Environment Variables in a Configuration File The common shared environment configuration file that is provided with Informix products resides in INFORMIXDIR etc informix rc Permissions for this shared file must be set to 644 A user can override the system or shared environment variables by setting variables in a private environment configuration file This file must have all of the following characteristics m Stored in the user s home directory m Named informix m Permissions set to readable by the user An environment configuration file can contain comment lines preceded by the comment indicator and variable definition lines that set values separated by blank spaces or tabs as the following example shows This is an example of an environment conf
156. LLATE table 1 71 GL_CTYPE table 1 71 GL_DATE environment variable 2 16 3 32 3 33 GL_DATETIME environment variable 2 20 3 32 GNU C compiler 3 63 GRANT statement 1 65 Graphic characters 3 72 GROUP BY clause 2 11 2 44 3 47 Group informix 3 37 H Hash join 3 81 Hashed columns 1 44 Hashing parameters 1 67 Heap size 3 78 Hebrew locales 2 12 Help 12 Hexadecimal digits 3 35 HIGH INTEG keywords ALTER TABLE statement 2 50 CREATE TABLE statement 2 50 HIGH keyword PDQPRIORITY 3 85 UPDATE STATISTICS 1 13 1 38 High Performance Loader 3 41 3 87 Histogram 1 38 HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE window 3 13 Host variable 2 10 2 11 2 44 2 60 HOUR keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 17 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 HP UX operating system 3 91 HTML Hypertext Markup Language 2 14 Hybrid fragmentation strategy 1 44 Hyphen DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 Icons compliance 9 feature 8 Important 8 platform 8 product 8 Tip 8 Warning 8 IDS Informix Dynamic Server 1 14 IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZ E environment variable 3 56 IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE environment variable 3 56 IFX_DIRECTIVES environment variable 3 58 IFX_LONGID environment variable 3 59 IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE environment variable 3 60 IFX_NETBUF_SIZE environment variable 3 60 IFX_UPDDESC environment variable 3 61 imcadmin administrative tool 3 61 IMCADMIN environment variable 3 61 IMCCONFIG environment variable 3 62 IMCSERVER environment variable 3 62 IMPEX
157. MP DBONPLOAD PLCONFIG PLOAD_LO_PATH PLOAD_SHMBASE DELIMIDENT IFX_LONGID CLIENT_LOCALE ESOLMF ISM_COMPRESSION ISM_DEBUG_FILE Page 3 66 3 37 3 46 3 48 3 89 3 72 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 32 GLS Guide 3 48 GLS Guide 3 38 GLS Guide 3 48 3 41 3 87 3 87 3 88 3 53 3 59 GLS Guide 3 74 3 75 5 of 10 Topic Installation Language environment Libraries Locale Lock Mode Long Identifiers Map file for C Message chaining Message files Money format Multibyte characters Multibyte filter Index of Environment Variables Environment Variable ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL ISM_ENCRYPTION ISM_MAXLOGSIZE ISM_MAXLOGVERS INFORMIXDIR PATH DBLANG LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH CLIENT_LOCALE DB_LOCALE SERVER_LOCALE Page 3 75 3 76 3 76 3 77 3 67 3 84 3 37 GLS Guide 3 79 3 79 3 91 GLS Guide GLS Guide IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE 3 56 IFX_LONGID INFORMIXCPPMAP OPTMSG DBLANG DBMONEY CLIENT_LOCALE DB_LOCALE SERVER_LOCALE ESOLMF 3 59 3 66 3 82 3 37 GLS Guide 3 38 GLS Guide GLS Guide GLS Guide GLS Guide 6 of 10 Environment Variables 3 101 Index of Environment Variables 3 102 Topic Multithreaded applications Network Nondefault locale ON Bar utility ONCONFIG parameters Optical Subsystem Optimization directives Optimization message transfers Optimization join method Optimization performance goal OPTOFC feature Para
158. N it can include a subset of fields or even a single field For example you can enter a value of MONTH TO HOUR in a column that is defined as YEAR TO MINUTE as long as each entered value contains information for a contiguous sequence of fields You cannot however define a column for just MONTH and HOUR this entry must also include a value for DAY If you use the DB Access TABLE menu and you do not specify the DATETIME qualifiers the default DATETIME qualifier YEAR TO YEAR is assigned A valid DATETIME literal must include the DATETIME keyword the values to be entered and the field qualifiers You must include these qualifiers because as noted earlier the value that you enter can contain fewer fields than were declared for that column Acceptable qualifiers for the first and last fields are identical to the list of valid DATETIME fields that Figure 2 4 lists Write values for the field qualifiers as integers and separate them with delimiters Figure 2 5 lists the delimiters that are used with DATETIME values in the default U S English locale These are a superset of the delimiters that are used in INTERVAL values see INTERVAL Delimiters on page 2 28 Figure 2 5 Delimiters Used with DATETIME Delimiter Placement in DATETIME Literal Hyphen Between the YEAR MONTH and DAY time unit values Blank space Between the DAY and HOUR time unit values Colon Between the HOUR MINUTE and SECOND time unit values De
159. OCS Page 3 79 3 91 3 37 GLS 3 89 3 45 3 95 3 44 3 73 3 58 3 81 3 83 3 85 3 45 3 73 3 48 GLS 3 97 GLS 3 69 3 88 3 45 3 84 3 89 3 89 Guide Guide Guide 8 of 10 Environment Variables 3 103 Index of Environment Variables 3 104 Topic SQL statement caching CONNECT CREATE TEMP TABLE DESCRIBE FOR UPDATE LOAD UNLOAD LOAD UNLOAD SELECT INTO TEMP SET PDOPRIORITY SET STMT_CACHE UPDATE STATISTICS Stacksize Temporary tables Terminal handling Utilities Archive Checker IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Environment Variable DBSPACETEMP STMT_CACHE INFORMIXCONTIME INFORMIXSERVER DBSPACETEMP IFX_UPDDESC DBDELIMITER DBBLOBBUF DBSPACETEMP PDOPRIORITY STMT_CACHE DBUPSPACE INFORMIXSTACKSIZE DBSPACETEMP PSORT_DBTEMP DBSPACETEMP DBTEMP PSORT_DBTEMP INFORMIXTERM TERM TERMCAP TERMINFO Page 3 46 3 92 3 65 3 68 3 46 3 61 3 35 3 28 3 46 3 85 3 92 3 52 3 71 3 46 3 89 3 46 3 48 3 89 3 72 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 24 9 of 10 Topic Utilities DB Access Utilities dbexport Utilities ON Bar Variables overriding Year 2000 Index of Environment Variables Environment Variable DBANSIWARN DBDELIMITER DBEDIT DBFLTMASK DBNLS DBPATH FET_BUF_SIZE INFORMIXSERVER INFORMIXTERM TERM TERMCAP TERMINFO DBDELIMITER ISM_COMPRESSION ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL ISM_ENCRYPTION ENVIGNORE DBCENTURY Page 3 27 3 35 3 35 3 36 3 40 3 42
160. ONSTRAINTS 2 2 a 2 we 1 34 SYSDEFAULTS eme MOR oada oe Bk BOP ee 185 SYSDEREND s 06 e ia fs oR i ee Se Se Ge a a BZ SYSDISTRIB 4 0 4 4 me de ae bh ho tego ta oe 61487 SYSDOMAINS 2 2 ee 1 39 SYSBRRORS 3 2 var ooo Saas ls SS Set et ke ee wh ea SEB SYSEXTCOLS A Gn eB a ie as Spt Se Be Soe A gt 140 SYSEXTDFILES 0 4 ew A SYSEXTERNAL ee ee ee 1 41 SYSFRAGAUTE gt s s aa a e cr rr 142 SYSFRAGMENTS 1 ee a 1 43 SYSINDEXES 3 6 e 146 SYSINDIGES e ar ads a Bo y ds a EAS SYSINHERTIS ra 0 o po la de as et 1250 SYSLANGAUTH 2 eee ee we 150 SYSLOGMAP a 28 6 we Ga e ae Se ts i DT SYSNEWDEPEND 1 51 SYSOBJSTATE 2 2 2 ee ee 152 SYSOPEEASSES 8 aiG a bd al ars 1509 SYSOPCESIR s er s etaa g A e A Bow Ae as ADA SYSPROCAUTH lt a ade Choa e Ge gs 1506 SYSPROCBODY 2 2 ew ee 157 SYSPROCEDURES o a 0 00 a 1 588 SYSPROCPLAN 2 2 we ee ee 1 62 SYSREFERENCES sous a de a ea oe 1569 SYSREPOSITORY 2 1 64 SYSROEEAUWTEL oe dag a Ge d ei se eed 1865 SYSROUTINELANGS 2 2 we 1 65 SYSSYNONYMS is ue ea ee a a 1566 SYSSYNTABLE 2 2 1 1 66 SYSTABAMDATA 2 2 2 we ee 1 67 SYSTABAUTH 2 2 2 1 68 iv IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSTABEES th o ae A Ged e hh A es ed 1 69
161. PACE to 2 500 kilobytes enter this command setenv DBUPSPACE 2500 After you set this value the database server can use no more than 2 500 kilobytes of disk space during the execution of an UPDATE STATISTICS statement If a table requires 5 megabytes of disk space for sorting then UPDATE STATISTICS accomplishes the task in two passes the distributions for one half of the columns are constructed with each pass If you do not set DBUPSPACE the default is a megabyte 1 024 kilobytes If you attempt to set DBUPSPACE to any value less than 1 024 kilobytes it is automatically set to 1 024 kilobytes but no error message is returned If this value is not large enough to allow more than one distribution to be constructed at a time at least one distribution is done even if the amount of disk space required to do this is more than what DBUPSPACE specifies IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DEFAULT_ATTACH DEFAULT_ATTACH The DEFAULT_ATTACH environment variable supports the legacy behavior of Version 7 x of Dynamic Server which required that only nonfragmented B tree indexes on nonfragmented tables can be attached setenv DEFAULT_ATTACH If DEFAULT_ATTACH is set to 1 then all other indexes including R trees and UDT indexes must be detached An attached index is one that is created without specifying a storage clause If DEFAULT_ATTACH is not set then the CREATE INDEX statement creates detached indexes by default This
162. PATH entry to existing entries see Modifying an Environment Variable Setting on page 3 10 setenv DBPATH pathname servername full_pathname servername full_pathname is the full path from root of a directory where sql files are stored pathname is the valid relative path of a directory where sql files are stored servername is the name of an Informix database server where databases are stored You cannot reference database files with a servername DBPATH can contain up to 16 entries Each entry must be less than 128 characters In addition the maximum length of DBPATH depends on the hardware platform on which you set DBPATH 3 42 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DBPATH When you access a database with the CONNECT DATABASE START DATABASE or DROP DATABASE statement the search for the database is done first in the directory and or database server specified in the statement If no database server is specified the default database server that was specified by the INFORMIXSERVER environment variable is used If the database is not located during the initial search and if DBPATH is set the database servers and or directories in DBPATH are searched for in the specified database These entries are searched in the same order in which they are listed in the DBPATH setting Using DBPATH with DB Access If you use DB Access and select the Choose option from the SQL menu without having alre
163. PLCONFIG filename ilename specifies the simple filename of the configuration file that the pP p 8 High Performance Loader uses For example to specify the INFORMIXDIR etc custom cfg file as the config uration file for the High Performance Loader enter the following command setenv PLCONFIG custom cfg For more information see the Guide to the High Performance Loader PLOAD_LO_PATH The PLOAD_LO_PATH environment variable lets you specify the pathname for smart large object handles which identify the location of smart large objects such as BLOB and CLOB data types PLOAD_LO_PATH pathname ___ pathname specifies the directory for the smart large object handles If PLOAD_LO_PATH is not set the default directory is tmp For more information see the Guide to the High Performance Loader Environment Variables 3 87 PLOAD_SHMBASE 3 88 setenv PLOAD_SHMBASE The PLOAD_SHMBASE environment variable lets you specify the shared memory address at which the High Performance Loader HPL onpload processes will attach If PLOAD_SHMBASE is not set the HPL determines which shared memory address to use PLOAD_SHMBASE value value is used to calculate the shared memory address If the onpload utility cannot attach an error appears and you must specify a new value The onpload utility tries to determine at which address to attach as follows 1 Attach at th
164. PPMAP pathname _ pathname is the directory path where the C map file is stored The map file is a text file that can have any filename You can specify several map files separated by colons on UNIX or semicolons on Windows On UNIX the default map file is INFORMIXDIR etc c map On Windows the default map file is INFORMIXDIR etc c map IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv UNIX setenv INFORMIXDIR INFORM IXDIR The INFORMIXDIR environment variable specifies the directory that contains the subdirectories in which your product files are installed You must always set INFORMIXDIR Verify that INFORMIXDIR is set to the full pathname of the directory in which you installed your database server If you have multiple versions of a database server set INFORMIXDIR to the appro priate directory name for the version that you want to access For information about when to set INFORMIXDIR see your Installation Guide INFORMIXDIR pathname pathname is the directory path where the product files are installed To set INFORMIXDIR to usr informix for example as the installation directory enter the following command setenv INFORMIXDIR usr informix INFORM IXKEYTAB The INFORMIXKEYTAB environment variable specifies the location of the keytab file The keytab file contains authentication information that database servers and clients access
165. Poplar P O Box 3498 Palo Alto CA 94303 650 328 4543 104 Anthony Higgins Play Ball East Shopping 422 Bay Road Redwood CA 94026 650 368 Center City 1100 105 Raymond Vector Los Altos 1899 La Loma Los Altos CA 94022 650 776 Sports Drive 3249 106 George Watson Watson amp Son 1143 Carver Mountain CA 94063 650 389 Place View 8789 107 Charles Ream Athletic 41 Jordan Palo Alto CA 94304 650 356 Supplies Avenue 9876 108 Donald Quinn Quinn s 587 Alvarado Redwood CA 94063 650 544 Sports City 8729 109 Jane Miller Sport Stuff Mayfair Mart 7345 Ross Sunnyvale CA 94086 408 723 Blvd 8789 1 of 3 asege eg OWwep seJojs ay ul eeg 6L y aseqejeq owap sajo s ay customer_num fname Iname company address1 address2 city state zipcode phone 110 Roy Jaeger AA Athletics 520 Topaz Way Redwood CA 94062 650 743 City 3611 111 Frances Keyes Sports Center 3199 Sterling Sunnyvale CA 94085 408 277 Court 7245 112 Margaret Lawson Runners amp 234 Wyandotte Los Altos CA 94022 650 887 Others Way 7235 113 Lana Beatty Sportstown 654 Oak Grove Menlo Park CA 94025 650 356 9982 114 Frank Albertson Sporting 947 Waverly Redwood CA 94062 650 886 Place Place City 6677 115 Alfred Grant Gold Medal 776 Gary Menlo Park CA 94025 650 356 Sports Avenue 1123 116 Jean Parmelee Olympic City 1104 Spinosa Mountain CA 94040 650 534 Drive View 8822 117 Arnold Sipes Kids Korner 850 Lytton Court Redwood CA 94063 650 245 City 4578 118 Dick Baxter Blue Ri
166. SET PDQPRIORITY 3 86 SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION 1 61 SET STMT_CACHE 3 92 START DATABASE 3 43 UNLOAD 3 28 3 35 UPDATE 2 11 2 44 3 26 UPDATE STATISTICS 1 13 3 52 UPDATE STATISTICS FOR PROCEDURE 1 62 static option of ESQL C 3 59 STMT_CACHE configuration parameter 3 92 STMT_CACHE environment variable 3 92 STMT_CACHE keyword 3 92 stock table in stores_demo database A 4 stock table in superstores_demo database B 20 stock_discount table in superstores_demo database B 21 Storage identifiers 3 54 Stored procedure language SPL 1 58 2 60 3 31 stores_demo database 5 call_type table columns A 7 catalog table columns A 5 customer table columns A 2 cust_calls table columns A 6 data values A 17 description A 1 items table columns A 4 join columns A 9 manufact table columns A 7 primary foreign key relationships A 10 to stock table columns A 4 structure of tables A 2 String Editor dialog box 3 14 strings option of gcc 3 63 16 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvYvY Z Structured Query Language SOL 3 27 See also Statements of SQL Subscripts 2 12 2 45 SUBSTRING function 1 12 Subtable 1 50 B 14 B 25 Subtype 1 50 2 36 Summary of data types 2 6 of environment variables by topic 3 95 of environment variables by type of server 3 18 of system catalog tables by type of server 1 14 superstores_demo database 5 call_type table columns B 8 catalog table columns B 8 customer table columns B 10 B 11
167. TE TABLE and CREATE INDEX statements can specify the name of an external space instead of a dbspace A database table that is not in the current database It might or might not be in a database that the same database server manages Not for Extended Parallel Server A logical name associated with an arbi trary string that signifies the location of external data Access its contents with a user defined access method A quoted string constant that specifies a family name in the optical family See also optical family See high availability The action of moving a cursor to anew row and retrieving the row values into memory A buffer in the application process that the database server uses to send fetched row data except TEXT and BYTE data to the application A component of a named row type or unnamed row type that contains a name and a data type and can be accessed in an SQL statement by using dot notation in the form row type name field name See also column A collection of related information stored together on a system such as the words in a letter or report a computer program or a listing of data A network node that manages a set of disks and provides storage services to computers on the network The part of a filename following the period For example DB Access appends the extension sql to command files A set of conditions sometimes called a predicate for selecting rows or records In an SQL query the conditiona
168. TE environment variable see DBDATE on page 3 32 If you enter only a 2 digit value for the year Informix products expand the year to 4 digits If you enter the year as 99 whether this is interpreted as 1999 or as 2099 depends on the DBCENTURY environment variable setting and the system clock calendar If you do not set DBCENTURY Informix products use the leading digits of the current year to expand abbreviated years For infor mation on DBCENTURY refer to page 3 28 In non default locales you can display dates in culture specific formats The locale and the GL_DATE and DBDATE environment variables as described in the next chapter affect the display formatting of DATE values They do not however affect the internal storage format for DATE columns in the database For more information see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DATETIME DATETIME The DATETIME data type stores an instant in time expressed as a calendar date and time of day You choose how precisely a DATETIME value is stored its precision can range from a year to a fraction of a second The DATETIME data type is composed of a contiguous sequence of fields that represents each time unit year month day and so forth that you want to record Qualifiers to specify a DATETIME data type have this format DATETIME largest_qualifier TO smallest_qualifier This resembles an INTERVAL data type qualifier INTERVAL o
169. TERMCAP The terminal type specified in the TERM setting must correspond to an entry in the termcap file or terminfo directory Before you can set the TERM environment variable you must obtain the code for your terminal from the database administrator For example to specify the vt100 terminal set the TERM environment variable by entering the following command setenv TERM vt100 TERM CAP The TERMCAP environment variable is used for terminal handling It tells DB Access and other character based applications to communicate with the termcap file instead of the terminfo directory TERMCAP pathname pathname specifies the location of the termcap file The termcap file contains a list of various types of terminals and their characteristics For example to provide DB Access terminal handling infor mation which is specified in the usr informix etc termcap file enter the following command setenv TERMCAP usr informix etc termcap You can use set TERMCAP in any of the following ways If several termcap files exist they have the following descending order of precedence 1 The termcap file that you create 2 The termcap file that Informix supplies that is INFORMIXDIR etc termcap 3 The operating system termcap file that is etc termcap If you set the TERMCAP environment variable be sure that the INFORMIXTERM environment variable is set to the default termcap If you do not set t
170. TIME setting described in the following section takes precedence over the INFORMIXCONRETRY setting IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference INFORM IXCONTIME INFORM IXCONTIME The INFORMIXCONTIME environment variable lets you specify that an SQL CONNECT statement should keep trying for at least the given number of seconds before returning an error You might encounter connection difficulties related to system or network load problems For instance if the database server is busy establishing new SQL client threads some clients might fail because the database server cannot issue a network function call fast enough The INFORMIXCONTIME and INFORMIXCONRETRY variables let you configure your client side connection capability to retry the connection instead of returning an error INFORMIXCONTIME value value represents the minimum number of seconds spent in attempts to establish a connection to a database server For example enter the following command to set INFORMIXCONTIME to 60 seconds setenv INFORMIXCONTIME 60 If INFORMIXCONTIME is set to 60 and INFORMIXCONRETRY is set to 3 attempts to connect to the database server after the initial attempt at 0 seconds are made at 20 40 and 60 seconds if necessary before aborting This 20 second interval is the result of INFORMIXCONTIME divided by INFORMIXCONRETRY If execution of the CONNECT statement involves searching DBPATH the following rules apply m All appropriate
171. U for Update means that the grantee can grant the privilege to other users a lowercase for example u for Update means the user cannot grant the privilege to others Hyphen indicates the absence of the privilege for that position within the pattern 1 42 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSFRAGMENTS A composite index on the tabid grantor grantee and fragment columns allows only unique values A composite index on the tabid and grantee columns allows duplicate values The following example displays the fragment level privileges for one base table as they appear in the sysfragauth table In this example the grantee ted can grant the Update Delete and Insert privileges to other users Column Type Explanation The sysfragments table has the following columns grantor grantee tabid fragment fragauth dba dick 101 dbsp1 ui dba jane 101 dbsp3 i dba mary 101 dbsp4 id dba ted 101 dbsp2 UID SYSFRAGMENTS The sysfragments system catalog table stores fragmentation information for tables and indexes One row exists for each table or index fragment fragtype CHAR 1 tabid INTEGER Code indicating the type of fragmented object I Index i Duplicated index fragment XPS T Table t Duplicated table fragment XPS B TEXT or BYTE data XPS i Index fragments of a duplicated table XPS d data fragments of a duplicated table XPS Unique identifying code of tabl
172. Unnamed Row See Row Unnamed on page 2 37 VARCHAR m r The VARCHAR data type stores character strings of varying length that contain single byte and if the locale supports them multibyte characters where m is the maximum size in bytes of the column and r is the minimum number of bytes reserved for that column The VARCHAR data type is the Informix implementation of a character varying data type The ANSI standard data type for varying length character strings is CHARACTER VARYING and is described in CHARACTER VARYING m r on page 2 14 You must specify the maximum size m of the VARCHAR column The size of this parameter can range from 1 to 255 bytes If you are placing an index on a VARCHAR column the maximum size is 254 bytes You can store character strings that are shorter but not longer than the m value that you specify Specifying the minimum reserved space r parameter is optional This value can range from 0 to 255 bytes but must be less than the maximum size 1 of the VARCHAR column If you do not specify any minimum value it defaults to 0 You should specify this parameter when you initially intend to insert rows with short or NULL character strings in the column but later expect the data to be updated with longer values Although the use of VARCHAR economizes on space used in a table it has no effect on the size of an index In an index based on a VARCHAR column each index key has length m the maximu
173. XCONCSMCFG environment variable 3 63 INFORMIXCONRETRY environment variable 3 64 INFORMIXCONTIME environment variable 3 65 INFORMIXCPPMAP environment variable 3 66 INFORMIXDIR environment variable 3 67 INFORMIXDIR bin directory 6 INFORMIXKEYTAB environment variable 3 67 INFORMIXOPCACHE environment variable 3 68 INFORMIXSERVER environment variable 3 68 INFORMIXSHMBASE environment variable 3 69 INFORMIXSTACKSIZE environment variable 3 71 INFORMIXTERM environment variable 3 72 informix rc file 3 8 3 12 3 57 INF_ROLE_SEP environment variable 3 73 Inheritance hierarchy 1 50 2 37 Initialization function 1 17 1 65 Input support function 2 31 Insert privilege 1 43 1 68 3 80 INSERT statement 1 72 1 77 2 19 2 60 3 26 3 34 Insert trigger 1 75 Installation directory 3 67 INT data type See INTEGER data type INT8 data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 25 using with SERIAL8 2 41 INTEG keyword 2 50 INTEGER data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 26 length syscolumns 1 32 Intensity attributes 3 72 INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF environment variable 3 74 Internationalized trace messages 1 73 Interprocess communications IPC 3 69 INTERVAL data type description 2 26 field delimiters 2 28 in expressions 2 51 2 56 to 2 57 length syscolumns 1 33 ipcshm protocol 3 69 IS NULL operator 2 11 2 44 ISM_COMPRESSION environment variable 3 74 ISM_DEBUG_FILE environment variable 3 75 ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL environm
174. YTE TEXT SERIAL or SERIALS8 Important An element cannot have a NULL value You must specify the NOT NULL constraint for collection elements No other constraints are valid for collections Dynamic Server supports three kinds of collection types LIST SET and MULTISET The keywords used to declare these collections are the names of the type constructors or just constructors For a description of each of these collection data types see its entry in this chapter For the syntax of collection types see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Using Complex Data Types in Table Columns When you specify element values for a collection list the element values after the constructor and between braces symbols For example suppose you have a collection column with the following type CREATE TABLE tablel mset_col MULTISET INTEGER NOT NULL Data Types 2 59 Complex Data Types 2 60 The following INSERT statement adds one group of element values to this MULTISET column The word MULTISET in the two examples that follow is the MULTISET constructor INSERT INTO tablel VALUES MULTISET 5 9 7 5 Leave the braces empty to indicate an empty set INSERT INTO tablel VALUE MULTISET An empty collection is not equivalent to a NULL value for the column Accessing Collection Data To access the elements of a collection column you must fetch the collection into a collection variable and modify the
175. _num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10041 201 KAR Leather and leather mesh for lt BYTE value gt Karsten s Top Quality Shoe maximum ventilation Waterproof Combines Leather and Leather lining to keep feet dry Available in Mesh white and gray or white and ivory Specify size 10042 202 NKL Complete starter set utilizes gold lt BYTEvalue gt Starter Set of Woods Ideal for shafts Balanced for power High School and Collegiate Classes 10043 202 KAR Full set of woods designed for lt BYTE value gt High Quality Woods Appro precision control and power priate for High School performance Competitions or Serious Amateurs 10044 203 NKL Set of eight irons includes 3 through lt BYTE value gt Set of Irons Available From 9 irons and pitching wedge Factory at Tremendous Savings Originally priced at 489 00 Discontinued Line 10045 204 KAR Ideally balanced for optimum lt BYTE value gt High Quality Beginning Set of control Nylon covered shaft Irons Appropriate for High School Competitions 10046 205 NKL Fluorescent yellow lt BYTE value gt Long Drive Golf Balls Fluorescent Yellow 10047 205 ANZ White only lt BYTE value gt Long Drive Golf Balls White 8 of 13 asegejeg OWwepsei0 s ay ul eq 8e V eoueJejey FOS 0 ApIND xILOJU Wel catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10048 205 HRO Combination fluorescent yellow lt BYTE value gt HiFlier Golf Balls Case Includes and standard wh
176. a cogroup that is named cogroup_all from all configured coservers The logical order in which the character string values in a database are sorted and indexed This is based on either the order of the code set or else some locale specific order Collating sequence is also known as collation order The process of sorting character strings according to some order See collating sequence and code set order An instance of a collection data type a group of elements of the same data type stored in a SET MULTISET or LIST A database cursor that has an Informix ESOL C collection variable associated with it and provides access to the individual elements of a column whose data type is a collection data type A complex data type whose instances are groups of elements of the same data type which can be any opaque data type distinct data type built in data type collection data type or row type A table that Informix ESQL C or SPL creates for a collection column when it encounters the TABLE keyword in an INSERT DELETE UPDATE or SELECT statement ESOL C and SPL store this table in a collection variable to access elements of the collection as rows of the collection derived table A query that takes the result of a subquery and turns it into a expression by using the MULTISET keyword to convert returned values into a MULTISET col lection Glossary 9 collection variable collocated join column column expression column subscript co
177. ables Informix products rely on the correct setting of certain standard operating system environment variables For example you must always set the PATH environment variable In a UNIX environment you might also have to set the TERMCAP or TERMINFO environment variable to use some products effectively The GLS environment variables that support nondefault locales are described in the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality These GLS variables are included in the list of environment variables in Figure 3 1 on page 3 19 and in the topic index in Figure 3 2 on page 3 96 but are not discussed in this manual Environment Variables 3 5 Where to Set Environment Variables on UNIX E C Tip Additional environment variables that are specific to your client application or SQL API might be discussed in the manual for that product Where to Set Environment Variables on UNIX You can set environment variables on UNIX in the following places m At the system prompt on the command line When you set an environment variable at the system prompt you must reassign it the next time you log into the system For more information see Using Environment Variables on UNIX on page 3 8 m Inan environment configuration file An environment configuration file is a common or private file where you can set all the environment variables that Informix products use The use of such files reduces the number of environment variables that you must
178. ace of the original name A synonym does not replace the original name instead it acts as an alias for the table view or sequence A database on each database server that holds the ON Archive catalog tables and system monitoring interface SMI tables that contain information about the state of the database server The database server creates the sysmaster data base when it initializes disk space A routine in an operating system library that programs call to obtain informa tion from the operating system A group of database tables that contain information about the database itself such as the names of tables or columns in the database the number of rows ina table the information about indexes and database privileges and so on See also data dictionary A pre defined cast that is known to the database server Each built in cast per forms automatic conversion between two different built in data types An Extended Parallel Server defined distribution scheme that maps each row ina table to a set of integers and uses a system defined algorithm to distrib ute data evenly by hashing a specified key A dynamic SQL management structure that is used with the ALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR DEALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR DESCRIBE GET DESCRIPTOR and SET DESCRIPTOR statements to store information about database columns or host variables used in dynamic SQL statements The structure contains an item descriptor for each column each item descriptor provides info
179. ady selected a database you see a list of all the sql files in the directories listed in your DBPATH Once you select a database the DBPATH is not used to find the sql files Only the sql files in the current working directory are displayed Searching Local Directories Use a pathname without a database server name to search for sql scripts on your local computer In the following example the DBPATH setting causes DB Access to search for the database files in your current directory and then in Joachim s and Sonja s directories on the local computer setenv DBPATH usr joachim usr sonja As the previous example shows if the pathname specifies a directory name but not a database server name the directory is sought on the computer that runs the default database server that the INFORMIXSERVER specifies see INFORMIXSERVER on page 3 68 For instance with the previous example if INFORMIXSERVER is set to quality the DBPATH value is interpreted as the following example shows where the double slash precedes the database server name setenv DBPATH quality usr joachim quality usr sonja Environment Variables 3 43 DBPRINT Searching Networked Computers for Databases If you use more than one database server you can set DBPATH explicitly to contain the database server and or directory names that you want to search for databases For example if INFORMIXSERVER is set to quality but you also want to search the marketing data
180. air each and every member of one set with each and every member of another set A Cartesian product results from a multiple table query when you do not specify the joining conditions among tables See also join 6 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference cascading deletes case sensitivity cast cast function character character set character special device check constraint checkpoint child table chunk Deletion of rows from a child table that were associated by foreign key to a row that is deleted from the parent table When any rows are deleted from the primary key column of a table cascading deletes if enabled eliminate iden tical information from any foreign key column in a related table The condition of distinguishing between uppercase and lowercase letters Be careful running Informix programs because certain commands and their options are case sensitive that is they react differently to the same letters pre sented in uppercase and lowercase characters In non default locales the locale files specify which characters if any are uppercase or lowercase A mechanism that converts one data type to another See also built in cast user defined cast explicit cast and implicit cast A user defined function that implements a cast The function must be regis tered with the CREATE CAST statement before it can be used A logical unit of storage for a code point A character is equal to one or more bytes and
181. al Value Internal Representation Literal Representation TRUE NO t FALSE 1 f NULL Internal Use Only NULL 2 10 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference BYTE You can compare two BOOLEAN values to test for equality or inequality You can also compare a BOOLEAN value to the Boolean literals t and f BOOLEAN values are case insensitive t is equivalent to T and to F You can use a BOOLEAN column to store what a Boolean expression returns In the following example the value of boolean_column is t if columnl is less than column f if columnl is greater than or equal to column2 and NULL if the value of either column1 or column2 is unknown UPDATE my_table SET boolean_column columnl lt column2 BYTE The BYTE data type stores any kind of binary data in an undifferentiated byte stream Binary data typically consists of digitized information such as spreadsheets program load modules digitized voice patterns and so on The term simple large object refers to BYTE and TEXT data types The BYTE data type has no maximum size A BYTE column has a theoretical limit of 234 bytes and a practical limit that your disk capacity determines You can store retrieve update or delete the contents of a BYTE column You cannot however use BYTE operands in arithmetic or string operations nor assign literals to BYTE columns with the SET clause of the UPDATE statement You also cannot use BYTE items in any of the following ways
182. ality assignment operator 3 16 relational operator 1 24 2 10 2 15 2 70 gt greater than angle lt gt brackets 2 12 A 30 relational operator 1 12 2 70 brackets MATCHES range delimiters 2 48 substring operator 2 12 2 45 2 70 A backslash invalid as delimiter 3 35 pathname delimiter 3 16 3 71 M sharp comment indicator 3 8 _ underscore in SQL identifiers 3 53 braces JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze collection delimiters 2 30 2 33 2 42 2 43 2 60 pathname delimiters 3 11 vertical bar absolute value delimiter 2 25 concatenation operator 2 70 field delimiter 3 35 tilde pathname indicator 3 12 double quotes delimited SQL identifiers 3 54 string delimiter 2 30 2 33 2 43 Index 21
183. alues DBCENTURY P Example data type DATE Current date 4 6 2002 User enters 1 1 1 Prefix with 19 expansion 1 1 1901 Prefix with 20 expansion 1 1 2001 Analysis Both are prior to current date but 1 1 2001 is closer to current date Environment Variables 3 29 DBCENTURY 3 30 DBCENTURY F Example data type Current date 5 7 2005 User enters 1 1 Prefix with 20 expansion Prefix with 21 expansion Analysis Only date 2101 1 chosen DBCENTURY C Example data type DATE Current date 4 6 2000 User enters 1 1 1 Prefix with 19 expansion Prefix with 20 expansion Prefix with 21 expansion Analysis Here 1 1 2001 is chosen Example data type Current date 4 6 2000 User enters 1 1 Prefix with 20 expansion Example data type DATE Current date 4 6 2003 User enters 0 1 1 Prefix with 20 expansion Analysis used In both examples when the year is abbreviated IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DATETIME year to month 2001 1 2101 1 is after the current date so it is 1 1 1901 1 1 2001 1 1 2101 closest to the current date so it is DBCENTURY R or DBCENTURY Not Set DATETIME year to month 2001 1 2000 1 the Prefix with 20 algorithm is Important The effect of DBCENTURY depends on the current date from the system clock calendar Thus 1 1 1 the abbreviated date the first e
184. ams Acronym for Database Administrator The DBA is responsible for the contents and use of a database whereas the database server administrator DBSA is responsible for managing one or more database servers Also a level of priv ilege typically for operations that most users are not authorized to perform A class of SPL routines that only a user with DBA database privileges creates Acronym for database management system These are all the components nec essary to create and maintain a database including the application develop ment tools and the database server Glossary 15 dbserver group dbslice dbspace DDL deadlock debug file decision support application decision support query declaration statement default default locale A collection of coservers defined and named by entries in the sqlhosts file Dbserver groups make multiple coservers into a single logical entity for establishing or changing client server connections A named set of dbspaces that can span multiple coservers A dbslice is man aged as a single storage object See also logslice physslice and rootslice A logical collection of one or more chunks Because chunks represent specific regions of disk space the creators of databases and tables can control where their data is physically located by placing databases or tables in specific dbspaces A dbspace provides a link between logical such as tables and physical such as chunks u
185. an add more fields and routines The property that allows a named row type or typed table to inherit representa tion data fields columns and behavior routines operators rules from a named row type above it in the type hierarchy The ability to use an instance of a subtype when an instance of its supertype is expected An ESQL C collection variable or SPL variable that has a defined collection data type associated with it and can only hold a collection of its defined type See also untyped collection variable A table that is constructed from a named row type and whose rows contain instances of that row type A typed table can be used as part of a table hierarchy The columns of a typed table correspond to the fields of the named row type See user defined aggregate See user defined routine See user defined data type Disk I O that is controlled directly by the database server instead of the oper ating system This direct control helps improve performance and reliability for updates to database data Unbuffered I O is supported by character spe cial files on UNIX and by both unbuffered files and the raw disk interface on Windows NT See Read Uncommitted See independent subquery Glossary 53 unique constraint unique index unique key UNIX real user ID unload job unlock unnamed row type untyped collection variable update update lock user defined aggregate user defined base type user define
186. and returns some of the columns and all the rows in a table See also selection and join A lock that can be changed from a shared lock to an exclusive lock See also update lock A set of conventions that govern communication among computers These conventions govern format timing sequencing and error control A request to the database to retrieve data that meet certain criteria usually made with the SELECT statement The SQL statements that are used to optimize the performance of queries These statements include SET EXPLAIN SET OPTIMIZATION and UPDATE STATISTICS An execution strategy for nested SQL subqueries whereby Extended Parallel Server rewrites such subqueries to use modified joins rather than iteration mechanisms The sqexplain out file reflects the query plan that has been selected after subquery unnesting has occurred Glossary 39 R tree index range fragmentation range rule raw device raw disk raw table Read Committed Read Uncommitted real user ID record Record 1D recover a database referential constraint Not for Extended Parallel Server A type of index that uses a tree structure based on overlapping bounding rectangles to speed access to spatial and multidimensional data types See also bitmap index and B tree index A distribution scheme that distributes data in table fragments that contain a specified key range This technique can eliminate scans of table fragments that do not co
187. and scale are not specified the database server defines a MONEY column as DECIMAL 16 2 You can use the following formula rounded down to a whole number of bytes to calculate the byte storage for a MONEY data type If the scale is odd N precision 4 2 If the scale is even N precision 3 2 For example a MONEY data type with a precision of 16 and a scale of 2 MONEY 16 2 requires 10 or 16 3 2 bytes of storage DataTypes 2 31 MULTISET e GLS In the default locale client applications format values from MONEY columns with the following currency notation A currency symbol a dollar sign at the front of the value A thousands separator a comma that separates every three digits in the integer part of the value m A decimal point a period between the integer and fractional parts of the value To change the format for MONEY values change the DBMONEY environment variable For information on how to set DBMONEY see DBMONEY on page 3 38 The default value that the database server uses for scale is locale dependent The default locale specifies a default scale of two For non default locales if the scale is omitted from the declaration the database server creates MONEY values with a locale specific scale The currency notation that client applications use is locale dependent If you specify a nondefault locale the client uses a culture specific format for MONEY values that might di
188. ant Read Uncommitted A portion of main memory that is accessible to multiple processes Shared memory allows multiple processes to communicate and access a common data space in memory Common data does not have to be reread from disk for each process reducing disk I O and improving performance Also used as an Inter Process Communication IPC mechanism to communicate between two processes running on the same computer Glossary 45 shared object file shelf shuffling signal signature simple join simple large object simple predicate single byte character singletonimplicit transaction singleton select A library that is not linked to an application at compile time but instead is loaded into memory by the operating system as needed Several applications can share access to the loaded shared object file See also dynamic link library DLL and shared library The location of an optical platter that is neither on an optical drive nor in a jukebox slot Shuffling refers to the process that occurs when a database server moves rows or key values from one fragment to another Shuffling occurs in a vari ety of circumstances including when you attach detach or drop a fragment A means of asynchronous communication between two processes For example signals are sent when a user or a program attempts to interrupt or suspend the execution of a process See routine signature A join that combines information from
189. appropriate to represent an assigned value A column or set of columns that references a unique or primary key ina table For every entry in a foreign key column containing only non NULL values there must exist a matching entry in the unique or primary column A description of the organization of a data file See also component For XPS a percent sign followed by a letter c n o or r In a command line Extended Parallel Server expands the formatting character to designate multiple coserver numbers c multiple nodes n multiple ordinal num bers designating dbspaces d or a range of dbspaces r See index fragment and table fragment The process of applying a filter predicate to the fragmentation strategy of a table or index and removing the fragments that do not apply to the operation The process of defining groups of rows within a table based on a rule and then storing these groups or fragments in separate dbspaces that you specify when you create a table or index fragmentation strategy A type of checkpoint where the pages on disk are synchronized with the pages in the shared memory buffer pool A routine that returns one or more values See also user defined function A cursor that is associated with an EXECUTE FUNCTION statement which executes routines that return values See also cursor function Glossary 23 function overloading fuzzy checkpoint gateway generalized key GK index gigabyte
190. ary 3 75 XFER_CONFIG environment variable 3 95 xfer_config file 3 95 XML Extensible Markup Language 2 14 XOR setting 3 76 XPG4 standard 1 83 20 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze XPS Extended Parallel Server 1 14 3 18 B 1 X Open compliance 1 85 Information Schema views 1 80 server_info view 1 85 X Open compliance level 15 Y Y setting DBDATE 3 32 DBTIME 3 50 sysroleauth is_grantable 1 65 Year 2000 3 29 YEAR keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 17 EXTEND function 2 54 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 Year values two and four digit 2 19 3 28 3 32 3 50 YES setting columns is_nullable 1 83 sql_languages integrity 1 84 yes setting NODEFDAC 3 80 Z Zero 0 C null as terminator 2 47 DBDATE separator 3 33 DECIMAL scale 2 21 hexadecimal digit 3 35 IFX_DIRECTIVES setting 3 58 IFX_LONGID setting 3 59 IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE setting 3 60 INFORMIXOPCACHE setting 3 68 integer scale 1 84 2 21 ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL setting 3 75 OPTCOMPIND setting 3 81 OPTMSG setting 3 82 OPTOFC setting 3 83 padding of 1 digit years 3 29 padding with DBFLTMASK 3 36 padding with DBTIME 3 51 PDQPRIORITY setting 3 85 PSORT_NPROCS setting 3 91 STMT_CACHE setting 3 92 sysams values 1 19 sysfragments hybdpos 1 45 sysindices nrows 1 48 systables type_xid 1 70 sysxdtypes values 1 79 zip column B 16 zipcode column A 2 B 15 Symbols hyphen DATE separator 3 32 DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL de
191. assed to the ESQL C script when you compile a multithreaded ESQL C application When you use the thread option while compiling the ESQL C script generates an error if THREADLIB is not set or if THREADLIB is set to an unsupported thread package 3 94 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference XPS GLS setenv XFER_CONFIG XFER_CONFIG The XFER_CONFIG environment variable specifies the location of the xfer_config configuration file XFER_CONFIG pathname pathname specifies the location of the xfer_config file The xfer_config file works with the onxfer utility to help users migrate from Version 7 x to Version 8 x It contains various configuration parameter settings that users can modify and a list of tables that users can select to be transferred The default xfer_config file is located in the INFORMIXDIR etc directory on UNIX systems or in the INFORMIXDIR etc directory in Windows Index of Environment Variables Figure 3 2 on page 3 96 provides an overview of the uses for the various Informix and UNIX environment variables that Version 8 3 and Version 9 2 support This serves as an index to general topics and lists the related environment variables and the pages where the environment variables are introduced Where the Topic column is empty the entry refers to the previ ously listed topic The term GLS Guide in the Page column in Figure 3 2 indicates environment variables that are described i
192. ata type c Click OK and type a value for the environment variable in the String Editor dialog box 6 Delete an environment variable if needed a Select the variable name b Choose Edit gt Delete in the Registry Editor For more information on how to use the Registry Editor see your operating system documentation Important In order to use the Registry Editor to change database server environment variables you must belong to either the Administrators or Informix Admin groups For information on assigning users to groups see your operating system documentation 3 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities You can set environment variables for command prompt utilities in the following ways m With the System applet in the Control Panel Ina command line session Using the System Applet to Work with Environment Variables The System applet provides a graphical interface to create modify and delete system wide and user specific variables Environment variables that are set with the System applet are visible to all command prompt sessions To change environment variables with the System applet in the control panel 1 Double click the System applet icon from the Control Panel window Click the Environment tab near the top of the window Two list
193. atabase server looks in the specified file for connectivity information On Windows by default this environment variable points to the computer whose registry contains the SOLHOSTS subkey For example to specify that the client or database server look for connectivity information on a computer named arizona enter the following command set INFORMIXSQLHOSTS arizona 4 For details of the information that sqlhosts or a file with a non default filename can provide about connectivity see your Administrator s Guide INFORM IXSTACKSIZE INFORMIXSTACKSIZE environment variable specifies the stack size in kilobytes that the database server uses for the primary thread of a client session You can use INFORMIXSTACKSIZE to override the value of the ONCONFIG parameter STACKSIZE for a given application or user INFORMIXSTACKSIZE size is an integer setting the stack size in kilobytes for SQL client threads For example to decrease the INFORMIXSTACKSIZE to 20 kilobytes enter the following command setenv INFORMIXSTACKSIZE 20 If INFORMIXSTACKSIZE is not set the stack size is taken from the database server configuration parameter STACKSIZE or else defaults to a platform specific value The default stack size value for the primary thread of an SQL client is 32 kilobytes for nonrecursive database activity Warning For specific instructions on setting this value see the Administrator s Reference If you incorrectl
194. atabase server to which the application is currently connected It contains two columns Column Data Type Explanation server_attribute VARCHAR 254 An attribute of the database server attribute_value VARCHAR 254 Value of the server_attribute as it applies to the current database server Each row in this view provides information about one attribute X Open compliant databases must provide applications with certain required information about the database server The server_info view includes the following server_attribute information server_attribute Explanation identifier_length Maximum number of bytes for a user defined identifier row_length Maximum number of bytes in a row 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 85 Structure of the Information Schema Views server_attribute Explanation userid_length Maximum number of bytes in a user name or authorization identifier txn_isolation Initial transaction isolation level for the database server Read Committed Default isolation level for databases with no logging Read Uncommitted Default isolation level for databases that are not ANSI compliant but support transaction logging Serializable Default isolation level for ANSI compliant databases collation_seq Assumed ordering of the character set for the database server The following values are possible ISO 8859 1 EBCDIC The Informix representation shows ISO 8859 1 2 of 2 The server_info Information Schema vi
195. ate 20 40 50 60 35 60 95 80 80 80 70 80 125 90 45 60 20 40 40 60 10 40 70 80 10 00 15 30 10 80 19 20 16 20 14 20 25 20 13 80 10 00 12 30 5 00 14 20 07 22 1998 06 03 1998 06 14 1998 06 21 1998 07 21 1998 08 21 1998 08 22 1998 08 29 1998 1 of 2 asegejeg ouap seio s ay ul eq 90 0 eoueJejey TOS 0 ApIND xILOJU Wel order_num order_date customer_num ship_instruct backlog po_num ship_date ship_weight ship_charge paid_date 1013 06 22 1998 104 express n B77930 07 10 1998 60 80 1220 07 31 1998 1014 06 25 1998 106 ring bell kick n 8052 07 03 1998 40 60 1230 07 10 1998 door loudly 1015 06 27 1998 110 closed Mondays n MA003 07 16 1998 20 60 6 30 08 31 1998 1016 06 29 1998 119 delivery entrance n PC6782 07 12 1998 35 00 11 80 off Camp St 1017 07 09 1998 120 North side of n DM3543 07 13 1998 60 00 18 00 clubhouse 31 1018 07 10 1998 121 SW corner of n S2292 07 13 1998 70 50 20 00 08 06 1998 Biltmore Mall 1019 07 11 1998 122 closed til noon n Z55709 07 16 1998 90 00 23 00 08 06 1998 Mondays 1020 07 11 1998 123 express n W2286 07 16 1998 14 00 8 50 09 20 1998 1021 07 23 1998 124 ask for Elaine n C3288 07 25 1998 40 00 12 00 08 22 1998 1022 07 24 1998 126 express n W9925 07 30 1998 15 00 13 00 09 02 1998 1023 07 24 1998 127 no deliveries n KF2961 07 30 1998 60 00 18 00 08 22 1998 after 3 p m 2 of 2 asege eg OWwepsaiojs y ul eeg stock Table stock_num manu_code
196. ation table which is a unique identifier for location The stock and stock_discount Tables The stock table and the stock_discount table are joined by three columns stock_num manu_code and unit These columns form the primary key for the stock table The stock_discount table has no primary key and references the stock table The stock and units Tables The unit_name column of the units table is a primary key that identifies the kinds of units that can be ordered such as case pair box and so on The unit column of the stock table joins the unit_name column of the units table IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference 8 bit character 8 bit clean 16 bit code set access method access privileges Glossary Tip For additional product specific information refer to the glossaries provided in the Informix Storage Manager Administrator s Guide the Informix SNMP Subagent Guide and other manuals in the Informix documentation set A single byte character that consists of eight bits which means that the code point is in the range 128 through 255 Examples from the ISO08859 1 code set include the non English fi and 6 characters They can be interpreted correctly only if the software that interprets them is 8 bit clean See also non ASCII character An operating system or database server that can process character data that contains 8 bit characters The operating sys tem or the database server reads the eighth
197. ators that allow programs to manipulate values that are on the stack Not for Extended Parallel Server The blobspace where a database server temporarily stores TEXT or BYTE data that is being outmigrated to an optical storage subsystem A line or set of lines of program code that describes a single action for exam ple a SELECT statement or an UPDATE statement A unit of SPL program code that performs a particular task and is usually marked by the keywords BEGIN and END The statement block of an SPL rou tine is the smallest scope of reference for program variables An embedded variable name or SOL statement identifier that represents a data structure defined in a PREPARE statement It is used for dynamic SQL statement management by Informix SQL APIs A nonlogging read only permanent table A program variable that indicates the status of some aspect of program execution Status variables often store error numbers or act as flags to indicate that an error has occurred A dbspace blobspace or sbspace that is used to hold data A legacy term for an SPL routine An Informix extension to SQL that provides flow control features such as sequencing branching and looping See also SPL routine See operator class strategy function 48 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference string subordinate server subordinate table subquery subscript substring subtable subtype supertable supertype A sequence of charact
198. base server for usr joachim set DBPATH as the following example shows setenv DBPATH marketing usr joachim usr sonja Specifying a Servername You can set DBPATH to contain only database server names This feature allows you to locate only databases you cannot use it to locate command files The database administrator must include each database server mentioned by DBPATH in the INFORMIXDIR etc sqlhosts file For information on commu nication configuration files and dbservernames see your Administrator s Guide and the Administrator s Reference For example if INFORMIXSERVER is set to quality you can search for a database first on the quality database server and then on the marketing database server by setting DBPATH as the following example shows setenv DBPATH marketing If you use DB Access in this example the names of all the databases on the quality and marketing database servers are displayed with the Select option of the DATABASE menu DBPRINT The DBPRINT environment variable specifies the default printing program setenv DBPRINT program program is any command shell script or UNIX utility that produces stan dard ASCII output 3 44 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DBREMOTECMD If you do not set DBPRINT the default program is found in one of two places m For most BSD UNIX systems the default program is lpr m For UNIX System V the
199. bbon 5427 College Oakland CA 94609 650 655 Sports 0011 119 Bob Shorter The Triath 2405 Kings Cherry Hill NJ 08002 609 663 letes Club Highway 6079 2 of 3 asegejeg OWwepsai0 s ay ul eq 0c V eoueJejey TOS 0 ApIND xILOJU Wel customer_num fname Iname company address1 address2 city state zipcode phone 120 Fred Jewell Century Pro 6627 N 17th Phoenix AZ 85016 602 265 Shop Way 8754 121 Jason Wallack City Sports Lake Biltmore 350 W 23rd Wilmington DE 19898 302 366 Mall Street 7511 122 Cathy O Brian The Sporting 543 Nassau Princeton NJ 08540 609 342 Life Street 0054 123 Marvin Hanlon Bay Sports 10100 Bay Suite 1020 Jacksonville FL 32256 904 823 Meadows Road 4239 124 Chris Putnum Putnum s 4715S E Adams Suite 909C Bartlesville OK 74006 918 355 Putters Blvd 2074 125 James Henry Total Fitness 1450 Brighton MA 02135 617 232 Sports Commonwealth 4159 Avenue 126 Eileen Neelie Neelie s 2539 South Utica Denver CO 80219 303 936 Discount Street 7731 Sports 127 Kim Satifer Big Blue Bike Blue Island 12222 Gregory Blue Island NY 60406 312 944 Shop Square Street 5691 128 Frank Lessor Phoenix Athletic 1817 N Phoenix AZ 85008 602 533 University Department Thomas Road 1817 3 of 3 asege eg OWwepsaiojs y ul eeg Data in the stores_ demo Database items Table item_num order_num stock_num manu_code quantity total_price 1 1001 1 HRO 1 250 00 1 1002 4 HSK 1 960 00 2 1002 3 HSK 1 240 00 1 1003 9 ANZ 1 20 00 2 1003
200. bit as part of the code value In other words it does not ignore the eighth bit nor make its own interpretation of the eighth bit A code set such as JIS X0208 in which approximately 65 000 distinct characters can be encoded A group of routines that access or manipulate a table or an index In the output of a SET EXPLAIN statement access method refers to the mode of table access in a query for example SEQUENTIAL SCAN as opposed to INDEX PATH See also primary access method and secondary access method The types of operations that a user has permission to perform in a specific database or database object Informix maintains its own set of database table table fragment index and column access privileges which are independent of operating system access permissions active set aggregate function aggregate support function alias ALS ANSI ANSI compliant API application development tool application process application productivity tools application program The collection of rows that satisfies a query associated with a cursor An SQL function that returns one value for a group of retrieved rows for example the frequency sum average maximum or minimum of an expres sion in a query or report See also user defined aggregate One of a group of user defined functions that the database server uses to calcu late a user defined aggregate A temporary alternative name for a table in a query us
201. bject Simple large object types BYTE TEXT Smart large object types BLOB CLOB Time DATE DATETIME INTERVAL Miscellaneous BOOLEAN For a description of character numeric and miscellaneous data types refer to the appropriate entry in Description of Data Types on page 2 9 Page references are in the alphabetical list in Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 The following sections provide additional information on large object and time data types Large Object Data Types A large object is a data object that is logically stored in a table column but physically stored independently of the column Large objects are stored separately from the table because they typically store a large amount of data Separation of this data from the table can increase performance IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Large Object Data Types Figure 2 10 shows the large object data types Figure 2 10 Large Object Data Types Large objects Simple large objects Smart large objects TEXT BLOB CLOB Only Dynamic Server supports BLOB and CLOB data types For the relative advantages and disadvantages of simple and smart large objects see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Simple Large Objects pIe large objects are a category of large objects that have a theoretical limit of 2 bytes and a practical limit that your disk capacity determines Informix
202. bol The vertical bar ASCII 124 is the default To change the field delimiter to a plus symbol for example you can set DBDELIMITER as follows setenv DBDELIMITER DBEDIT The DBEDIT environment variable specifies the text editor to use with SQL statements and command files in DB Access If DBEDIT is set the specified text editor is invoked automatically If DBEDIT is not set you are prompted to specify a text editor as the default for the rest of the session DBEDIT editor editor is the name of the text editor you want to use Environment Variables 3 35 DBFLTMASK 3 36 setenv For most UNIX systems the default text editor is vi If you use another text editor be sure that it creates flat ASCII files Some word processors in document mode introduce printer control characters that can interfere with the operation of your Informix product To specify the EMACS text editor set DBEDIT by entering the following command setenv DBEDIT emacs DBFLTM ASK The DB Access utility displays the floating point values of data types FLOAT SMALLFLOAT and DECIMAL p within a 14 character buffer By default DB Access displays as many digits to the right of the decimal point as will fit into this character buffer Therefore the actual number of decimal digits that DB Access displays depends on the size of the floating point value To reduce the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point
203. cale that a database server uses for the code set collation and date time and currency display conventions of a database The DB_LOCALE envi ronment variable can specify a nondefault database locale See also locale See DBMS An SQL entity that is recorded in a system catalog table such as a table col umn constraint access method default value dependency index operator class prepared statement privilege role sequence synonym trigger user defined aggre gate user defined cast user defined data type user defined routine or view A software package that manages access to one or more databases for one or more client applications See also relational database server A virtual processor that functions similarly to a CPU in a computer See also application process A program that performs a specific task For example DB Access dbexport and onmode are Informix database server utilities An application programming interface API that Informix provides to allow a C user defined routine access to the client application You can also use the DataBlade API to create client LIBMI applications for backward compatibility with Illustra applications A group of database objects and supporting code that extends an object rela tional database to manage new kinds of data or add new features A Dat aBlade module can include new data types routines casts aggregates access methods SQL code client code and installation progr
204. can be numeric alphabetic or a nonprintable character such as a control character See also multibyte character and single byte character One or more natural language alphabets together with additional symbols for digits punctuation ligatures diacritical marks and whitespace A natu ral language is a written language that human beings use to communicate with each other such as English Chinese or German See also code set See unbuffered disk I O A logical condition that must be satisfied before data values can be entered into a column of a database table during an INSERT or UPDATE statement A point in time during a database server operation when the pages on disk are synchronized with the pages in the shared memory buffer pool It can be a full checkpoint or a fuzzy checkpoint The referencing table in a referential constraint See also parent table The largest contiguous section of disk space available for a database server A specified set of chunks defines a dbspace or blobspace A database server administrator allocates a chunk to a dbspace or blobspace when that dbspace or blobspace approaches full capacity A chunk contains a certain number of pages Extended Parallel Server does not support blobspace chunks Glossary 7 client application client computer client locale client server architecture client server connection statements CLOB close a cursor close a database close a file cluster
205. can be set by the command IMCSERVER dbservername dbservername is the valid name of a database server Here dbservername must be the name of a database server in the sqlhosts file For more information about sqlhosts settings with MaxConnect see your Administrator s Guide You cannot use MaxConnect unless IMCSERVER is set to a valid database server name IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference UNIX setenv INFORMIXC INFORMIXC The INFORMIXC environment variable specifies the filename or pathname of the C compiler to be used to compile files that Informix ESQL C generates The setting takes effect only during the C compilation stage If INFORMIXC is not set the default compiler on most systems is cc Tip On Windows you pass either mcc or bcc options to the esql preprocessor to use either the Microsoft or Borland C compilers INFORMIXC E compiler E pathname setenv compiler is the filename of the C compiler pathname is the full pathname of the C compiler For example to specify the GNU C compiler enter the following command setenv INFORMIXC gcc Important If you use gcc be aware that Informix assumes that strings are writable so you need to compile using the fwritable strings option Failure to do so can produce unpredictable results possibly including core dumps INFORM IXCONCSM CFG The INFORMIXCONCSMCFG environment variable specif
206. ccesses has changed or if any object that the routine uses has been modified since the plan was optimized for example if an index has been dropped then the plan is optimized again When datakey is I the data column stores information about UPDATE STATISTICS and PDQPRIORITY It is possible to delete all the plans for a given routine by using the DELETE statement on sysprocplan When the routine is subsequently executed new plans are automatically generated and recorded in sysprocplan The UPDATE STATISTICS FOR PROCEDURE statement also updates this table 1 62 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSREFERENCES A composite index on the procid planid datakey and seqno columns allows only unique values SYSREFERENCES The sysreferences system catalog table lists all referential constraints on columns It contains a row for each referential constraint in the database The sysreferences table has the following columns Column Type Explanation constrid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the constraint primary INTEGER Identifying code of the corresponding primary key ptabid INTEGER Identifying code of the table that is the primary key updrule CHAR 1 Reserved for future use displays an R delrule CHAR 1 Whether constraint uses cascading delete or restrict rule C Cascading delete R Restrict default matchtype CHAR 1 Reserved for future use displays an N pendant CHAR 1 Reserved for future use displays an N T
207. ce total price of item 2 of 2 The location location_non_us and location_us Tables In this hierarchy location_non_us and location_us are subtables that are created under the location supertable as shown in the diagram in Table Hierarchies on page B 25 For information about table hierarchies see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation The location Table The location table contains general information about the locations addresses that the database tracks Figure B 14 shows the columns of the location table Figure B 14 The location Table Name Type Description o 2 location_id SERIAL Unique identifier for location loc_type CHAR 2 Code to indicate type of location company VARCHAR 20 Name of company street_addr LIST VARCHAR 25 Street address NOT NULL city VARCHAR 25 City for address country VARCHAR 25 Country for address IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables The location_non_us Table The location_non_us table contains specific address information for locations addresses that are outside the United States Figure B 15 shows the columns of the location_non_us table Figure B 15 The location_non_us Table Name Type Description location_id SERIAL Unique identifier for location loc_type CHAR 2 Code to indicate type of location company VARCHAR 20 Name of company street_addr LIST VARCHAR 25 Street address NOT NULL city VARCHAR 25
208. ce class 1 72 Trace statements 1 73 Transaction isolation level 1 86 3 81 Transaction logging 1 26 B 2 Trigger creation time value 3 31 3 34 sysobjstate data 1 52 systrigbody data 1 74 systriggers data 1 75 TRUE setting BOOLEAN values 2 10 CPFIRST 3 25 ISM_COMPRESSION 3 75 ISM_ENCRYPTION 3 76 sysams table 1 19 Truncation 2 12 TYPE keyword 2 37 U UDA See User defined aggregates UDR See User defined routine UDT See User defined data type Unnamed ROW data type See ROW type A BC D E F GH Unary arithmetic operators 2 70 Uncommitted read 1 86 Under privilege 1 68 Unique constraint 2 39 2 40 Unique index 1 46 2 39 2 40 Unique keys 1 19 Unique numeric values SERIAL data type 2 39 SERIALS8 data type 2 40 See also Sequential integers UNITS operator 2 16 2 52 2 56 2 70 units table in superstores_demo database B 22 UNIX BSD default print utility 3 45 environment variables 3 5 PATH environment variable 3 84 System V default print utility 3 45 terminfo libraries 3 72 3 94 temporary files 3 89 TERM environment variable 3 92 TERMCAP environment variable 3 93 TERMINFO environment variable 3 94 UNIX operating system default locale for 5 UNLOAD statement 3 28 3 35 Unnamed ROW data type declaring 2 38 description 2 37 inserting values 2 38 unset utility 3 10 unsetenv utility 3 10 U ENE nsetting an environment variable 3 10 ntyped table 1 70 pdate privilege 1 27 1 43
209. cifying the LOCKMODE PAGE or LOCKMODE ROW keywords This feature is convenient if you need to create several tables of the same lock mode UNIX systems that use the C shell support the following syntax setenv ici E 3 A ROW 3 56 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE PAGE The default lock mode is page level granularity ROW The default lock mode is row level granularity Similar functionality is available by setting the DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE parameter of the ONCONFIG file to PAGE or ROW When a table is created or modified any conflicting lock mode specifications are resolved according to the following descending highest to lowest order of precedence Explicit LOCKMODE specification of CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE environment variable setting DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE parameter setting in the ONCONFIG file The system default lock mode PAGE mode Aa oO N To make the DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE setting the default mode or to restore the system default if DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE is not set use the command unsetenv IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE If IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE is set in the environment of the database server before starting oninit then its scope is all sessions of the database server just as if DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE were set in the ONCONFIG file If IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE is set in the shell or in the HOME informix or INFORMIXDIR etc informix rc files th
210. cimal point Between the SECOND and FRACTION time unit values 2 18 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DATETIME Figure 2 6 shows a DATETIME YEAR TO FRACTION 3 value with delimiters Figure 2 6 Example DATETIME 2002 01 16 12 42 06 001 Value with ttt te tp a Year Day Minute Fraction Month Second When you enter a value with fewer time unit fields than in the column the value that you enter is expanded automatically to fill all the declared time unit fields If you leave out any more significant fields that is time units larger than any that you include those fields are filled automatically with the current values for those time units from the system clock calendar If you leave out any less significant fields those fields are filled with zeros or with 1 for MONTH and DAY in your entry You can also enter DATETIME values as character strings The character string must include information for each field defined in the DATETIME column The INSERT statement in the following example shows a DATETIME value entered as a character string INSERT INTO cust_calls customer_num call_dtime user_id call_code call_descr VALUES 101 2001 01 14 08 45 maryj D Order late placed 6 1 00 If call_dtime is declared as DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE the character string must include values for the year month day hour and minute fields If the character string does not contain information for all the declared fields
211. classes table has the following columns Column Type Explanation opclassname VARCHAR 128 Name of the operator class owner CHAR 32 Name of the owner of the operator class amid INTEGER Identifying code of the secondary access method associated with this operator class opclassid SERIAL Identifying code of the operator class ops LVARCHAR List of names of the operators that belong to this operator class support LVARCHAR List of names of support functions defined for this operator class The opclassid value corresponds to the sysams am_defopclass value that specifies the default operator class for the secondary access method that the amid column specifies The sysopclasses table has a composite index on the opclassname and owner columns and an index on opclassid column Both indexes allow only unique values System Catalog Tables 1 53 SYSOPCLSTR rps SYSOPCLSTR The sysopclstr system catalog table defines each optical cluster in the database It contains one row for each optical cluster The sysopclstr table has the following columns Column Type Explanation owner CHAR 32 IDS Name of the owner of the optical CHAR 8 XPS cluster clstrname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of the optical cluster CHAR 18 XPS clstrsize INTEGER Size of the optical cluster tabid INTEGER Unique identifying code for the table blobcol1 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 1 blobcol2 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 2 blobcol3 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT
212. code set order 1 of 3 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Summary of Data Types Data Type Explanation Page DATE Stores calendar date 2 16 DATETIME Stores calendar date combined with time of day 2 17 DEC Is asynonym for DECIMAL 2 20 DECIMAL p Stores floating point numbers with definable precision 2 21 if database is ANSI compliant the scale is zero DECIMAL p s Stores fixed point numbers with definable scale and 2 21 precision DOUBLE Synonym for FLOAT 2 24 PRECISION FLOAT n Stores double precision floating point numbers 2 24 corresponding to the double data type in C INT Is a synonym for INTEGER 2 25 INTEGER Stores whole numbers in a range from 2 147 483 647 to 2 25 2 147 483 647 INTERVAL Stores a span of time or level of effort in units of years 2 26 Year Month and or months INTERVAL Stores a span of time in a contiguous set of units of days 2 26 Day Fraction hours minutes seconds and or fractions of a second MONEY ps Stores currency amount 2 31 NCHAR n Stores character strings collation is locale dependent 2 34 NUMERIC p s Synonym for DECIMAL p s 2 34 NVARCHAR m r Stores character strings of varying length up to 255 2 34 bytes collation is locale dependent REAL Is asynonym for SMALLFLOAT 2 35 ROW Named Stores a named row type 2 35 SERIAL Stores sequential integers in same range as INT 2 39 SERIAL8 Stores large sequential integers in same range as INT8 2 40 SMALLFLOAT Stores singl
213. column in a table that logically relates a group of simple large objects or smart large objects that are stored in an optical cluster The amount of space specified in kilobytes that is allocated to an optical cluster on an optical volume A bit pattern that represents one character in a code set For example in the ASCII code set the uppercase A character has a code point of 0x41 8 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference code set code set conversion code set order cogroup collating sequence collation collation order collection collection cursor collection data type collection derived table collection subquery The representation of a character set that specifies how to map each element of a character set to a unique code point For example ASCII IS08859 1 Microsoft 1252 and EBCDIC are code sets to represent the English language A locale name specifies a code set The process of converting character data from one code set the source code set to another the target code set Code set conversion is useful when the client and server computers use different code sets to represent the same character data The serialized order of characters within a code set For example in the ASCII code set uppercase characters A through Z are ordered before lowercase characters a through z See also collation order and localized order A named group of coservers At initialization the database server creates
214. column number 3 blobcol4 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 4 blobcol5 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 5 blobcol6 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 6 blobcol7 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 7 blobcol8 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 8 blobcol9 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 9 blobcol10 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 10 blobcol11 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 11 blobcol12 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 12 blobcol13 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 13 blobcol14 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 14 blobcol15 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 15 1 of 2 1 54 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSOPCLSTR Column Type Explanation blobcol16 SMALLINT BYTE or TEXT column number 16 clstrkey1 SMALLINT Cluster key number 1 clstrkey2 SMALLINT Cluster key number 2 clstrkey3 SMALLINT Cluster key number 3 clstrkey4 SMALLINT Cluster key number 4 clstrkey5 SMALLINT Cluster key number 5 clstrkey6 SMALLINT Cluster key number 6 clstrkey7 SMALLINT Cluster key number 7 clstrkey8 SMALLINT Cluster key number 8 clstrkey9 SMALLINT Cluster key number 9 clstrkey10 SMALLINT Cluster key number 10 clstrkey11 SMALLINT Cluster key number 11 clstrkey12 SMALLINT Cluster key number 12 clstrkey13 SMALLINT Cluster key number 13 clstrkey14 SMALLINT Cluster key number 14 clstrkey15 SMALLINT Cluster key number 15 clstrkey16 SMALLINT Cluster key number 16 2 of 2 The contents of this table are sensitive to CREAT
215. configuration file 3 12 3 55 Private network buffer pool 3 60 Private synonym 1 70 Privilege default table privileges 3 80 on columns syscolauth table 1 27 on procedures and functions sysprocauth table 1 56 on table fragments sysfragauth table 1 42 on tables systabauth table 1 68 on the database sysusers table 1 76 on UDTs and named row types sysxtdtypeauth 1 78 Product icons 8 product table in sales_demo database B 4 Program group Documentation notes 14 Release notes 14 Protected routines 1 61 Pseudo machine code p code 1 57 PSORT_DBTEMP environment variable 3 89 PSORT_NPROCS environment variable 3 89 Public synonym 1 66 1 70 public user name 1 81 3 80 Purpose functions 1 19 Q Qualifier field DATETIME 2 17 EXTEND 2 56 INTERVAL 2 26 UNITS 2 56 Query optimizer description 1 13 directives 3 58 sysprocplan data 1 62 Quoted string DATE and DATETIME literals 2 55 Index 13 A BC D E F GH DELIMIDENT setting 3 54 INTERVAL literals 2 28 invalid with BYTE 2 12 invalid with TEXT 2 45 LVARCHAR data type 2 31 R Raw UNIX devices 3 46 Read committed 1 86 Read uncommitted 1 86 REAL data type See SMALLFLOAT data type References privilege 1 27 1 68 Referential constraint 1 35 1 63 1 77 A 10 B 25 regedt32 exe Registry Editor 3 13 region table in superstores_demo database B 18 Registry Editor 3 13 Reject file 1 42 Relational operators 2 13 2 70 Release notes 13 Release notes prog
216. configuration parameter In this situation the database server might fill tmp to the limit and eventually bring down the database server or kill the file system Environment Variables 3 47 DBTEMP setenv DBTEMP The DBTEMP environment variable is used by DB Access and Informix Enter prise Gateway products DBTEMP resembles DBSPACETEMP in its functionality specifying the directory in which to place temporary files and temporary tables DBTEMP pathname pathname is the full pathname of the directory for temporary files and tem porary tables On UNIX systems temporary files are created in tmp if DBTEMP is not set The following example sets DBTEMP to the pathname usr magda mytemp for UNIX systems that use the C shell setenv DBTEMP usr magda mytemp Important DBTEMP can point to an NFS mounted directory only if the vendor of that NFS device is certified by Informix For information about NFS products that you can use to mount a storage space for an Informix database server see the product compatibility information on the Informix web site at http www informix com idn secure pacc prodcompat html For DB Access to work correctly on Windows platforms DBTEMP should be set to INFORMIXDIR infxtmp If you do not set DBTEMP temporary files are created in tmp If DBTEMP is not set temporary tables are created in the directory of the database that is the dbs direc
217. contents of the collection variable Collection variables can be either of the following types m Variables in an SPL routine For more information see the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial m Host variables in an Informix ESQL C program For more information see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual You can also use nested dot notation to access collection data To learn more about accessing the elements of a collection see the Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial Important Collection data types are not valid as arguments to functions that are used for functional indexes Row Data Types A row type is a sequence of one or more elements called fields Each field has a name and a data type The fields of a row are comparable to the columns of a table but with important differences m A field has no DEFAULT clause m You cannot define constraints on a field m You can only use fields with ROW types not with tables IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DISTINCT Data Types Two kinds of row types exist m Named row types are identified by their names m Unnamed row types are identified by their structure The structure of an unnamed row type is the number and the sequence of data types of its fields For more information about row types see Row Named on page 2 35 and Row Unnamed on page 2 37 You can cast between named and unnamed row types For information about casting between row types see the Informix
218. credit_status Type CHAR 1 The retail_customer Table Structure of the superstores_demo Tables Description Customer credit status m D deadbeat m L lost m N new m P preferred m R regular 2 of 2 The retail_customer table contains general information about retail customers Figure B 11 shows the columns of the retail_customer table Name customer_num customer_type customer_name customer_loc contact_dates cust_discount Type SERIAL CHAR 1 name_t INTEGER LIST DATETIME YEAR TO DAY NOT NULL percent Figure B 11 The retail_customer Table Description Unique customer identifier Code to indicate type of customer m R retail m W wholesale Name of customer Location of customer Dates of contact with customer Customer discount 1 of 2 The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 11 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables B 12 Name credit_status credit_num expiration Type CHAR 1 CHAR 19 DATE The whlisale_customer Table Description Customer credit status m D deadbeat m L lost m N new m P preferred m R regular Credit card number Expiration data of credit card 2 of 2 The whlsale_customer table contains general information about wholesale customers Figure B 12 shows the columns of the whlsale_customer table Figure B 12 The whlsale_customer Table IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Name Type Description c
219. cutable file or a logically related set of files 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference application programming interface API arbitrary rule archiving argument array ASCII ASF Asian Language Support ALS A set of related software components such as those provided by Informix that a developer uses to create applications that communicate with a third party product An API can include a library of functions header files graphic interfaces and application programs See also SQL API and DataBlade API A series of expressions that you define for expression based fragmentation using SQL relational and logical operators Unlike the range rule an arbitrary rule allows you to use any relational operator and any logical operator to define the expressions such as the OR operator to group data Copying all the data and indexes of a database onto a new medium usually a tape or a different physical device from the one that stores the database Archived material is used for recovering from a failure and is usually performed by a Database Administrator See also backup A value that is passed to a routine or command Compare with parameter An ordered set of items of the same data type An individual member of the array is referred to as an element and usually is identified by an integer index that gives the position of the element within the array Acronym for American Standards Committee for Information Interchange a
220. d No other isolation level allows a user to see a changed but uncommitted row A set of contiguous disk pages in shared memory where the database server stores an unmodified copy before image of pages before the changed pages are recorded The pages in the physical log can be any database server page except a blobspace blobpage A dbslice that contains the physical log See also dbslice logslice and rootslice A value that specifies the address in memory of the data or variable rather than the contents of the data or variable See routine overloading and type substitutability The total number of significant digits in a real number both to the right and left of the decimal point For example the number 1437 2305 has a precision of 8 See also scale An opaque data type for which the database server provides the type defini tion See also BLOB BOOLEAN CLOB LVARCHAR and pointer See filter A lock held on index keys that qualifies for a predicate In a predicate lock exclusive predicates consist of a single key value and shared predicates con sist of a query rectangle and a scan operation such as inclusion or overlap An SQL statement that is generated by the PREPARE statement from a character string or from a variable that contains a character string This fea ture allows you to form your request while the program is executing without having to modify and recompile the program A program that takes high level programs
221. d cast Specifies that each entry in a column or set of columns has a unique value An index that prevents duplicate values in the indexed column See primary key See Informix user ID The information required to unload data from a relational database using the HPL This information includes format map query device array project and special options To free an object database table page or row that has been locked For example a locked table prevents others from adding removing updating or in the case of an exclusive lock viewing rows in that table as long as it is locked When the user or program unlocks the table others are permitted access again A row type created with the ROW constructor that has no defined name and no inheritance properties Two unnamed row types are equivalent if they have the same number of fields and if corresponding fields have the same data type even if the fields have different names A generic ESQL C collection variable or SPL variable that can hold a collection of any collection data type and takes on the data type of the last collection assigned to it See also typed collection variable The process of changing the contents of one or more columns in one or more existing rows of a table A promotable lock that is acquired during a SELECT FOR UPDATE An update lock behaves like a shared lock until the update actually occurs and it then becomes an exclusive lock It differs from a shared
222. d on a built in source type does not inherit the built in casts that are provided for the built in type A DISTINCT type does inherit however any user defined casts that have been defined on the source type A DISTINCT type cannot be compared directly to its source type To compare the two types you must first explicitly cast one type to the other DataTypes 2 23 DOUBLE PRECISION 2 24 You must define a DISTINCT type in the database Definitions of DISTINCT types are stored in the sysxtdtypes system catalog table The following SQL statements maintain the definitions of DISTINCT types in the database m The CREATE DISTINCT TYPE statement adds a DISTINCT type to the database m The DROP TYPE statement removes a previously defined DISTINCT type from the database For more information about the SQL statements mentioned above see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax For information about casting DISTINCT data types see Casts for Distinct Types on page 2 68 For examples that show how to create and register cast functions for a DISTINCT type see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation DOUBLE PRECISION The DOUBLE PRECISION keywords are a synonym for the FLOAT keyword FLOAT n The FLOAT data type stores double precision floating point numbers with up to 17 significant digits FLOAT corresponds to IEEE 4 byte floating point and to the double data type in C The range of values for the FLOAT data type is
223. data the retrieval time is significantly reduced and performance is improved See also interquery parallelization Acronym for Internetwork Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It refers to the NetWare network protocol by Novell Acronym for Indexed Sequential Access Method This allows you to find infor mation in a specific order or to find specific items of information quickly through an index See also access method Operating system or file access error Acronym for the International Standards Organization ISO sets worldwide standards for the computer industry including standards for character input and manipulation code sets and SQL syntax A code set that contains 256 single byte characters Characters 0 through 127 are the ASCII characters Characters 128 through 255 are mostly non English characters from European languages for example and 6 When multiple users attempt to access common data the level of indepen dence specifically relating to the locking strategy for read only SQL requests The various levels of isolation are distinguished primarily by the length of time that shared locks are or can be acquired and held You can set the iso lation level with the SET ISOLATION or SET TRANSACTION statement A cursor function that is written in an external language such as C or Java A query result in which rows differ in the number and type of columns they contain because the query applies to more than one
224. data specified in that request ISM_MAXLOGSIZE Set the ISM_MAXLOGSIZE environment variable in the Informix Storage Manager ISM server environment to specify the size threshold of the ISM activity log ISM_MAXLOGSIZE _ size _ size specifies the size threshold in megabytes of the activity log If ISM_MAXLOGSIZE is not set then the default size limit is 1 megabyte If ISM_MAXLOGSIZE is set to a NULL value then the threshold is 0 bytes 3 76 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference ISM_MAXLOGVERS ISM_MAXLOGVERS Set the ISM_MAXLOGVERS environment variable in the Informix Storage Manager ISM server environment to specify the maximum number of activity log files to be preserved by the ISM server setenv _ ISM_MAXLOGVERS value specifies the number of files to be preserved If ISM_MAXLOGVERS is not set then the default number of files is four If the setting is a NULL value then the ISM server preserves no activity log files JAR_TEMP_PATH Set the JAR_TEMP_PATH variable to specify a non default local file system location where jar management procedures such as install_jar and replace_jar can store temporary jar files of the Java virtual machine setenv JAR_ TEMP_ PATH pathname pathname specifies a local directory for temporary jar files This directory must have read and write permissio
225. database servers support the following simple large object data types BYTE Stores binary data For more detailed information about this data type see the description on page 2 11 TEXT Stores text data For more detailed information about this data type see the description on page 2 44 Unlike smart large objects simple large objects do not support random access to the data When you transfer a simple large object between a client appli cation and the database server you must transfer the entire BYTE or TEXT value If the data does not fit into memory you must store it in an operating system file and then retrieve it from that file The database server stores simple large objects in blobspaces A blobspace is a logical storage area that contains one or more chunks that only store BYTE and TEXT data For information on how to define blobspaces see your Administrator s Guide Data Types 2 49 Large Object Data Types Smart Large Objects Smart large objects are a category of large objects that support random access to the data and are generally recoverable The random access feature allows you to seek and read through the smart large object as if it were an operating system file Smart large objects are also useful for opaque data types with large storage requirements See the description of opaque data types in OPAQUE Data Types on page 2 61 Dynamic Server supports the following smart large object data types
226. de to SQL Reference XPS SN SN XS N88 SS IDS Restrictions SS SUS NNN NNN NL LN SQL APIs UNIX only SOL APIs UNIX only None None None ESQL C only ESQL C only UNIX only None None HPL only HPL only HPL only None None None UNIX only None UNIX only UNIX only Page 3 79 3 79 3 80 3 80 3 81 3 82 3 83 3 83 3 84 3 85 3 87 3 87 3 88 3 89 3 89 GLS 3 91 3 92 3 92 3 93 4 of 5 Environment Variables Environment Variable XPS IDS Restrictions Page TERMINFO Y vY UNIX only 3 94 THREADLIB ESQL C 3 94 UNIX only XFER_CONFIG Vv None 3 95 5 of 5 Tip You might encounter references to environment variables that are not listed in Figure 3 1 Most likely these environment variables are not supported in this release or are used to maintain backward compatibility with certain earlier product versions For information refer to an earlier version of your Informix documentation Environment Variables Sections that follow discuss environment variables that Informix products use Important The descriptions of the following environment variables include the syntax for setting the environment variable on UNIX For a general description of how to set these environment variables on Windows see Setting Environment Variables for Native Windows Applications on page 3 13 and Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities on
227. default program is usually Ip Enter the following command to set the DBPRINT environment variable to specify myprint as the print program setenv DBPRINT myprint DBREM OTECMD Set the DBREMOTECMD environment variable to override the default remote shell to perform remote tape operations with the database server You can set DBREMOTECMD to a simple command or to a full pathname setenv DBREMOTECMD command ES pathname command is a command to override the default remote shell pathname is a pathname to override the default remote shell If you do not specify the full pathname the database server searches your PATH for the specified command Informix highly recommends use of the full pathname syntax on interactive UNIX platforms to avoid problems with similarly named programs in other directories and possible confusion with the restricted shell usr bin rsh The following command sets DBREMOTECMD for a simple command name setenv DBREMOTECMD remd The next command to set DBREMOTECMD specifies a full pathname setenv DBREMOTECMD usr bin remsh For more information on DBREMOTECMD see the discussion in your Archive and Backup Guide about how to use remote tape devices with your database server for archives restores and logical log backups Environment Variables 3 45 DBSPACETEMP setenv DBSPACETEM P The DBSPACETEMP environment variable specifies the dbspaces in which temporary
228. demo and superstores_demo Databases Glossary Index Table of Contents ix Introduction In This Introduction About This Manual Types of Users Software Dependencies Assumptions About Your Locale Demonstration Database New Features in Dynamic Server Version 9 3 SQL Enhancements Documentation Conventions Typographical Conventions Icon Conventions Comment Icons Feature Product and Platform Icons Compliance Icons Syntax Conventions Sample Code Conventions Additional Documentation Related Reading Compliance with Industry Standards Informix Welcomes Your Comments COO CO o NN nw gI JI A BW Q ha e ap a a gt N 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference In This Introduction This introduction provides an overview of the information in this manual and describes the conventions it uses About This Manual This manual includes information about system catalog tables data types and environment variables that Informix products use It also includes a glossary that contains definitions of common terms found in Informix documentation and a description of the demonstration databases that Version 9 3 of Informix Dynamic Server 2000 and Version 8 3 of Informix Extended Parallel Server provide This manual is one of a series of manuals that discusses the Informix imple mentation of SQL The Informix Guide to SQL Syntax contains all the syntax descriptions for SQL a
229. dex that is obtained at the beginning of a transaction and held until the end of the transaction The process of keeping records of transactions See also logical log The method by which constraints are checked during transactions You use the SET statement to specify whether constraints are checked at the end of each data manipulation statement or after the transaction is committed A mechanism that resides in the database It specifies that when a particular action insert delete or update occurs on a particular table the database server should automatically perform one or more additional actions See row 52 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference two phase commit type constructor type hierarchy type inheritance type substitutability typed collection variable typed table UDA UDR UDT unbuffered disk 1 0 Uncommitted Read uncorrelated subquery A protocol that ensures that transactions are uniformly committed or rolled back across multiple database servers It governs the order in which commit transactions are performed and provides a recovery mechanism in case a transaction does not execute See also heterogeneous commit An SQL keyword that indicates to the database server the type of complex data to create for example LIST MULTISET ROW SET A relationship that you define among named row types in which subtypes inherit representation data fields and behavior routines from supertypes and c
230. e 1 of 3 System Catalog Tables 1 43 SYSFRAGMENTS Column Type indexname VARCHAR 128 IDS CHAR 18 XPS colno INTEGER partn INTEGER strategy CHAR 1 location CHAR 1 servername VARCHAR 128 IDS CHAR 18 XPS evalpos INTEGER exprtext TEXT exprbin BYTE exprarr BYTE flags INTEGER 1 44 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Explanation Name of index Identifying code of TEXT or BYTE column XPS Identifying code of replica identifier XPS Identifying code of physical location Code for type of fragment distribution strategy R Round robin fragmentation strategy E Expression based fragmentation strategy I IN DBSPACE clause specifies a specific location as part of fragmentation strategy T Table based fragmentation strategy H Hash based fragmentation strategy XPS Reserved for future use shows L for local Reserved for future use Position of fragment in the fragmentation list Expression for fragmentation strategy IDS Contains names of the columns that are hashed and composite information for hybrid fragmentation strategies shows hashed columns followed by the fragmentation expression of the dbslice XPS Binary version of expression Range partitioning data to optimize expression in range expression fragmentation strategy Used internally IDS Bitmap indicating a hybrid fragmentation strategy value 0x00000010 Also an additional flag value 0x00000020 is set on
231. e If you do not set DBMONEY then MONEY values for the default locale U S English are formatted with a dollar sign that precedes the MONEY value a period that separates the integral from the fractional part of the MONEY value and no back symbol For example 100 50 is formatted as 100 50 Suppose you want to represent MONEY values as DM deutsche mark units using the currency symbol DM and comma as the decimal separator Enter the following command to set the DBMONEY environment variable setenv DBMONEY DM Here bm is the front currency symbol that precedes the MONEY value and a comma separates the integral from the fractional part of the MONEY value As a result the value 100 50 is displayed as DM100 50 For more information about how DBMONEY formats MONEY values in nondefault locales see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Environment Variables 3 39 DBNLS DBNLS The DBNLS environment variable specifies whether automatic data type conversion is supported between NCHAR and NVARCHAR database columns and CHAR and VARCHAR variables respectively of the client systems Global Language Support GLS does not require the DBNLS environment variable But Dynamic Server databases continue to support the legacy behavior of DBNLS which is useful in applications for databases that include tables with NCHAR or NVARCHAR columns setenv For UNIX systems that use the C shell the following command line
232. e One row exists for each column that is defined in a table or view Column Type Explanation colname VARCHAR 128 IDS Column name CHAR 18 XPS tabid INTEGER Identifying code of table containing the column colno SMALLINT Column number The system sequentially assigns this from left to right within each table coltype SMALLINT Code indicating the data type of the column 0 CHAR 13 VARCHAR 1 SMALLINT 14 INTERVAL 2 INTEGER 15 NCHAR 3 FLOAT 16 NVARCHAR 4 SMALLFLOAT 17 INT8 5 DECIMAL 18 SERIAL8 6 SERIAL 19 SET 7 DATE 20 MULTISET 8 MONEY 21 LIST 9 NULL 22 Unnamed ROW 10 DATETIME 40 Variable length 11 BYTE opaque type 12 TEXT 4118 Named ROW collength SMALLINT Column length in bytes colmin INTEGER Minimum column length in bytes colmax INTEGER Maximum column length in bytes extended_id INTEGER Data type code from the sysxtdtypes table of the data type IDS only specified in the coltype column In DB Access an offset value of 256 is always added to these coltype codes because DB Access sets SERIAL and SERIAL8 columns to NOT null XPS Extended Parallel Server does not support the following data types INT8 SERIAL8 SET MULTISET LIST unnamed and named ROW System Catalog Tables 1 29 SYSCOLUMNS A composite index on tabid and colno allows only unique values The coltype codes listed on the previous page can be incremented by bitmaps showing the following features
233. e the data type DECIMAL 5 3 requires 4 bytes of storage 9 2 rounded down equals 4 2 22 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Distinct There is one caveat to these formulas The maximum number of bytes the database server uses to store a decimal value is 17 One byte is used to store the exponent and sign leaving 16 bytes to store up to 32 digits of precision If you specify a precision of 32 and an odd scale however you lose 1 digit of precision Consider for example the data type DECIMAL 32 31 This decimal is defined as 1 digit to the left of the decimal and 31 digits to the right The 1 digit to the left of the decimal requires 1 byte of storage This leaves only 15 bytes of storage for the digits to the right of the decimal The 15 bytes can accommodate only 30 digits so 1 digit of precision is lost Distinct A distinct type is a data type that is derived from one of the following source types called the base type A built in type An existing distinct type An existing named row type An existing opaque type A DISTINCT type inherits from its source type the length and alignment on the disk A DISTINCT type thus makes efficient use of the preexisting functionality of the database server When you create a DISTINCT data type the database server automatically creates two explicit casts one cast from the DISTINCT type to its source type and one cast from the source type to the DISTINCT type A DISTINCT type base
234. e 1 43 sysindexes system catalog table 1 46 sysindices system catalog table 1 48 sysinherits system catalog table 1 50 syslangauth system catalog table 1 50 syslogmap system catalog table 1 51 sysmaster database 1 6 initialization 3 69 A BC D E F GH versus system catalog tables 1 6 sysnewdepend system catalog table 1 51 sysobjstate system catalog table 1 52 sysopclasses system catalog table 1 53 sysopclstr system catalog table 1 54 sysprocauth system catalog table 1 56 sysprocbody system catalog table 1 57 sysprocedures system catalog table 1 58 sysprocplan system catalog table 1 62 sysreferences system catalog table 1 63 sysrepository system catalog table 1 64 sysroleauth system catalog table 1 65 sysroutinelangs system catalog table 1 65 syssynonyms system catalog table 1 66 syssyntable system catalog table 1 66 systabamdata system catalog table 1 67 systabauth system catalog table 1 68 systables system catalog table 1 69 System administrator DBA 1 6 System applet 3 15 System catalog sysaggregates 1 17 sysams 1 18 sysattrtypes 1 21 sysblobs 1 22 syscasts 1 23 syschecks 1 24 syscheckudrdep 1 25 syscolattribs 1 26 syscolauth 1 27 syscoldepend 1 28 syscolumns 1 29 sysconstraints 1 34 sysdefaults 1 35 JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvY ze sysdepend 1 37 sysdistrib 1 37 sysdomains 1 39 syserrors 1 39 sysextcols 1 40 sysextdfiles 1 41 sysexternal 1 41 sysfragauth 1 42 sysfragments 1 43 sysindexes 1 46 sysindic
235. e 3 70 shared memory communication segments 3 69 stacksize for client session 3 71 CLIENT_LOCALE environment variable 3 33 CLOB data type casting not available 2 15 code set conversion 2 15 collation 2 15 coltype code 1 31 description 2 14 inserting data 2 15 multibyte characters 2 15 syscolattribs data 1 26 CLOSE statement 3 83 Clustering 1 19 1 45 1 48 Code set ASCH 1 41 collation order 2 47 JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvY ze conversion 3 96 East Asian 2 14 2 47 3 52 EBCDIC 1 41 1 86 ISO 8859 1 1 39 Code set ISO 8859 1 5 Code sample conventions for 11 Collation CHAR data type 2 12 2 13 CLOB data type 2 15 GL_COLLATE table 1 71 NCHAR data type 2 34 server_attribute data 1 86 TEXT data type 2 45 VARCHAR data type 2 47 Collection data type casting matrix 2 69 description 2 59 LIST 2 29 MULTISET 2 32 SET 2 41 sysattrtypes data 1 21 sysxtddesc data 1 78 sysxtdtypes data 1 78 1 79 Colon cast operator 2 66 DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 pathname separator 3 79 Color and intensity screen attributes 3 72 Column changing data type 2 6 2 62 constraints sysconstraints 1 34 default values sysdefaults 1 35 hashed 1 44 in sales_demo database B 3 to B 6 in stores_demo database A 2 to A 8 in superstores_demo database B 8 to B 22 inserting BLOB data 2 10 range of values 1 33 referential constraints sysreferences 1 63 syscolumns data 1 29 Column level privileges systabauth data 1 10 systabaut
236. e CREATE DATABASE or START DATABASE state ment to make a database ANSI compliant A term that describes a monitor that can display only one color Acronym for massively parallel processing system 32 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference multibyte character multiplexed connection MULTISET multithreading named row type national character native character Native Language Support NLS NLS node A character that might require from two to four bytes of storage If a language contains more than 256 characters the code set must contain multibyte char acters With a multibyte code set an application cannot assume that one char acter requires only one byte of storage See also single byte character A single network connection between a database server and a client applica tion that handled multiple database connections from the client A collection data type created with the MULTISET constructor in which elements are not ordered and duplicates are allowed Running of multiple threads within the same process See thread A row type created with the CREATE ROW TYPE statement that has a defined name and inheritance properties and can be used to construct a typed table A named row type is not equivalent to another named row type even if its field definitions are the same In the context of Native Language Support NLS a character in a native lan guage character set Also known as native character See nat
237. e Global Language Support GLS A legacy acronym for Informix GLS An API of C routines that a C language external routine can use to access Informix GLS locales This API also includes functions that obtain culture specific collation and time date number and currency formats and functions that provide a uniform way of accessing character data regardless of whether the locale supports single byte characters or multibyte characters See system defined hash fragmentation A user defined algorithm that maps each row in a table to a set of hash values and that is used to determine the fragment in which a row is stored 24 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference header file help message heterogeneous commit hierarchy high availability High Performance Loader highlight hold cursor home page host variable HPL hybrid fragmentation A source file that contains declarations for variables constants and macros that a particular group of modules or programs share Online text displayed automatically or at the request of the user to assist the user in interactive programs Such messages are stored in help files A protocol governing a group of database servers of which at least one is a gateway participant It ensures the all or nothing basis of distributed transactions in a heterogeneous environment See also two phase commit A tree like data structure in which some groups of data are subordinate to others
238. e administrative listener port must be established m The network protocol that the specified database server uses m The host name of the system where the specified database server resides You cannot use the imcadmin tool unless IMCADMIN is set to a valid database server name For more information about using IMCADMIN refer to Guide to Informix MaxConnect Environment Variables 3 61 IMCCONFIG 3 62 setenv setenv IMCCONFIG The IMCCONFIG environment variable specifies a nondefault filename and optionally a pathname for the MaxConnect configuration file On UNIX systems that support the C shell this variable can be set by the following command IMCCONFIG 1 pathname pathname is a full pathname or a simple filename When the setting is a filename that is not qualified by a full pathname MaxConnect searches for the specified file in the INFORMIXDIR etc directory Thus if you set IMCCONFIG to IMCconfig imc2 MaxConnect searches for INFORMIXDIR etc IMCconfig imce2 as its configuration file If the IMCCONFIG environment variable is not set MaxConnect searches by default for INFORMIXDIR etc IMCconfig as its configuration file IMCSERVER The IMCSERVER environment variable specifies the name of a database server entry in the sqlhosts file that contains information on connectivity The database server can be either local or remote On UNIX systems that support the C shell the IMCSERVER environment variable
239. e data warehousing environment and works in conjunction with the stores_demo database The scripts for the sales_demo database create new tables and add extra rows to the items and orders tables of stores_demo Dimensional Model of the sales_ demo Database Product Dimension product code product name vendor vendor name product line Fact Table Sales product code product line name time code district code Geography Dimension district code district state state name region B 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference customer code revenue cost units sold net profit To create the sales_demo database you must first create the stores_demo database with the logging option Once you create the stores_demo database you can execute the scripts that create and load the sales_demo database from DB Access The files are named createdw sql and loaddw sq l Dimensional Model of the sales_demo Database Figure B 1 gives an overview of the tables in the sales_demo database Figure B 1 Time The sales_demo Dimension Dimensional Data time code Model order date month code month name quarter code quarter name year Customer Dimension customer code customer name company name For information on how to create and populate the sales_demo database see the DB Access User s Manual For information on how to design and implement dim
240. e precision floating point numbers 2 43 corresponding to the float data type in C 2 of 3 DataTypes 2 7 Summary of Data Types Data Type SMALLINT TEXT VARCHAR m r Explanation Page Stores whole numbers from 32 767 to 32 767 2 43 Stores any kind of text data up to 231 bytes in length 2 44 Stores character strings of varying length up to 255 2 46 bytes collation is in code set order 3 of 3 For the character data types CHAR CHAR VARYING NCHAR NVARCHAR and VARCHAR a data string can include letters digits punctuation whitespace diacritical marks ligatures and other printable symbols from the code set of the database locale For some East Asian locales multibyte characters are supported within data strings Dynamic Server also supports the data types that Figure 2 3 lists This chapter describes each of these data types 2 8 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Figure 2 3 Additional Data Types That Dynamic Server Supports Data Type Explanation Page BLOB Stores binary data in random access chunks 2 9 BOOLEAN Stores Boolean values true and false 2 10 CLOB Stores text data in random access chunks 2 14 Distinct Stores data in a user defined type that has the same 2 23 format as a source type on which it is based but whose functions and casts can differ from those on the source type INT8 Stores 8 byte integer values in range 2 1 to 26 4 2 25 LIST e Stores a sequentially ordered collection
241. e same address SHMBASE as the database server 2 Attach beyond the database server segments 3 Attach at the address specified in PLOAD_SHMBASE Tip Informix recommends that you let the HPL decide where to attach and that you set PLOAD_SHMBASE only if necessary to avoid shared memory collisions between onpload and the database server For more information see the Guide to the High Performance Loader IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference PSORT_DBTEMP PSORT_DBTEMP The PSORT_DBTEMP environment variable specifies a directory or directories where the database server writes the temporary files it uses when it performs a sort The database server uses the directory that PSORT_DBTEMP specifies even if the environment variable PSORT_NPROCS is not set pathname is the name of the UNIX directory used for intermediate writes during a sort To set the PSORT_DBTEMP environment variable to specify the directory for example usr leif tempsort enter the following command setenv PSORT_DBTEMP usr leif tempsort For maximum performance specify directories that reside in file systems on different disks You might also want to consider setting the environment variable DBSPACETEMP to place temporary files used in sorting in dbspaces rather than operating system files See the discussion of the DBSPACETEMP environment variable in DBSPACETEMP on page 3 46 For additional information about the PSORT_DBTEMP environment
242. e set when users perform inserts or updates on the birthdate column the check constraint expression is interpreted according to the setting at the time when the check constraint was defined or was last modified Database objects created on some earlier versions of Dynamic Server do not support the priority of creation time settings For legacy objects to acquire this feature 1 Drop the objects 2 Re create them or for fragmentation expressions detach them and then reattach them After the objects are redefined date literals within expressions of the objects will be interpreted according to the environment at the time when the object was created or was last modified Otherwise their behavior will depend on the runtime environment and might become inconsistent if this changes Administration of a database that includes a mix of legacy objects and new objects might become difficult because of differences between the new and the old behavior for evaluating date expressions To avoid this Informix recommends that you redefine any legacy objects Environment Variables 3 31 DBDATE setenv GLS The value of DBCENTURY and the current date are not the only factors that determine how the database server interprets DATE and DATETIME values The DBDATE DBTIME GL_DATE and GL_DATETIME environment variables can also influence how dates are interpreted For information about GL_DATE and GL_DATETIME see
243. e system catalog tables It also discusses the Information Schema which provides information about the tables views and columns on the current database server Objects That the System Catalog Tables Track The system catalog tables track the following categories of objects Tables views sequences and synonyms Columns constraints and indexes Triggers Procedures functions routines and associated messages Authorized users and privileges associated with database objects Data types and casts Aggregate functions Access methods and operator classes Inheritance relationships System Catalog Tables 1 5 Using the System Catalog 1 6 Using the System Catalog Informix database servers automatically generate the system catalog tables when you create a database You can query them as you would query any other table in the database The system catalog tables for a newly created database reside in a common area of the disk called a dbspace Every database has its own system catalog tables All tables in the system catalog have the prefix sys for example the systables system catalog table Not all tables with the prefix sys are true system catalog tables For example a common DataBlade module builds a sysbuiltintypes table that looks like a system table and contains similar data and the syscdr database supports the Enterprise Replication feature These tables however have a tabid gt 99 System catalog tables all
244. e that represents a span of time INTERVAL types are divided into two classes year month intervals and day time intervals A year month interval can represent a span of years and months and a day time interval can represent a span of days hours minutes seconds and fractions of a second An INTERVAL value is always composed of one value or a contiguous sequence of values that represents time units Within a data definition statement such as CREATE TABLE or ALTER TABLE that defines the precision of an INTERVAL data type the qualifiers must have the following format INTERVAL largest_qualifier n TO smallest_qualifier Here the largest_qualifier and smallest_qualifier keywords are taken from one of the two INTERVAL classes as shown in Figure 2 8 on page 2 26 If SECOND or a larger time unit is the largest_qualifier the declaration of an INTERVAL data type can optionally specify n the precision of the largest time unit for n ranging from 1 to 9 this is not a feature of DATETIME data types If smallest_qualifier is FRACTION you can also specify a scale in the range from 1 to 5 For FRACTION TO FRACTION qualifiers the upper limit of n is 5 rather than 9 There are two incommensurable classes of INTERVAL data types m Those with a smallest_qualifier larger than DAY m Those with a largest_qualifier smaller than MONTH 2 26 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference INTERVAL Figure 2 8 Interval Classes Interval Class Time Uni
245. e that you have enough memory Default Values for Ordinary Sorts If the PSORT_NPROCS environment variable is set the database server uses the specified number of sort threads as an upper limit for ordinary sorts If PSORT_NPROCS is not set parallel sorting does not take place The database server uses one thread for the sort If PSORT_NPROCS is set to 0 the database server uses three threads for the sort Default Values for Attached Indexes The default number of threads is different for attached indexes If the PSORT_NPROCS environment variable is set you get the specified number of sort threads for each fragment of the index that is being built 3 90 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference UNIX SHLIB_PATH If PSORT_NPROCS is not set or if it is set to 0 you get two sort threads for each fragment of the index unless you have a single CPU virtual processor If you have a single CPU virtual processor you get one sort thread for each fragment of the index For additional information about the PSORT_NPROCS environment variable see your Administrator s Guide and your Performance Guide SHLIB_PATH The SHLIB_PATH environment variable tells the shell on HP UX systems which directories to search for dynamic link libraries for the INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Driver You must specify the full pathname for the directory where you installed the product setenv SHLIB_PATH PATH ae ser pathname specifies the sea
246. e the DB Access User s Manual For information on how to work with object relational databases see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation For information on the stores_demo database on which superstores_demo is based see Appendix A Structure of the superstores_demo Tables The superstores_demo database includes the following tables Although many tables have the same name as stores_demo tables they are different The tables are listed alphabetically not in the order in which they are created m call_type m catalog m cust_calls m customer a retail_customer new a whlsale_customer new m items m location new a location_non_us new a location_us new manufact orders region new sales_rep new state stock stock_discount new units new The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 7 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables B 8 This section lists the names data types and descriptions of the columns for each table in the superstores_demo database The unique identifying value for each table primary key is shaded and indicated by a key Q _l symbol Columns that represent extended data types are discussed in User Defined Routines and Extended Data Types on page B 22 Primary foreign key relationships between the tables are outlined in Referential Relationships on page B 25 The call_type Table The call codes associated with customer calls are stor
247. echnology such as dynamic SQL A set of specifications that vendors and users can use to build portable software Any vendor that carries the XPG brand on a given software product is guaranteeing that the software correctly implements the X Open Common Applications Environment CAE specifications There are CAE specifications for SOL XA ISAM RDA and so on A data representation that uses the low order four bits of each byte to desig nate a decimal digit 0 through 9 and the high order four bits to designate the sign of the digit Glossary 57 A BCD EF GH I JK L MN OPQRS TUVW X Y ze Index Numerics 9 3 features overview 6 A Abbreviated year values 2 19 3 28 3 31 3 33 3 50 ACCESS keyword 1 18 2 50 Access method B tree 1 21 1 47 3 53 built in 1 18 1 21 primary 1 19 1 67 R tree 3 53 secondary 1 18 1 34 1 49 2 34 sysams data 1 18 sysindices data 1 49 sysopclasses data 1 53 systabamdata data 1 67 Access privilege See Privilege Activity log files 3 77 AC_CONFIG environment variable 3 24 ac_config std file 3 24 Addition operator 2 52 2 70 Administrative listener port 3 61 AFCRASH configuration parameter 3 24 AFDEBUG environment variable 3 24 Aggregate function built in 2 30 2 33 2 42 no BYTE argument 2 11 no collection arguments 2 30 2 33 2 42 no TEXT argument 2 44 sysaggregates data 1 17 user defined UDA 1 17 AIX operating system 3 79 Alias of a table 1 9 Alignment of data t
248. ecified by the FRAGMENT BY clause and storage option specified by the IN clause of the CREATE INDEX or ALTER FRAGMENT ON INDEX statement differ from the distribution scheme of the underlying table Index pages reside in separate dbspaces from the cor responding data pages Compare with attached index A list of I O devices See also component A data structure sometimes called sqlda that stores diagnostic information about an executed SQL statement A special table that holds information about the integrity violations caused by each row in a violations table You use the START VIOLATIONS TABLE statement to create violations tables and diagnostics tables and associate them with a base table An Informix isolation level set with the SET ISOLATION statement that disre gards locks and allows viewing of any existing rows even rows that cur rently can be altered from inside an uncommitted transaction Dirty Read is the lowest level of isolation no isolation at all and is thus the most efficient See also Read Uncommitted Glossary 17 disabled mode disk configuration disk 1 0 display label distinct data type distributed query distribution distribution scheme DLL DML dominant table DRDA DSS duplicate index dynamic link library DLL The object mode in which a database object is disabled When a constraint index or trigger is in the disabled mode the database server acts as if the object does not
249. ed in the call_type table Figure B 7 shows the columns of the call_type table Figure B 7 The call_type Table Name Type Description call_code CHAR 1 Call code codel_descr CHAR 30 Description of call code The catalog Table The catalog table describes each item in stock Retail stores use this table when placing orders with the distributor Figure B 8 shows the columns of the catalog table Figure B 8 The catalog Table Name Type Description catalog num SERIAL 1001 System generated catalog number stock_num SMALLINT Distributor stock number foreign key to stock table manu_code CHAR 3 Manufacturer code foreign key to stock table 1 of 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference EL Name unit advert advert_descr Type CHAR 4 ROW picture BLOB caption LVARCHAR CLOB The cust_calls Table Structure of the superstores_demo Tables Description Unit by which item is ordered foreign key to stock table Picture of item and caption Tag line underneath picture 2 of 2 All customer calls for information on orders shipments or complaints are logged The cust_calls table contains information about these types of customer calls Figure B 9 shows the columns of the cust_calls table Name customer_num call_dtime user_id call_code call_descr res_dtime res_descr Type INTEGER DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE CHAR 18 CHAR 1 CHAR 240 DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE CHAR 240
250. ed in the query See also distributed query subordinate servers and remote servers A subquery or inner SELECT that depends on a value produced by the outer SELECT statement that contains it Also a nested subquery whose WHERE clause refers to an attribute of a relation that is declared in an outer SELECT Correlated subqueries reference one or more columns from one or more tables of a parent query and need to be evaluated once for each row in the parent query See also independent subquery and subquery The prefix used with a column name in a triggered action to refer to an old before triggering statement or a new after triggering statement column value The associated column must be in the triggering table See also trigger A database whose tables or indexes contain incomplete inconsistent or invalid data 12 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference corrupted index coserver current row cross server query cursor cursor function cursor manipulation statements Cursor Stability data access statements data definition statements An index that does not correspond exactly to the data in its table The functional equivalent of a database server that operates on a single node See also connection coserver and participating coserver The most recently retrieved row of the active set of a query See distributed query In SQL an identifier associated with a group of rows or with a collection data type Conc
251. ed to as a big remainder page A connection that requires a network A routine in a databases of a remote server See subordinate server See subordinate server In a distributed query a table in a database of a server that is not the local database server See also coordinating server subordinate server An Informix and ANSI level of isolation available with the Informix SET ISOLATION statement or the ANSI compliant SET TRANSACTION statement which ensures that all data values read during a transaction are not modified during the entire transaction Transactions under ANSI Repeatable Read are also known as Serializable Informix Repeatable Read is the default level of isolation for ANSI compliant databases See also isolation and Serializable The first 12 pages of the initial chunk of the root dbspace Each reserved page stores specific control and tracking information that the database server uses A word in a statement or command that you cannot use in any other context of the language or program without receiving a warning or error message See recover a database Glossary 41 role role separation roll back root dbspace root node root supertype rootslice round robin fragmentation routine routine modifier routine overloading routine resolution routine signature A classification or work task such as payroll that the DBA assigns Assign ment of roles makes management of privileges convenient
252. ee your Performance Guide 3 58 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference IFX_LONGID is IFX_LONGID The IFX_LONGID environment variable setting and the version number of the client application determine whether a given client application is capable of handling long identifiers Older versions of Informix databases restricted SQL identifiers to 18 or fewer bytes long identifiers can have up to 128 bytes Valid IFX_LONGID values are 1 and 0 setenv IFX_LONGID Di 1 Ti 0 1 Client supports long identifiers 0 Client cannot support long identifiers When IFX_LONGID is set to zero applications display only the first 18 bytes of long identifiers without indicating by that truncation has occurred If IFX_LONGID is unset or is set to a value other than 1 or 0 the determination is based on the internal version of the client application If the version is not less than 9 0304 the client is considered capable of handling long identifiers Otherwise the client application is considered incapable The IFX_LONGID setting overrides the internal version of the client appli cation If the client cannot handle long identifiers despite a newer version number set IFX_LONGID to 0 If the client version can handle long identifiers despite an older version number set IFX_LONGID to 1 If you set IFX_LONGID on the client the setting affects only that client If you bring up the database server with IFX_LONGID set all clien
253. eference Determining Which Cast to Apply 2 2 1 a 2 67 Casts for Distinct Types Piso id ak 2268 What Extended Data Types Can Ba Cast Be eh eae EN e Operator Precedence 2 2 2 a we ee 2 70 DataTypes 2 3 2 4 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference In This Chapter Every column in a table in a database is assigned a data type The data type precisely defines the kinds of values that you can store in that column This chapter built in and extended data types casting between two data types and operator precedence Summary of Data Types Figure 2 1 shows the logical categories of data types that Informix database servers support The shaded categories are for Dynamic Server only Figure 2 1 Overview of Supported Data Types Data types Built in data types Extended data types Numeric Large object a Character Time Complex data types User defined data types Collection Row Opaque Distinct DataTypes 2 5 Summary of Data Types 2 6 Built in data types which are system defined and extended data types which you can define share the following characteristics You can Use them to create columns within database tables Declare them as arguments and as return types of routines Use them as base types from which to create DISTINCT types Cast the
254. elimited identifiers are case sensitive Io use delimited identifiers applica tions in ESQL C must setDELIMIDENT at compile time and at runtime Warning If DELIMIDENT is not already set you should be aware that setting it can cause the failure of existing sql scripts or client applications that use double quotation marks in contexts other than delimiting SQL identifiers such as delimiters of string literals You must use single rather than double quotation marks for delimited constructs that are not SQL identifiers if DELIMIDENT is set On UNIX systems that use the C shell and on which DELIMIDENT has been set you can disable this feature which causes anything between double quotes to be interpreted as an SQL identifier by the command unsetenv DELIMIDENT ENVIGNORE The ENVIGNORE environment variable can deactivate specified environment variable settings in the common shared and private environment configuration files informix rc and informix respectively variable is the name of an environment variable to be deactivated Use colon symbols between consecutive variable names For example to ignore the DBPATH and DBMONEY entries in the environment configuration files enter the following command setenv ENVIGNORE DBPATH DBMONEY 3 54 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference FET_BUF_SIZE The common environment configuration file is stored in INFORMIXDIR etc informix rc The private environment
255. elization indicator for UDR t parallelizable f not parallelizable Name of cost function for UDR Selectivity constant for UDR 2 of 2 SYSPROCEDURES In the mode column the R mode is a special case of the O mode A routine is in restricted R mode if it was created with a specified owner that is different from the routine creator If routine statements involving a remote database are executed the database server uses the permissions of the user that executes the routine instead of the permissions of the routine owner In all other scenarios R mode routines behave the same as O mode routines You cannot use the DROP FUNCTION DROP ROUTINE or DROP PROCEDURE statements to delete a protected routine Protected routines are indicated by lowercase in the mode column In earlier versions protected SPL routines which cannot be deleted were indicated by a p Starting with Version 9 0 protected SPL routines are treated as DBA routines and cannot be Owner routines Thus D and 0 indicate DBA and Owner routines and d and o indicate protected DBA and protected Owner routines A database server can create protected stored routines for internal use These protected stored procedures have p in the mode column You cannot modify drop or display protected stored procedures Important After a SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION is done all owner routines created while using the new identity are given a restricted mode
256. en the scope is restricted to the current session if you set it in the shell or to the individual user Important This has no effect on existing tables If you specify ROW as the lock mode the database will use this to restore recover or copy data For tables that were created in PAGE mode this might cause lock table overflow or performance degradation Environment Variables 3 57 IFX_DIRECTIVES setenv IFX_DIRECTIVES The IFX_DIRECTIVES environment variable setting determines whether the optimizer allows query optimization directives from within a query The IFX_DIRECTIVES environment variable is set on the client You can use either ON and OFF or 1 and 0 to set the environment variable IFX_DIRECTIVES ON Optimizer directives accepted OFF Optimizer directives not accepted 1 Optimizer directives accepted 0 Optimizer directives not accepted The setting of the IFX_DIRECTIVES environment variable overrides the value of the DIRECTIVES configuration parameter that is set for the database server If the IFX_DIRECTIVES environment variable is not set however then all client sessions will inherit the database server configuration for directives that the ONCONFIG parameter DIRECTIVES determines The default setting for the IFX_DIRECTIVES environment variable is on For more information about the DIRECTIVES parameter see the Adminis trator s Reference For more information on the performance impact of directives s
257. enables client applications such as DB Access Informix SQL Informix 4GL Dynamic 4GL and embedded SQL applications such as ESQL C or ESQL COBOL to convert automatically between CHAR and VARCHAR variables of the client application and NCHAR and NVARCHAR columns of the database setenv DBNLS 1 This setting also supports the automatic conversion of values retrieved from NCHAR columns into CHAR variables and the conversion of NVARCHAR column values into VARCHAR variables Similarly when DBNLS 1 character strings stored as CHAR variables can be inserted into NCHAR columns and character strings stored as VARCHAR variables can be inserted into NVARCHAR database columns To support these features DBNLS must also be set to 1 on the client system This setting also enables the client system to display dates numbers and currency values in formats specified on the client locale 3 40 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv DBONPLOAD Conversely each of the following command lines disables automatic conversion between CHAR and VARCHAR variables of the client application and NCHAR and NVARCHAR columns of the database and also prevents Dynamic Server from using the locale files of the client system setenv DBNLS unsetenv DBNLS On UNIX systems that use the C shell either of these commands disables automatic conversion to and from NCHAR and NVARCHAR data values by setting no value for DBNLS Another possible setting for
258. encoded histogram in fixed length character field S encdat has user defined statistics 2 of 2 Information is stored in the sysdistrib table when an UPDATE STATISTICS statement with mode MEDIUM or HIGH is executed for a table UPDATE STATISTICS LOW does not insert a value into the mode column Only user informix can select the encdat column Each row in the sysdistrib system catalog table is keyed by the tabid and colno for which the statistics are collected For built in data type columns the type field is set to A The encdat column stores an ASCII encoded histogram that is broken down into multiple rows each of which contains 256 bytes For columns of user defined data types the type field is set to S The encdat column stores the statistics collected by the statcollect user defined routine in multirepresentational form Only one row is stored for each tabid and colno pair A composite index on the tabid colno and seqno columns requires unique combinations of values 1 38 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSDOMAINS SYSDOM AINS The sysdomains table is a view on other system catalog tables The sysdomains table has the following columns Column Type Explanation id SERIAL Unique code identifying the domain owner CHAR 32 Name of the owner of the domain name VARCHAR 128 Name of the domain type SMALLINT Code identifying the type of domain There is no index on this table SYSERRORS The syse
259. ency so a view based on three tables has three rows The sysdepend table has the following columns Column Type Explanation btabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the base table or view btype CHAR 1 Base object type T Table V View dtabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying a dependent table or view dtype CHAR 1 Code for the type of dependent object currently only view V View is implemented The btabid and dtabid columns are indexed and allow duplicate values SYSDISTRIB The sysdistrib system catalog table stores data distribution information for the database server to use Data distributions provide detailed table column information to the optimizer to improve the choice of execution paths of SELECT statements The sysdistrib table has the following columns Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the table where data values were gathered colno SMALLINT Column number in the source table seqno INTEGER Sequence number for multiple entries constructed DATE Date when the data distribution was created 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 37 SYSDISTRIB Column Type Explanation mode CHAR 1 Optimization level M Medium H High resolution SMALL Specified in the UPDATE STATISTICS FLOAT statement confidence SMALL Specified in the UPDATE STATISTICS FLOAT statement encdat STAT IDS Statistics information CHAR 256 XPS type IDS only CHAR 1 Type of statistics A encdat has ASCII
260. ensional databases see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation For information on the stores_demo database see Appendix A Structure of the sales_demo Tables Structure of the sales_demo Tables The sales_demo database includes the following tables m customer m geography m product m sales m time The tables are listed alphabetically not in the order in which they are created The customer geography product and time tables are the dimensions for the sales fact table The sales_demo database is not ANSI compliant The following sections describe the column names data types and column descriptions for each table A SERIAL field serves as the primary key for the district_code column of the geography table However the primary and foreign key relationships that exist between the fact sales table and its dimension tables are not defined because data loading performance improves dramatically when the database server does not enforce constraint checking The customer Table The customer table contains information about sales customers Figure B 2 shows the columns of the customer table Figure B 2 The customer Table Name Type Description customer_code INTEGER Customer code customer_name CHAR 31 Customer name company_name CHAR 20 Company name The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 3 Structure of the sales_demo Tables B 4 The geography Table The geography table contains informa
261. ent variable 3 75 ISM_ENCRYPTION environment variable 3 76 ISM_MAXLOGSIZE environment variable 3 76 ISM_MAXLOGVERS environment variable 3 77 ISO 8859 1 code set 5 1 86 Isolation level 1 86 3 81 items table in stores_demo database A 4 items table in superstores_demo database B 13 Iterator function 1 17 1 60 J Japanese eras 3 52 Jar management procedures 3 77 JAR_TEMP_PATH environment variable 3 77 Java virtual machine JVM 3 24 3 77 3 78 JAVA_COMPILER environment variable 3 78 JIT compiler 3 78 Join columns A 8 B 25 Join methods 3 81 Join operations 1 13 3 47 A BC D E F GH JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE environment variable 3 78 K KEEP ACCESS TIME keywords ALTER TABLE statement 2 50 CREATE TABLE statement 2 50 Key foreign A 10 B 3 generalized 1 51 1 64 primary 1 34 1 63 1 77 A 10 B 8 Key scan 1 19 Key tables 3 67 Keyboard I O INFORMIXTERM setting 3 72 TERM setting 3 92 TERMCAP setting 3 93 TERMINFO setting 3 94 keytab file 3 67 Korn shell 3 9 L Language C 1 65 3 25 3 63 CLIENT_LOCALE setting 3 13 3 33 C 3 66 DBLANG setting 3 37 Extensible Markup Language XML 2 14 Hypertext Markup Language HTML 2 14 Informix ESQL C 2 51 2 60 3 94 Java 3 24 3 77 3 78 sql_languages information schema view 1 84 Stored Procedure Language SPL 2 60 3 31 3 34 syslangauth data 1 50 sysroutinelangs data 1 65 See also Locale Large object data type description 2 48 listed 2 48 L
262. ent variable 3 65 INFORMIXSERVER environment variable 3 68 Connectivity information 3 61 3 70 Constraint check creation time value 3 34 loading performance B 3 syschecks data 1 24 syscheckudrdep data 1 25 syscoldepend data 1 28 column sysconstraints data 1 34 not null collection data types 2 30 2 33 2 42 2 59 syscoldepend data 1 28 syscolumns data 1 30 sysconstraints data 1 34 object mode 1 52 primary key sysconstraints data 1 34 sysreferences data 1 63 unique SERIAL values 2 39 unique SERIAL8 values 2 40 referential stores_demo data A 10 superstores_demo data B 25 4 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference sysconstraints data 1 34 sysreferences data 1 63 table sysconstraints data 1 34 unique sysconstraints data 1 34 violations 1 77 Constructor 2 42 2 60 Contact information 15 Converting data types CHAR and NCHAR 3 40 DATE and DATETIME 2 65 INTEGER and DATE 2 65 number and string 2 64 number to number 2 64 retyping a column 2 62 VARCHAR and NVARCHAR 3 40 Coserver sysexternal data 1 42 sysviolations data 1 77 COSERVER configuration parameter 3 69 3 81 CPFIRST environment variable 3 25 CREATE ACCESS METHOD statement 1 18 CREATE CAST statement 1 23 2 66 CREATE DATABASE statement 3 42 CREATE DISTINCT TYPE statement 1 79 2 24 B 22 CREATE EXTERNAL TABLE statement 1 40 1 41 CREATE IMPLICIT CAST statement B 22 CREATE INDEX statement 1 46 1 48 1 51 1 64 1 71 3 53 CREATE OPAQUE TYPE statement 2 35 CRE
263. eptually the pointer to the current row or collection element You can use cursors for SELECT statements or EXECUTE PROCEDURE statements associating the cursor with the rows returned by a query or INSERT state ments associating the cursor with a buffer to insert multiple rows as a group A select cursor is declared for sequential only regular cursor or non sequential scroll cursor retrieval of rows In addition you can declare a select cursor for update initiating locking control for updated and deleted rows or WITH HOLD so that completing the current transaction does not close the cursor In ESQL C a cursor can be dynamic meaning that it can be referenced by an identifier or by a character variable A user defined routine UDR that returns one or more rows of data and there fore requires a cursor to execute An SPL routine is a cursor function when its RETURN statement contains the WITH RESUME keywords An external func tion is a cursor function when it is defined as an iterator function Compare with noncursor function The SQL statements that control cursors specifically the CLOSE DECLARE FETCH FLUSH OPEN and PUT statements An Informix level of isolation available through the SET ISOLATION state ment in which the database server must secure a shared lock on a fetched row before the row can be viewed The database server retains the lock until it receives a request to fetch a new row See also isolation The subset
264. er data type to another you occasionally find rounding errors The following table indicates which numeric data type conversions are acceptable and what kinds of errors you can encounter when you convert between certain numeric data types Target Type gt SMALLINT INTEGER INT8 SMALLFLOAT FLOAT DECIMAL SMALLINT OK OK OK OK OK OK INTEGER E OK OK E OK P INT8 E E OK D E P SM ALLFLOAT E E E OK OK P FLOAT E E E D OK P DECIMAL E E E D D P Legend OK No error P An error can occur depending on the precision of the DECIMAL E An error can occur depending on the data value D No error but less significant digits might be lost For example if you convert a FLOAT value to DECIMAL 4 2 your database server rounds off the floating point numbers before storing them as decimal numbers This conversion can result in an error depending on the precision assigned to the DECIMAL column Converting Between Number and CHAR You can convert a CHAR or NCHAR column to a numeric column However if the CHAR or NCHAR column contains any characters that are not valid in a number column for example the letter instead of the number 1 your database server returns an error You can also convert a numeric column to a character column However if the character column is not large enough to receive the number the database server generates an error IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Using Built in Casts If the database server genera
265. eract with the desktop This is the default value Setting INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF to 1 allows an SPL routine that does not interact with the desktop to execute more quickly This setting also allows the database server to simultaneously call a greater number of SYSTEM commands because the command no longer depends on a limited operating system resource Desktop and WindowStation handles If INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF is 1 and an SPL routine attempts to interact with the desktop for example with a program such as notepad exe or cmd exe the routine fails unless the user is a member of the Administrators group ISM_COM PRESSION Set the ISM_COMPRESSION environment variable in the ON Bar environment to specify whether the Informix Storage Manager ISM should use data compression setenv _ ISM_COMPRESSION a TRUE T FALSE 3 74 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv setenv ISM_DEBUG_ FILE If ISM_COMPRESSION is set to TRUE in the environment of the ON Bar process that makes a request the ISM server uses a data compression algorithm to store or retrieve the data specified in that request If ISM_COMPRESSION is set to FALSE or is not set the ISM server does not use compression ISM_DEBUG_FILE Set the ISM_DEBUG_FILE environment variable in the Informix Storage Manager server environment to specify where to write XBSA messages ISM_DEBUG_FILE pathname
266. ers typically alphanumeric that is manipulated as a single unit A string might consist of a word such as Smith a set of digits representing a number such as 19543 or any other collection of characters Strings generally are delimited by single quotes String is also a character data type available in Informix ESQL C programs in which the character string is stripped of trailing blanks and is null terminated Any database server in a distributed query that did not initiate the query Sometimes called remote server See also coordinating server See outer join A query that is embedded as part of another SQL statement For example an INSERT statement can contain a subquery in which a SELECT statement sup plies the inserted values in place of a VALUES clause an UPDATE statement can contain a subquery in which a SELECT statement supplies the updating values or a SELECT statement can contain a subquery in which a second SELECT statement supplies the qualifying conditions of a WHERE clause for the first SELECT statement Parentheses always delimit a subquery unless you are referring to a CREATE VIEW statement or unions Subqueries are always parallelized See also correlated subquery and independent subquery A subscript is an integer valued offset into an array Subscripts can be used to indicate the start or end position in a character data type variable A portion of a character string A typed table that inherits pr
267. erver does not automati cally update the related statistical data in the system catalog For example if you delete one or more rows ina table with the DELETE statement the nrows column in the systables system catalog table which holds the number of rows for that table is not updated automatically The UPDATE STATISTICS statement causes the database server to recalculate data in the systables sysdistrib syscolumns and sysindexes sysindices for Dynamic Server system catalog tables After you run UPDATE STATISTICS the systables system catalog table holds the correct value in the nrows column If you specify MEDIUM or HIGH mode with the UPDATE STATISTICS statement the sysdistrib system catalog table holds the updated data distri bution data after you run UPDATE STATISTICS Whenever you modify a table extensively use the UPDATE STATISTICS statement to update data in the system catalog For more information on the UPDATE STATISTICS statement see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax System Catalog Tables 1 13 Structure of the System Catalog Structure of the System Catalog The following system catalog tables describe the structure of an Informix database Here Y indicates that IDS or XPS supports the table System Catalog Table XPS IDS Page sysaggregates Vv 1 17 sysams Vv 1 18 sysattrtypes Vv 1 21 sysblobs Vv Vv 1 22 syscasts Vv 1 23 syschecks Vv Vv 1 24 syscheckudrdep Vv 1 25 syscolattribs Vv 1 26 syscolauth Vv Vv 1 27 s
268. erver interprets quoted strings as LVARCHAR data types The LVARCHAR data type is also used for input and output casts for opaque data types The LVARCHAR data type stores opaque data types in the string external format Each opaque type has an input support function and cast which convert it from LVARCHAR to a form that database servers can manip ulate Each opaque type also has an output support function and cast which convert it from its internal representation to LVARCHAR Important When LVARCHAR data is stored in a table column the value is limited to 2 kilobytes 2Kb When LVARCHAR is used in I O operations on an opaque type the size is limited only by the operating system The LVARCHAR data type supports only a subset of the string operations that you can perform on CHAR and VARCHAR data types LVARCHAR is implemented as an opaque UDT For more information about LVARCHAR see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types MONEY p s The MONEY data type stores currency amounts Like the DECIMAL p s data type MONEY can store fixed point numbers up to a maximum of 32 signif icant digits where p is the total number of significant digits the precision and s is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point the scale Unlike the DECIMAL data type the MONEY data type is always treated as a fixed point decimal number The database server defines the data type MONEY p as DECIMAL p 2 If the precision
269. es character set 3 54 sysblobs data 1 22 Boldface type 7 BOOLEAN data type coltype code 1 31 description 2 10 Boolean expression with BOOLEAN data type 2 11 with BYTE data type 2 11 with TEXT data type 2 44 Borland C compiler 3 63 Bourne shell 3 9 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze Bracket symbols 2 12 2 45 B tree access method 1 21 1 47 3 53 Buffer BYTE or TEXT storage DBBLOBBUF 3 28 fetch buffer FET_BUFFER_SIZE 3 55 floating point display DBFLTMASK 3 36 network buffer IFX_NETBUF_SIZE 3 60 private network buffer pool 3 60 Built in access method 1 18 1 21 Built in aggregates 1 17 2 30 2 33 2 42 Built in casts 1 23 2 63 Built in data types casts 2 63 2 69 listed 2 48 syscolumns coltype code 1 29 sysdistrib type code 1 38 sysxtdtypes data 1 79 BY keyword 2 11 2 44 BYTE data type casting to BLOB 2 12 description 2 11 increasing buffer size 3 28 inserting values 2 11 restrictions in Boolean expression 2 11 systables npused 1 71 with GROUP BY 2 11 with LIKE or MATCHES 2 11 with ORDER BY 2 11 selecting from BYTE columns 2 12 setting buffer size 3 28 sysblobs data 1 22 syscolumns data 1 33 sysfragments data 1 43 sysopclstr data 1 54 B tree index 1 45 C C compiler default name 3 63 INFORMIXC setting 3 63 thread package 3 94 C shell 3 9 cshrc file 3 9 login file 3 9 call_type table in stores_demo database A 7 call_type table in superstores_demo
270. es 1 48 sysinherits 1 50 syslangauth 1 50 syslogmap 1 51 sysnewdepend 1 51 sysobjstate 1 52 sysopclasses 1 53 sysopclstr 1 54 sysprocauth 1 56 sysprocbody 1 57 sysprocedures 1 58 sysprocplan 1 62 sysreferences 1 63 sysrepository 1 64 sysroleauth 1 65 sysroutinelangs 1 65 syssynonyms 1 66 syssyntable 1 66 systabamdata 1 67 systabauth 1 68 systables 1 69 systraceclasses 1 72 systracemsgs 1 73 systrigbody 1 74 systriggers 1 75 sysusers 1 76 sysviews 1 76 sysviolations 1 77 sysxtddesc 1 78 sysxtdtypeauth 1 78 sysxtdtypes 1 79 System catalog tables access methods 1 18 1 67 accessing 1 12 altering contents 1 12 authorization identifiers 1 76 casts 1 23 columns 1 29 complex data types 1 21 1 79 constraint violations 1 77 constraints 1 24 1 28 1 34 data distributions 1 37 database tables 1 69 default values 1 35 dependencies 1 37 1 51 description 1 5 example syscolauth 1 10 syscolumns 1 8 sysindexes 1 11 systabauth 1 10 systables 1 7 external tables 1 40 1 41 1 42 fragmentation 1 42 1 43 indexes 1 46 1 48 1 64 inheritance 1 50 list of tables 1 14 messages 1 39 1 73 operator classes 1 53 optical clusters 1 54 privileges 1 27 1 42 1 68 1 76 1 78 programming languages 1 50 1 65 referential constraints 1 34 1 63 1 77 roles 1 65 routines 1 56 1 57 1 58 1 62 sequences 1 69 simple large objects 1 22 smart large objects 1 26 synonyms 1 66 1 67 trace classes 1 72 trace messages 1 73 triggers 1 74
271. es E Sete Me Sogn OS DBTIME 00 en og me ge oe Sl ee Ge Be Se Se we ge ee de AS IDDBUPSPACE a a ga Boge e a er ew BED DEFAULT_ATTACH 2 2 2 we ee 39 53 DELIMIDENT W gagas S aigar G 8 58 ENVIGNORE we bokte aacr ot e de 9 54 FET BUF SIZE S o oeral caca a as e e 999 IFMX_SMLTBL_BROADCAST_SIZE 3 56 IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE 3 56 IFX_DIRECTIVES a a eee 39 58 IFX_LLONGID 2 3 59 IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE 3 60 IFX_NETBUF_SIZE 2 4 3 60 TEX SUPDDESCis carrizo ok A er a A ch a A Bs ky wt Ge OL IMCADMIN 2 2 2 ee 39 61 IMCCONFIG 2 2 ww ee 39 62 3 2 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference lt A VN Fa lt tH vA FORMIXC i FORMIXCONCSMCFG FORMIXCONRETRY FORMIXCONTIME FORMIXCPPMAP FORMIXDIR FORMIXKEYTAB FORMIXOPCACHE FORMIXSERVER FORMIXSHMBASE FORMIXSQOLHOSTS FORMIXSTACKSIZE FORMIXTERM F_ROLE_SEP pi oy TERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF ISM_COMPRESSION ISM_DEBUG_FILE ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL ISM_ENCRYPTION ISM_MAXLOGSIZE ISM_MAXLOGVERS JAR_TEMP_PATH JAVA_COMPILER JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE LD_LIBRARY_PATH LIBPATH NODEFDAC ONCONFIG OPTCOMPIND OPTMSG OPTOFC OPT_GOAL PATH PDOPRIORITY PLCONHIG H H H ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ans B ans B ans B aes B ans B aas B R 2 A a A a i an 3 62 3 63 3 63 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 6
272. escription Identifies information that is specific to external routines that is UDRs written in either C or Java language S Identifies information that relates to the Informix Global GL Language Support GLS feature Identifies information or syntax that is specific to Informix Dynamic Server Identifies information that is specific to UDRs written in Java Java Identifies information that is specific to the UNIX operating system Identifies information that applies to all Windows Windows environments Identifies information or syntax that is specific to Informix Extended Parallel Server 2 of 2 These icons can apply to a row ina table one or more paragraphs or an entire section A symbol indicates the end of the feature specific product specific or platform specific information Compliance Icons Compliance icons indicate paragraphs that provide guidelines for complying with a standard Icon Description ANSI Identifies information that is specific to an ANSI compliant database XO Identifies functionality that conforms to X Open Identifies information that is an Informix extension to ANSI SQL 92 entry level standard SQL Introduction 9 Syntax Conventions These icons can apply to an entire section or to one or more paragraphs within a section If an icon appears next to a section heading the compliance information ends at the next heading at the same or higher le
273. ew is completely visible to all users 1 86 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Data Types In This Chapter mide ds wow ce aoe a CA ew Boe 2D Summary of Data Types gt 4 ue e a ase aja ae bh 2 ES EJ eee E A eA BLOB Sa ER A BOOLEAN e 210 BYTE ee fo ae wo ee e a er e a AQT CHAR n 2 2 ee 212 CHARACTER n both cm A dra ce aod Ace aoa 2 LA CHARACTER VARYING m A GLOB sv vera aS a AA A a A e A oe DLA DATE pae ao ees a se a a ETE DATETIME ssl ee e he A a ts ZA DEC tt oot Pht Sh rd A o a Boa hoe Ob ae he S2 DECIMAL oh ie et PO Se A Ete Ao Oe ee ERA Distinct fee ck en Gk Uk 2 Gh kee ok ee 228 DOUBLE PRECISION sha Ga eee ce Oy Gee okey de gy Wee ee ee FLOAT n a 224 INT i IEA Me E a a ee as A ee BEDS INT Ses Hoh Ae ga ra e Wate a Go Ba ee DDS INTEGERS 28 2 62 he ee oe ey ech oe Soe ee M220 INTERVAL a ee ee eee 2 26 LISO a eee e ye See A ee ee D ce Oa se ee ED IVARGHAR 2 22 22 ha 32 So ee So AWA A ZAR MONEY PS tay foes See cw e e ee WO wad ye A we 12581 MULTISET e a ee eee ee 2 82 NCHAR n 2 2 ee ee 234 NUMERIC p s 6 we ee ee 2 34 NVARCHAR mr o 284 Opaque e 284 REA bne gi ot hee Sh AOA On Gh Spite SA ade i He ia te 2285 Row Named 2 a 235 Row Unnamed a 2 37 SERIAL Qi cee Se de Ee ee hee a oe ee ee 2 89 SERIALS 3 oe We a Poe oe eee a a 240 SETE 8 e as S a git eas Gs whe ae ey ee cae Ge AT SMALLFLOAT a 248 SM
274. ewing Your Environment Variable Settings Checking Environment Variables with the chkenv Utility Rules of Precedence Using Environment Variables on Windows Setting Environment Variables for Native Windows Applications Setting Environment Variables for od Prompt Utilities Rules of Precedence List of Environment Variables Environment Variables AC_CONFIG AFDEBUG CPFIRST DBACCNOIGN DBANSIWARN DBBLOBBUF DBCENTURY DBDATE DBDELIMITER DBEDIT DBFLTMASK DBLANG DBMONEY DBNLS DBONPLOAD DBPATH DBPRINT DBREMOTECMD 3 5 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 8 3 9 3 9 3 10 3 10 3 11 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 13 3 15 3 18 3 18 3 23 3 24 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 28 3 32 3 35 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 40 3 41 3 42 3 44 3 45 Table of Contents vii viii DBSPACETEMP DBTEMP DBTIME DBUPSPACE DEFAULT_ATTACH DELIMIDENT ENVIGNORE FET_BUF_SIZE IFMX_SMLTBL BROADCAST SIZE IFX_DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE IFX_DIRECTIVES IFX_LONGID IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_ SIZE IFX_NETBUF_SIZE IFX_UPDDESC IMCADMIN IMCCONHIG IMCSERVER INFORMIXC INFORMIXCONCSMCFG INFORMIXCONRETRY INFORMIXCONTIME INFORMIXCPPMAP INFORMIXDIR NFORMIXKEYTAB NFORMIXOPCACHE NFORMIXSERVER FORMIXSHMBASE FORMIXSOLHOSTS FORMIXSTACKSIZE ORMIXTERM NF_ROLE_SEP NTERACTIVE_DESKTOP _ OFF ISM_COMPRESSION ISM_DEBUG_FILE ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL ISM_ENCRYPTION ISM_MAXLOGSIZE ISM_MAXLOGVERS N N N NF
275. example a SECOND TO FRACTION value is subtracted from a MINUTE TO FRACTION value INTERVAL 100 30 0005 MINUTE 3 TO FRACTION 4 INTERVAL 120 01 SECOND 3 TO FRACTION Result INTERVAL 98 29 9905 MINUTE TO FRACTION 4 The use of numeric qualifiers alerts the database server that the MINUTE and FRACTION in the first value and the SECOND in the second value exceed the default number of digits 2 56 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Extended Data Types When you add or subtract INTERVAL values the second value cannot have a field with greater precision than the first The second INTERVAL however can have a field of smaller precision than the first For example the second INTERVAL can be HOUR TO SECOND when the first is DAY TO HOUR The additional fields in this case MINUTE and SECOND in the second INTERVAL value are ignored in the calculation Multiplying or Dividing INTERVAL Values You can multiply or divide INTERVAL values by a number Any remainder from the calculation is ignored however and the result is truncated to the precision of the INTERVAL The following expression multiplies an INTERVAL value by a literal number that has a fractional part INTERVAL 15 30 0002 MINUTE TO FRACTION 4 2 5 Result INTERVAL 38 45 0005 MINUTE TO FRACTION 4 In this example 15 2 5 37 5 minutes 30 2 5 75 seconds and 2 2 5 5 fraction 4 The 0 5 minute is converted into 30 seconds and 60 seconds are con
276. exist and does not take it into consideration during the execu tion of data manipulation statements The organization of data on a disk also refers to the process of preparing a disk to store data The process of transferring data between memory and disk The I O refers to input output A temporary name for a column or expression in a query A data type that you declare with the CREATE DISTINCT TYPE statement A distinct data type has the same internal storage representation as its source type an existing opaque data type built in data type named row type or distinct data type but a different name and can have different casts and routines To compare a distinct data type with its source type requires an explicit cast A distinct data type inherits all routines that are defined on its source type A query that accesses data from a database other than the current database See data distribution See table fragmentation See dynamic link library DLL Acronym for data manipulation language See also data manipulation state ments See outer join Acronym for Distributed Relational Database Architecture DRDA is an IBM defined set of protocols that software manufacturers can follow to develop connectivity solutions between heterogeneous relational database management environments Acronym for Decision Support System See also decision support application An index that allows duplicate values in the indexed column A sha
277. expanded to 4 digits accord ing to the setting of the DBCENTURY environment variable If DBCENTURY is not set then the string 19 is used by default for the first two digits is replaced by the year as a four digit decimal number User must enter a four digit value is replaced by to allow in the format string For example consider how to convert a DATETIME YEAR TO SECOND to the following ASCII string format Mar 21 2001 at 16 h 30 m 28 s Set DBTIME as the following command line for the C shell shows setenv DBTIME Sb d SY at SH h M m S s IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DBTIME The default DBTIME produces the conventional ANSI SQL string format that the following line shows 2001 03 21 16 30 28 You can set the default DBTIME as the following example shows setenv DBTIME SY sm d H M S An optional field width and precision specification w p can immediately follow the percent character It is interpreted as follows w Specifies the minimum field width The value is right justified with spaces on the left wW Specifies the minimum field width The value is left justified with spaces on the right Ow Specifies the minimum field width The value is right justified and padded with zeros on the left p Specifies the number of digits to appear for d H I m M S y and y time unit values or the maximum number of characters to use in b and B month names The following limitations appl
278. fers to BLOB and CLOB data types Use CLOB data types see page 2 14 for random access to text data For general information about BLOB and CLOB data types see Smart Large Objects on page 2 50 Data Types 2 9 BOOLEAN You can use the following SQL functions to perform some operations on a BLOB column m FILETOBLOB copies a file into a BLOB column m LOTOFILE copies a BLOB or CLOB value into an operating system file m LOCOPY copies an existing smart large object to a new smart large object For more information on these SQL functions see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax No casts exist for BLOB data Therefore the database server cannot convert data of type BLOB to any other data type Within SQL you are limited to the equality comparison operation for BLOB data To perform additional operations you must use one of the application programming interfaces APIs from within your client application You can insert data into BLOB columns in the following ways With the dbload or onload utilities With the LOAD statement DB Access With the FILETOBLOB function From BLOB ifx_lo_t host variables Informix ESQL C If you select a BLOB column using DB Access only the string lt SBlob value gt is returned no actual value is displayed BOOLEAN The BOOLEAN data type stores true false data as a single byte The following table shows internal and literal representations of the BOOLEAN data type Logic
279. ffer from the default U S English format in the leading or trailing currency symbol thousands separator and decimal separator depending on what the locale files specify For more information on locale dependency see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality MULTISET e The MULTISET data type is a collection type that stores non unique elements it allows duplicate element values The elements in a MULTISET have no ordinal position That is there is no concept of a first second or third element in a MULTISET For a collection type with ordinal positions for elements see the LIST data type on page 2 29 All elements in a MULTISET have the same element type To specify the element type use the following syntax MULTISET element_type NOT NULL 2 32 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Named Row The element_type of a collection can be any of the following types A built in type except SERIAL SERIAL8 BYTE and TEXT An unnamed or a named row type Another collection type An opaque type You must specify the NOT NULL constraint for MULTISET elements No other constraints are valid for MULTISET columns For more information on the syntax of the MULTISET collection type see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax You can use MULTISET anywhere that you use any other data type unless otherwise indicated For example m After the IN predicate in the WHERE clause of a SELECT statement to search for matching MULTISET values
280. ficiency of the database operations Also known as data partitioning Table fragmentation methods also known as distribution schemes include expression based hybrid range round robin and system defined hash A relationship you can define among typed tables in which subtables inherit the behavior constraints triggers storage options from supertables Subtables can add additional constraint definitions storage options and triggers The property that allows a typed table to inherit the behavior constraints storage options triggers from a typed table above it in the table hierarchy The underlying base table that a violations table and diagnostics table are associated with You use the START VIOLATIONS TABLE statement to create the association between the target table and the violations and diagnostics tables The logical collection of extents that are assigned to a table It contains all the disk space that is allocated to a given table or table fragment and includes pages allocated to data and to indexes pages that store TEXT or BYTE data in the dbspace and bitmap pages that track page use within the extents The specific name of a particular standard transport layer protocol TCP and network layer protocol IP A popular network protocol used in DOS UNIX and other environments Glossary 51 temporary TEXT thread TU trace transaction transaction lock transaction logging transaction mode trigger
281. field the largest and smallest fields are the same Data Types 2 27 INTERVAL When you enter a value in an INTERVAL column you must specify the largest and smallest fields in the value just as you do for DATETIME values In addition you can optionally specify the precision of the first field and the scale of the last field if it is a FRACTION If the largest and smallest field qualifiers are both FRACTION you can specify only the scale in the last field Acceptable qualifiers for the largest and smallest fields are identical to the list of INTERVAL fields that Figure 2 8 on page 2 26 displays If you use the DB Access TABLE menu and you do not specify the INTERVAL field qualifiers the default INTERVAL qualifier YEAR TO YEAR is assigned The largest_qualifier in an INTERVAL value can be up to nine digits except for FRACTION which cannot be more than five digits but if the value that you want to enter is greater than the default number of digits allowed for that field you must explicitly identify the number of significant digits in the value that you enter For example to define an INTERVAL of DAY TO HOUR that can store up to 999 days you could specify it the following way INTERVAL DAY 3 TO HOUR INTERVAL literals use the same delimiters as DATETIME literals except that MONTH and DAY time units are not valid within the same INTERVAL value Figure 2 9 shows the INTERVAL delimiters Figure 2 9 INTERVAL Delimiters
282. for each order If an order includes several items the same order number appears in several rows of the items table In the items table the order_num column is a foreign key that references the order_num column in the orders table The items and stock Tables The items table and the stock table are joined by three columns the stock_num column which stores a stock number for an item the manu_code column which stores a code that identifies the manufacturer and the units column which identifies the types of unit in which the item can be ordered You need the stock number the manufacturer code and the units to uniquely identify an item The same stock number and manufacturer code can appear in more than one row of the items table if the same item belongs to separate orders In the items table the stock_num manu_code and unit columns are foreign keys that reference the stock_num manu_code and unit columns in the stock table The stock and catalog Tables The stock table and catalog table are joined by three columns the stock_num column which stores a stock number for an item the manu_code column which stores a code that identifies the manufacturer and the unit column which identifies the type of units in which the item can be ordered You need all three columns to uniquely identify an item In the catalog table the stock_num manu_code and unit columns are foreign keys that reference the stock_num manu_code and unit columns in
283. global pool and the private network buffer pool for each database server session setenv IFX_NETBUF_SIZE size size is an integer specifying the size in bytes for one network buffer The default size is 4 kilobytes 4 096 bytes The maximum size is 64 kilobytes 65 536 bytes and the minimum size is 512 bytes You can specify the value in hexadecimal or decimal form Tip You cannot set a different size for each session 3 60 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv setenv IFX_UPDDESC IFX_UPDDESC You must set the IFX_UPDDESC environment variable at execution time before you can do a DESCRIBE of an UPDATE statement IFX_UPDDESC Value value is any non NULL value A NULL value here meaning that IFX_UPDDESC is not set disables the DESCRIBE for UPDATE feature Any non NULL value enables the feature IMCADMIN The IMCADMIN environment variable supports the imcadmin adminis trative tool by specifying the name of a database server through which imcadmin can connect to MaxConnect For imcadmin to operate correctly you must set IMCADMIN before you use an Informix product IMCADMIN dbservername dbservername is the name of a database server Here dbservername must listed in the sqlhosts file on the computer where the MaxConnect runs MaxConnect uses this setting to obtain the following connectivity information from the sqlhosts file m Where th
284. h table 1 69 Combine function 1 17 Comment icons 8 Comment indicator 3 8 Comment lines 3 8 Committed read 1 86 Communications support module 3 63 3 68 Commutator function 1 60 Compiling ESQL C programs 3 25 INFORMIXC setting 3 63 JAVA_COMPILER setting 3 78 multithreaded ESQL C applications 3 94 Complex data type 2 58 to 2 61 collection types 2 59 ROW types 2 60 sysattrtypes data 1 21 Compliance ANSI ISO standard for SQL 1 80 3 27 icons 9 sql_languages conformance 1 84 with industry standards 15 XPG4 standard 1 83 X Open CAE standards 1 80 Composite index 1 47 Concatenation operator 2 70 concsm cfg file 3 63 Configuration file for communications support module 3 64 3 67 for connectivity 3 62 3 68 3 70 for database servers 3 54 3 80 for High Performance Loader 3 87 for MaxConnect 3 62 for ON Bar utility 3 24 for onxfer utility 3 95 for terminal I O 3 72 3 93 cshre file 3 9 informix 3 8 3 12 3 55 3 57 login file 3 9 profile file 3 9 Configuration parameter COSERVER 3 81 DBSPACETEMP 3 47 DEF_TABLE_LOCKMODE 3 57 DIRECTIVES 3 58 Index 3 ABCDEFGH I END 3 81 MITRACE_OFF 1 72 1 73 NODE 3 81 OPCACHEMAX 3 68 OPTCOMPIND 3 82 OPT_GOAL 3 84 STACKSIZE 3 71 SIMT_CACHE 3 92 USEOSTIME 2 20 CONNECT DEFAULT statement 3 69 Connect privilege 1 12 1 76 CONNECT statement 3 42 3 65 3 69 Connection authentication 3 67 coserver 3 69 INFORMIXCONRETRY environment variable 3 64 INFORMIXCONTIME environm
285. har 10 insert into mytab values 1 Tip VARCHAR treats C NULL binary 0 and string terminators as termination characters for nonprintable characters Multibyte Characters with VARCHAR In some East Asian locales VARCHAR data types can store multibyte characters if the database locale supports a multibyte code set If you store multibyte characters make sure to calculate the number of bytes needed For more information see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Collating VARCHAR Values The main difference between the NVARCHAR and the VARCHAR data types like the difference between CHAR and NCHAR is the difference in collation sequencing In general the collation order of VARCHAR values like CHAR values is the order of the characters as they appear in the code set DataTypes 2 47 Built In Data Types 2 48 An exception is the MATCHES operator which applies a localized collation order to both NVARCHAR and VARCHAR values as well as to CHAR and to NCHAR values when you use bracket symbols to specify ranges and the locale files define a non default collation order For more information see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Built In Data Types Informix database servers support the following built in data types Category Data Types Character CHAR CHARACTER VARYING LVARCHAR NCHAR NVARCHAR VARCHAR Numeric DECIMAL FLOAT INT8 INTEGER MONEY SERIAL SERIAL8 SMALLFLOAT SMALLINT Large o
286. have a tabid lt 99 See later in this section and SYSTABLES on page 1 69 for more information about tabid numbers that the database assigns to tables Tip Do not confuse the system catalog tables of a database with the tables in the sysmaster sysutils or sysuuid databases The names of tables in those databases also have the sys prefix but they contain information about an entire database server which might manage multiple databases Information in the sysmaster sysutils and sysuuid tables is primarily useful for database system administrators DBSAs For more information about these databases and their tables see the Administrator s Guide and Administrator s Reference The database server accesses the system catalog constantly Each time an SQL statement is processed the database server accesses the system catalog to determine system privileges add or verify table or column names and so on For example the following CREATE SCHEMA block adds the customer table with its respective indexes and privileges to the stores_demo database This block also adds a view california that restricts the view of the customer table to only the first and last names of the customer the company name and the telephone number for all customers who reside in California CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION maryl CREATE TABLE customer customer_num SERIAL 101 fname CHAR 15 lname CHAR 15 company CHAR 20 addressl CHAR 20 address2 C
287. he file but not their values Use chkenv to provide debugging information when you define in an environment configuration file all the environment variables that your Informix products use chkenv a ae filename pathname filename is the name of the environment configuration file to be debugged pathname is the full directory path in which the environment variable file is located Environment Variables 3 11 Rules of Precedence 3 12 File INFORMIXDIR etc informix rc is the shared environment configu ration file A private environment configuration file is stored as informix in the home directory of the user If you specify no pathname for chkenv the utility checks both the shared and private environment configuration files If you provide a pathname chkenv checks only the specified file Issue the following command to check the contents of the shared environment configuration file chkenv informix rc The chkenv utility returns an error message if it finds a bad environment variable name in the file or if the file is too large You can modify the file and rerun the utility to check the modified environment variable names Informix products ignore all lines in the environment configuration file starting at the point of the error if the chkenv utility returns the following message 33523 filename Bad environment variable on line number If you want the product to ignore specified environment variables i
288. he Administrator s Reference For more information on the different join methods that the optimizer uses see your Performance Guide OPTMSG Set the OPTMSG environment variable at runtime before you start an Informix ESQL C application to enable optimized message transfers message chaining for all SQL statements in an application You also can disable optimized message transfers for statements that require immediate replies for debugging or to ensure that the database server processes all messages before the application exits setenv OPTMSG 0 disables optimized message transfers 1 enables optimized message transfers and implements the feature for any subsequent connection The default value is 0 zero which explicitly disables message chaining When you set OPTMSG within an application you can activate or deactivate optimized message transfers for each connection or within each thread To enable optimized message transfers you must set OPTMSG before you establish a connection For more information about setting OPTMSG and defining related global variables see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual 3 82 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference OPTOFC OPTOFC Set the OPTOFC environment variable to enable optimize OPEN FETCH CLOSE functionality in an Informix ESQL C application that uses DECLARE and OPEN statements to execute a cursor The OPTOFC environment variable reduces the number of message requests
289. he TERMCAP environment variable the system file that is etc termcap is used by default Environment Variables 3 93 TERMINFO UNIX setenv UNIX setenv TERM INFO The TERMINFO environment variable is used for terminal handling The environment variable is supported only on platforms that provide full support for the terminfo libraries that System V and Solaris UNIX systems provide TERMINFO usr lib terminto TERMINFO tells DB Access to communicate with the terminfo directory instead of the termcap file The terminfo directory has subdirectories that contain files that pertain to terminals and their characteristics To set TERMINFO enter the following command setenv TERMINFO usr lib terminfo If you set the TERMINFO environment variable you must also set the INFORMIXTERM environment variable to terminfo THREADLIB Use the THREADLIB environment variable to compile multithreaded ESQL C applications A multithreaded ESQL C application lets you establish as many connections to one or more databases as there are threads These connections can remain active while the application program executes The THREADLIB environment variable indicates which thread package to use when you compile an application Currently only the Distributed Computing Environment DCE is supported THREADLIB DCE The THREADLIB environment variable is checked when the thread option is p
290. he constrid column is indexed and allows only unique values The primary column is indexed and allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 63 SYSREPOSITORY XPS SYSREPOSITORY The sysrepository system catalog table contains information about gener alized key indexes that is not available in the sysindexes system catalog table The sysrepository table has the following columns Column Type Explanation id1 CHAR 18 Index from the generalized key index id2 INTEGER Tabid of table with the generalized key index type INTEGER Integer classifying the type of object In this release the only value that can appear is 1 indicating a generalized key index type seqid SERIAL For future use Unrelated to syssequences seqid desc TEXT The CREATE statement of a generalized key index bin BYTE Internal representation of the generalized key index The contents of the sysrepository table are useful when a generalized key index has to be rebuilt during a recovery or if a user wants to see the CREATE statement for a specific generalized key index The contents of the sysrepository table are useful when a generalized key index has to be rebuilt during a recovery or if a user wants to see the CREATE statement for a specific generalized key index The desc column contains the CREATE statement for each generalized key index in the database An index on the seqid column allows duplicate values A composite index on the id1 id2 and type col
291. he database as it existed immedi ately before the failure The relationship between columns within a table or between tables also known as a parent child relationship Referencing columns are also known as foreign keys 40 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference registering relation relational database relational database server remainder page remote connection remote routine remote server remote table Repeatable Read reserved pages reserved word restore a database Ina database the process of storing information about a database object in the system catalog tables of a database Most SQL data definition statements per form some type of registration For example the CREATE FUNCTION and CREATE PROCEDURE statements register a user defined routine in a database See table A database that uses table structures to store data Data in a relational database is divided across tables in such a way that additions and modifica tions to the data can be made easily without loss of information A database server that manages data values that are stored in rows and col umns A page that accommodates subsequent bytes of a long data row If the trailing portion of a data row is less than a full page itis stored on a remainder page After the database server creates a remainder page for a long row it can use the remaining space in the page to store other rows Each full page that fol lows the home page is referr
292. he superstores_ demo Tables The sales_rep Table The sales_rep table contains information about the sales representatives for the distributor Figure B 20 shows the columns of the sales_rep table Figure B 20 The sales_rep Table Name Type Description rep_num SERIAL 101 System generated sales rep number name name_t Name of sales rep region_num INTEGER Region in which sales rep works foreign key to the region table home_office BOOLEAN Home office location of sales rep sales SET ROW month Amount of monthly sales for rep DATETIME YEAR TO MONTH amount MONEY NOT NULL commission percent Commission rate for sales rep The state Table The state table contains the names and postal abbreviations for the 50 states of the United States as well as sales tax information Figure B 21 shows the columns of the state table Figure B 21 The state Table Name Type Description code CHAR 2 State code sname CHAR 15 State name sales_tax percent State sales tax The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 19 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables B 20 The stock Table The stock table is a catalog of the items sold by the distributor Figure B 22 shows the columns of the stock table IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Figure B 22 The stock Table Name Type Description g u stock_num SMALLINT Stock number that identifies type of item g u manu_code CHAR 3 Manufacturer code foreign key to manufact g u unit CH
293. ht of the decimal point for DECIMAL and MONEY data types 0 for INTEGER and SMALLINT types Null for all other data types Number of digits in the fractional part of the seconds for DATE and DATETIME columns null otherwise This column is an Informix extension to XPG4 Indicates whether a column allows NULLs either YES or NO Reserved for future use 2 of 2 The sql_languages Information Schema View The sql_languages Information Schema view contains a row for each instance of conformance to standards that the current database server supports The sql_languages view contains the following columns IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Column Data Type Explanation source VARCHAR 254 Organization that defines this SQL version source_year VARCHAR 254 Year the source document was approved conformance VARCHAR 254 Standard to which the server conforms integrity VARCHAR 254 Indicates whether this is an integrity enhancement feature either YES or NO 1 of 2 Structure of the Information Schema Views Column Data Type Explanation implementation VARCHAR 254 Identifies the SOL product of the vendor binding_style VARCHAR 254 Direct module or other binding style programming lang VARCHAR 254 Host language for which binding style is adopted 2 of 2 The sql_languages view is completely visible to all users The server_info Information Schema View The server_info Information Schema view describes the d
294. iable of type DATETIME The CURRENT keyword The EXTEND function A DATETIME literal The database locale defines the default DATE and DATETIME formats For the default locale U S English these formats are mm dd yy for DATE values and yyyy mm dd hh MM ss for DATETIME values To represent DATE and DATETIME values as character strings the fields in the strings must be in proper order In other words when a DATE value is expected the string must be in DATE format and when a DATETIME value is expected the string must be in DATETIME format For example you can use the string 10 30 2001 as a DATE string but not as a DATETIME string Instead you must use 2001 10 30 or 99 10 30 as the DATETIME string In a nondefault locale literal DATE and DATETIME strings must match the formats that the locale defines For more information see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality You can customize the DATE format that the database server expects with the DBDATE and GL_DATE environment variables You can customize the DATETIME format that the database server expects with the DBTIME and GL_DATETIME environment variables For more information see DBDATE on page 3 32 and DBTIME on page 3 48 For more information on all these environment variables see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Data Types 2 55 Time Data Types You can also subtract one DATE value from another DATE value but the result
295. ies the location of the concsm cfg file that describes communications support modules INFORMIXCONCSMCFG _ pathname _ pathname specifies the full pathname of the concsm cfg file The following command specifies that the concsm cfg file is in usr myfiles setenv INFORMIXCONCSMCFG usr myfiles Environment Variables 3 63 INFORMIXCONRETRY 3 64 You can also specify a different name for the file The following example specifies a filename of csmconfig in the same directory setenv INFORMIXCONCSMCFG usr myfiles csmconfig The default location of the concsm cfg file is in INFORMIXDIR etc For more information about communications support modules and the contents of the concsm cfg file refer to the Administrator s Reference INFORM IXCONRETRY The INFORMIXCONRETRY environment variable specifies the maximum number of additional connection attempts that should be made to each database server by the client during the time limit that INFORMIXCONTIME specifies _ NFORMIXCONRETRY __ count count is the number of additional attempts to connect to each database server For example the following command sets INFORMIXCONRETRY to specify three additional connection attempts after the initial attempt setenv INFORMIXCONRETRY 3 The default value for INFORMIXCONRETRY is one retry after the initial connection attempt The INFORMIXCON
296. iguration file DBDATE DMY4 These are ESQL C environment variable settings INFORMIXC gcc CPFIRST TRUE You can use the ENVIGNORE environment variable described in ENVIGNORE on page 3 54 to override one or more entries in an environment configuration file Use the Informix chkenv utility described in Checking Environment Variables with the chkenv Utility on page 3 11 to perform a sanity check on the contents of an environment configuration file The chkenv utility returns an error message if the file contains a bad environment variable or if the file is too large 3 8 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Setting Environment Variables at Login Time The first time you set an environment variable in a shell file or environment configuration file you must tell the shell process to read your entry before you work with your Informix product If you use a C shell source the file if you use a Bourne or Korn shell use a period to execute the file Setting Environment Variables at Login Time Add the commands that set your environment variables to the appropriate login file For the C shell login or cshre For the Bourne shell or Korn shell profile Syntax for Setting Environment Variables Use standard UNIX commands to set environment variables The examples in the following table show how to set the ABCD environment variable to value for the C shell Bourne shell and Korn shell The Korn shell also s
297. ility 3 11 Rules of Precedence e aa A a A e 3 12 Using Environment Variables on Windows ES Setting Environment Variables for Native Windows Applications 3 13 Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities 3 15 Using the System Applet to Work with Environment Variables 3 15 Using the Command Prompt to Work with Environment Variables 3 16 Using dbservername cmd to Initialize a Command Prompt Environment s 1 e ee e 817 Rules of Precedence 2 2 2 8 18 List of Environment Variables 3 18 Environment Variables a a a a B23 AC CONFIGS ceo eh oe hk oR ae he Oe oe Oh Rs a B24 AEDEBUG gt eo acres es s a aoe oe AO e e OBR 3 24 A ot fete Eo og be Bb a a og oh ee me 218525 DBACCNOIGN 2 2 1 ee aaa 9 26 DBANSIWARN t a o eee 327 DBBLOBBUF 3 28 DBCENTURY 2 ee 39 28 DBDATE s aos Be ey a me we gw we ee BB DBDELIMITER 2 ee 8 88 DBEDIT ysi Aio o y eal gy a ny el A wae ee ODD DBFLTMASK aaa a 9 36 DBLANG rie Ge a a a a BBY DBMONEY 2 ee eee 938 DENES orak eh ee RO Bk y a a 30 DBONPEOAD 2 2 2 2 2 2 341 DBPATH oie Se cs Be A e as ce ee A eS AZ DBPRIN Ts 2 hom ph Se Ce BR ce a Ae Ce a hs se eo we A DBREMOTECMD ee 8 45 DBSPACETEMP ee ee ee 9 46 DBTEMBPS ita tate amp ae fod
298. in the sysconstraints system catalog table where the constrid column has the same value as the constraint_id column of syscheckudrdep A composite index on the udr_id and constraint_id columns requires that combinations of these values be unique System Catalog Tables 1 25 SYSCOLATTRIBS Column tabid colno extentsize flags flags1 sbspace 1 26 Type INTEGER SMALLINT INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER VARCHAR 128 SYSCOLATTRIBS The syscolattribs system catalog table describes the characteristics of smart large objects namely CLOB and BLOB data types It contains one row for each sbspace listed in the PUT clause of the CREATE TABLE statement Explanation Code uniquely identifying the table The syscolattribs table has the following columns Number of the column that contains the smart large object Pages in smart large object extent expressed in kilobytes Integer representation of the combination by addition of hexadecimal values of the following parameters LO_NOLOG 0x00000001 1 LO_LOG 0x00000010 2 LO_KEEP_LASTACCESS_TIME 0x00000100 4 LO_NOKEEP_LASTACCESS_TIME 0x00001000 8 HLINTEG 0x00010000 16 MODERATE_INTEG Not available at this time Reserved for future use Name of the sbspace IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The smart large object is not logged Logging of smart large objects conforms to current log mode of the database A record is kept of
299. ine identifier Throughout the system catalog a functions is identified by its routine identifier not by its name For Extended Parallel Server sysprocedures has the following columns Explanation Name of routine Name of owner IDS only Unique identifying code for the routine Mode type Dord DBA O or o Owner P or p Protected R or r Restricted Compiled size in bytes of values Compiled size in bytes of symbol table Compiled size in bytes of constant data Compiled size in bytes of routine instruction code Number of arguments to routine A composite index on procname and owner requires unique values SYSPROCEDURES For Dynamic Server sysprocedures has the following columns Column procname owner procid mode retsize symsize datasize codesize numargs isproc specificname externalname paramstyle langid paramtypes Type VARCHAR 128 CHAR 32 SERIAL CHAR 1 INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER CHAR 1 VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 255 CHAR 1 INTEGER RTNPARAM TYPES Explanation Name of routine Name of owner Unique identifying code for the routine Mode type Dord DBA O oro Owner P or p Protected R or r Restricted Compiled size in bytes of returned values Compiled size in bytes of symbol table Compiled size in bytes of constant data Compiled size in bytes of routine instruction code Number of arguments to routine
300. ing dbservername cmd to Initialize a Command Prompt Environment Each time that you open a Windows command prompt it acts as an independent environment Therefore environment variables that you set within it are valid only for that particular command prompt instance For example if you open one command window and set the variable INFORMIXDIR and then open another command window and type set to check your environment you will find that INFORMIXDIR is not set in the new command prompt session The database server installation program creates a batch file that you can use to configure command prompt utilities ensuring that your command prompt environment is initialized correctly each time that you run a command prompt session The batch file dbservername cmd is located in INFORMIXDIR and is a plain text file that you can modify with any text editor If you have more than one database server installed in INFORMIXDIR there will be more than one batch file with the cmd extension each bearing the name of the database server with which it is associated To run dbservername cmd from a command prompt type dbservername or configure a command prompt so that it runs dbservername cmd automati cally at start up Environment Variables 3 17 Rules of Precedence GLS 3 18 Rules of Precedence When an Informix product accesses an environment variable normally the following rules of precedence apply 1
301. ional character A feature that supports single byte code sets using NCHAR and NVARCHAR columns to store non English character strings This technology has been superseded on Dynamic Server by Global Language Support GLS See Native Language Support NLS In the context of an index for a database a node is an ordered group of key values having a fixed number of elements A key is a value from a data record A B tree for example is a set of nodes that contain keys and pointers arranged in a hierarchy See also branch node leaf node and root node In the context of a MPP system a node is an individual computer See also massively parallel processing system In the context of a SMP system a node can either be the entire SMP computer or a fully functioning subsystem that uses a portion of the hardware resources of that SMP system See also symmetric multiprocessing system Glossary 33 non ASCII character noncursor function nonvariant function not null constraint NULL object object mode object relational database OLTP online transaction processing application For Extended Parallel Server a node is an individual computer with one or more CPUs that runs a single instance of an operating system within a paral lel processing platform A node can be a uniprocessor a cluster of stand alone computers an SMP computer or an independent subsystem configured within an SMP computer A character with a
302. ions For example if you insert a sum into a CHAR column you might experience overflow problems if the CHAR column is too small to hold the value In this case the INSERT fails Numbers that have leading zeros such as some zip codes have the zeros stripped if they are stored as number types INTEGER or SMALLINT Instead store these numbers in CHAR columns Sorting and Relational Comparisons CHAR values are compared to other CHAR values by taking the shorter value and padding it on the right with blank spaces until the values have equal length Then the two values are compared for the full length Comparisons use the code set collation order Nonprintable Characters with CHAR A CHAR value can include tab newline whitespace and nonprintable characters You must however use an application to INSERT nonprintable characters into host variables and the host variables into your database After passing nonprintable characters to the database server you can store or retrieve them After you SELECT nonprintable characters FETCH them into host variables and display them with your own display mechanism If you try to display nonprintable characters with DB Access your screen returns inconsistent results Which characters are nonprintable is locale dependent See also the discussion of code set conversion between the client and the database server in the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Collating CHAR Values In general the collation
303. is a positive or negative INTEGER count of days rather than an INTERVAL value If an INTERVAL value is required you can either use the UNITS DAY operator to convert the INTEGER value into an INTERVAL DAY TO DAY value or else use EXTEND to convert one of the DATE values into a DATETIME value before subtracting For example the following expression uses the DATE function to convert character string constants to DATE values calculates their difference and then uses the UNITS DAY keywords to convert the INTEGER result into an INTERVAL value DATE 5 2 1994 DATE 4 6 1955 UNITS DAY Result INTERVAL 12810 DAY 5 TO DAY Important Because of the high precedence of UNITS relative to other SQL operators you should generally enclose any arithmetic expression that is the operand of UNITS within parentheses as in the preceding example If you need YEAR TO MONTH precision you can use the EXTEND function on the first DATE operand as the following example shows EXTEND DATE 5 2 1994 YEAR TO MONTH DATE 4 6 1955 Result INTERVAL 39 01 YEAR TO MONTH The resulting INTERVAL precision is YEAR TO MONTH because the DATETIME value came first If the DATE value had come first the resulting INTERVAL precision would have been DAY 5 TO DAY Manipulating INTERVAL Values You can add or subtract INTERVAL values only if both values are from the same class that is if both are year month or both are day time In the following
304. isolation set with the SET TRANSACTION state ment ensuring all data read during a transaction is not modified during the entire transaction See also isolation and Repeatable Read The locale that a database server uses when it performs its own read and write operations The SERVER_LOCALE environment variable can specify a nondefault locale See also client locale and locale The unique name of a database server assigned by the database server administrator that an application uses to select a database server A unique number between 0 and 255 inclusive that a database server admin istrator assigns when a database server is initialized The locale that a database server determines dynamically for a given connec tion between a client application and a database See also locale The structure that is created for an application using the database server A collection data type created with the SET type constructor in which elements are not ordered and duplicate values can be inserted A shared object file on a UNIX system See also dynamic link library DLL A lock that more than one thread can acquire on the same object Shared locks allow for greater concurrency with multiple users if two users have shared locks on a row a third user cannot change the contents of that row until both users not just the first release the lock Shared locking strategies are used in all levels of isolation except Informix Dirty Read and ANSI compli
305. ists the binary arithmetic operations that you can perform on DATE DATETIME and INTERVAL operands as well as the data type that is returned by the arithmetic expression DataTypes 2 51 Time Data Types Figure 2 11 Arithmetic Operations on DATE DATETIME and INTERVAL Values Operand 1 Operator Operand 2 Result DATE DATETIME INTERVAL DATETIME DATE INTERVAL DATE or INTERVAL DATETIME DATETIME DATETIME INTERVAL DATETIME or INTERVAL DATETIME INTERVAL DATETIME DATETIME INTERVAL or INTERVAL INTERVAL DATETIME CURRENT INTERVAL CURRENT DATETIME INTERVAL INTERVAL CURRENT DATETIME CURRENT or INTERVAL DATETIME DATETIME or UNITS DATETIME INTERVAL or UNITS INTERVAL INTERVAL or NUMBER INTERVAL No other combinations are allowed You cannot add two DATETIME values because this operation does not produce either a specific time or a span of time For example you cannot add December 25 and January 1 but you can subtract one from the other to find the time span between them Manipulating DATETIME Values You can subtract most DATETIME values from each other Dates can be in any order and the result is either a positive or a negative INTERVAL value The first DATETIME value determines the field precision of the result If the second DATETIME value has fewer fields than the first the second is extended automatically to match the first See the discussion of the EXTEND function in the Expression segment in the Infor
306. ite Fluorescent Yellow and Standard White 10049 301 NKL Super shock absorbing gel pads lt BYTE value gt Maximum Protection For High disperse vertical energy into a Mileage Runners horizontal plane for extraordinary cushioned comfort Great motion control Men s only Specify size 10050 301 HRO Engineered for serious training lt BYTE value gt Pronators and Supinators Take with exceptional stability Fabulous Heart A Serious Training Shoe shock absorption Great durability For Runners Who Need Motion Specify men s women s size Control 10051 301 SHM For runners who log heavy miles lt BYTEvalue gt The Training Shoe Engineered and need a durable supportive stable platform Mesh synthetic upper gives excellent moisture dissipation Stability system uses rear antipronation platform and forefoot control plate for extended protection during high intensity training Specify men s women s size for Marathoners and Ultra Distance Runners 9 of 13 asege eg OWwep seJojs y ul eeg 6 y aseqejeq owap sajo s ay catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10052 301 PRC Supportive stable racing flat lt BYTE value gt A Woman s Racing Flat That Plenty of forefoot cushioning with Combines Extra Forefoot added motion control Women s Protection With a Slender Heel only D widths available Specify size 10053 301 KAR Anatomical last holds your foot lt BYTE value gt Durable Traini
307. ix database servers comply with the SQL 92 Intermediate and Full Level and X Open SQL CAE common applications environment standards Informix Welcomes Your Comments We want to know about any corrections or clarifications that you would find useful in our manuals that would help us with future versions Include the following information m The name and version of the manual that you are using m Any comments that you have about the manual m Your name address and phone number Send electronic mail to us at the following address doc informix com This address is reserved for reporting errors and omissions in our documen tation For immediate help with a technical problem contact Informix Customer Services We appreciate your suggestions Introduction 15 System Catalog Tables In This Chapter w s So Aww 64 Aw wR ww Bee ES Objects That the System Catalog Tables Track 2 1 5 Using the System Catalog gt AIR AE AMA 1 6 Accessing the System Catalog te eS Se oe a EG a Sar LE Updating System Catalog Data 2 1 113 Structure of the System Catalog 1 14 SYSAGGREGATES 2 2 117 SYSAMSs4 a a se a e a ae IES SYSATTRTYPES 2 2 2 2 we o 221 SYSBLOBS is gs ok be A we eee 2 SYSCASTS aoa a a 1 28 SYSCHIECKS au bs ear hk ES ce De rk a 1D SYSCHECKUDRDEP 2 2 ee 128 SYSCOLATTRIBS 2 2 2 2 ww ee 1 26 SYSCOLAUTH
308. ke a copy of the onconfig std file if you are using a single coserver configuration or make a copy of the onconfig xps file if you are using a multiple coserver configu ration You can use the onconfig std file for a multiple coserver configuration but you would have to add additional keywords and configuration param eters such as END NODE and COSERVER which are already provided for you in the onconfig xps file For more information on configuration parameters and the ONCONFIG file see the Administrator s Reference OPTCOM PIND You can set the OPTCOMPIND environment variable so that the optimizer can select the appropriate join method setenv OP TCO MPIND YE 0 A nested loop join is preferred where possible over a sort merge join or a hash join 1 When the transaction isolation level is not Repeatable Read the optimizer behaves as in setting 2 otherwise the optimizer behaves as in setting 0 2 Nested loop joins are not necessarily preferred The optimizer bases its decision purely on costs regardless of transaction isolation mode Environment Variables 3 81 OPTMSG When the OPTCOMPIND environment variable is not set the database server uses the value specified for the ONCONFIG configuration parameter OPTCOMPIND When neither the environment variable nor the configuration parameter is set the default value is 2 For more information on the ONCONFIG configuration parameter OPTCOMPIND see t
309. l expression in the WHERE clause is a filter that controls the active set of the query The High Performance Loader HPL uses a filter component to screen data before loading it into a database An object mode of a database object causing bad rows to be written to the violations table during DML operations During DML operations the data base server enforces requirements of a constraint or of a unique index that is in this mode and identifies any rows that would violate the requirement 22 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference fixchar fixed point number flag flexible temporary table floating point number foreign key format formatting character fragment fragment elimination fragmentation full checkpoint function function cursor A character data type in ESQL C programs for fixed length character strings that are padded as needed with trailing blanks and not null terminated A number where the decimal point is fixed at a specific place regardless of the value of the number A command line option usually indicated by a minus sign in UNIX systems For example in DB Access the e flag echoes input to the screen An explicit temporary table that Extended Parallel Server automatically frag ments using a round robin distribution scheme A number with fixed precision total number of digits and undefined scale number of digits to the left of the decimal point The decimal point floats as
310. le m A means the access method supports extspaces and sbspaces If the access method is built in such as a B tree it also supports dbspaces m DS means the access method supports dbspaces and sbspaces m sx means the access method supports sbspaces and extspaces A composite index on the am_name and am_owner columns in this table allows only unique values The am_id column has a unique index For information about access method functions refer to the documentation of your access method SYSATTRTYPES The sysattrtypes system catalog table contains information about members of a complex data type Each row of sysattrtypes contains information about elements of a collection data type or fields of a ROW data type The sysattrtypes table has the following columns Column Type Explanation extended_id INTEGER Identifying code of an extended data type Value is the same as in the sysxtdtypes table page 1 79 seqno SMALLINT Identifying code of an entry having extended_id type levelno SMALLINT Position of member in collection hierarchy parent_no SMALLINT Value in the seqno column of the complex data type that contains this member fieldname VARCHAR 128 Name of the field in a ROW type NULL for other complex data types fieldno SMALLINT Field number sequentially assigned by system from left to right within each row type 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 21 SYSBLOBS Column Type Explanation type SMALLINT Code for
311. le it contains the machine level instructions that correspond to the C language source file To run a statement program routine or a set of instructions See also execut able file A user defined cast that a user explicitly invokes with the CAST AS keyword or cast operator See also implicit cast 20 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference explicit connection explicit select list explicit transaction exponent express mode expression expression based fragmentation extended data type extent external function external procedure external routine A connection made to a database environment that uses the CONNECT statement See also implicit connection A SELECT statement in which the user explicitly specifies the names of the columns from which the query returns values A transaction that is initiated by the BEGIN WORK statement This type of transaction is available only in non ANSI compliant databases that support logging See also implicit transaction and singleton implicit transaction The power to which a value is to be raised An Extended Parallel Server method of loading or unloading data that uses light appends Anything from a simple numeric or alphabetic constant to a more complex series of column values functions quoted strings operators and keywords A Boolean expression contains a logical operator gt lt IS NULL and so on and evaluates as TRUE FALSE or UNKNOWN
312. les that you create you must perform the following steps To use a message directory other than INFORMIXDIR msg 1 Use the mkdir command to create the appropriate directory for the message files You can make this directory under the directory INFORMIXDIR or INFORMIXDIR msg or you can make it under any other directory 2 Set the owner and group of the new directory to informix and the access permission for this directory to 755 3 Set the DBLANG environment variable to the new directory If this directory is a subdirectory of INFORMIXDIR or INFORMIXDIR msg then you need only list the relative path to the new directory Otherwise you must specify the full pathname of the directory 4 Copy the iem files or the message files that you created to the new message directory that DBLANG specifies All the files in the message directory should have the owner and group informix and access permission 644 Environment Variables 3 37 DBMONEY Informix products that use the default U S English locale search for message files in the following order 1 In DBLANG if DBLANG is set to a full pathname 2 In INFORMIXDIR msg DBLANG if DBLANG is set to a relative pathname 3 In INFORMIXDIR DBLANG if DBLANG is set to a relative pathname In INFORMIXDIR msg en_us 0333 In INFORMIXDIR msg en_us 8859 1 In INFORMIXDIR msg In INFORMIXDIR msg english Et a i GLS For more information on search paths for messages see
313. lient process so that client applications can avoid collisions with other memory segments that it uses If you do not set INFORMIXSHMBASE the memory address of the communication segments defaults to an implementation specific value such as 0x800000 INFORMIXSHMBASE setenv UNIX value is an integer in kilobytes used to calculate the memory address The database server calculates the memory address where segments are attached by multiplying the value of INFORMIXSHMBASE by 1 024 For example on a system that uses the C shell you can set the memory address to the value 0x800000 by entering the following command setenv INFORMIXSHMBASE 8192 For more information see your Administrator s Guide and the Administrator s Reference INFORM IXSQLHOSTS The INFORMIXSQLHOSTS environment variable specifies where the SQL client or the database server can find connectivity information INFORMIXSQLHOSTS pathname pathname is the full pathname of the connectivity information file On UNIX systems the default search path for the file containing connectivity information is INFORMIXDIR etc sqlhosts You can override this default to specify for example the mysqlhosts file in the work envt directory by entering the following command setenv INFORMIXSQLHOSTS work envt mysqlhosts 3 70 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference WINN setenv INFORMIXSTACKSIZE When INFORMIXSQLHOSTS is set the client or d
314. limiter 2 28 subtraction operator 2 52 2 70 symbol in syscolauth 1 10 1 27 symbol in sysfragauth 1 42 symbol in systabauth 1 69 unary operator 2 53 2 70 1 not equal to relational operator 2 70 dollar sign currency symbol 2 32 3 38 pathname indicator 3 24 3 84 percentage DBTIME escape symbol 3 49 pathname indicator 3 24 3 47 single quotes string delimiter 3 39 3 54 O parentheses delimiters in expressions 2 56 blank space DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 padding CHAR values 2 13 padding VARCHAR values 2 47 asterisk multiplication operator 2 41 2 52 2 57 2 70 systabauth value 1 10 1 69 wildcard symbol 1 24 1 81 plus sign addition operator 2 52 2 70 truncation indicator 3 59 ABCDEFGH I unary operator 2 70 comma decimal point 3 39 list separator 2 33 2 37 3 46 thousands separator 2 32 period DATE separator 3 33 DATETIME delimiter 2 18 decimal point 2 22 2 32 3 39 execution symbol 3 9 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 membership operator 2 70 nested dot notation 2 60 slash DATE separator 2 16 2 56 3 33 division operator 2 52 2 70 pathname delimiter 3 12 3 42 3 79 colon cast operator 2 66 2 70 DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 list separator 3 46 3 54 3 66 3 79 3 84 semicolon list separator 3 66 3 84 lt less than angle lt gt brackets 2 12 A 30 relational operator 1 12 2 70 3 34 equ
315. log files in the logslice can be owned by multiple coservers one log file per dbspace See also dbslice rootslice and physslice A built in data type that stores varying length character data of up to 32 kilobytes A named set of instructions that the computer substitutes when it encounters the name in source code The significant digits in a floating point number A description of the relation between the records of a data file and the col umns of a relational database See also component A system composed of multiple computers that are connected to a single high speed communication subsystem MPP computers can be partitioned into nodes Compare with symmetric multiprocessing system A unit of storage that equals 1024 kilobytes or 1024 bytes Not for Extended Parallel Server A database server component that coordi nates the use of memory and I O bandwidth for decision support queries MGM uses the DS_MAX_QUERIES DS_TOTAL_MEMORY DS_MAX_SCANS and PDQPRIORITY configuration parameters to determine what resources can or cannot be granted to a decision support query A screen display that allows you to choose the commands that you want the computer to perform Acronym for Memory Grant Manager Storing the same data on two chunks simultaneously If one chunk fails the data is still usable on the other chunk in the mirrored pair The database server administrator handles this data storage option The keywords specified on th
316. lowing example shows EXTEND DATETIME 2001 8 1 YEAR TO DAY YEAR TO MINUTE INTERVAL 720 MINUTE 3 TO MINUTE Result DATETIME 2001 07 31 12 00 YEAR TO MINUTE The EXTEND function allows you to explicitly increase the DATETIME precision from YEAR TO DAY to YEAR TO MINUTE This allows the database server to perform the calculation with the resulting extended precision of YEAR TO MINUTE Manipulating DATE with DATETIME and INTERVAL Values You can use DATE operands in some arithmetic expressions with DATETIME or INTERVAL operands by writing expressions to do the manipulating as Figure 2 12 shows Figure 2 12 Results of Expressions That Manipulate DATE with DATETIME or INTERVAL Values Expression Result DATE DATETIME INTERVAL DATETIME DATE INTERVAL DATE or INTERVAL DATETIME In the cases that Figure 2 12 shows DATE values are first converted to their corresponding DATETIME equivalents and then the expression is evaluated by the rules of arithmetic 2 54 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS Time Data Types Although you can interchange DATE and DATETIME values in many situations you must indicate whether a value is a DATE or a DATETIME data type A DATE value can come from the following sources A column or program variable of type DATE The TODAY keyword The DATE function The MDY function A DATE literal A DATETIME value can come from the following sources A column or program var
317. lue gt Long Life Basketballs for Indoor leather Gymnasiums 10015 8 ANZ Indoor Finest leather Professional lt BYTE value gt Professional Volleyballs for quality Indoor Competitions 10016 9 ANZ Steel eyelets Nylon cording lt BYTE value gt Sanctioned Volleyball Netting Double stitched Sanctioned by the National Athletic Congress for Indoor Professional and Collegiate Competition 2 of 13 asegejeg OWwepsai0 s ay ul eq cov eoueJejey FS 0 ApIND xILOJU Wel catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10017 101 PRC Reinforced hand finished tubular lt BYTE value gt Ultimate in Puncture Protection Polyurethane belted Effective Tires Designed for In City against punctures Mixed tread for Riding super wear and road grip 10018 101 SHM Durable nylon casing with butyl lt BYTE value gt The Perfect Tire for Club Rides tube for superior air retention or Training Center ribbed tread with herringbone side Coated sidewalls resist abrasion 10019 102 SHM Thrust bearing and coated pivot lt BYTE value gt Thrust Bearing and Spring washer spring sleeve for smooth Sleeve Brake Set Guarantees action Slotted levers with soft gum Smooth Action hoods Two tone paint treatment Set includes calipers levers and cables 10020 102 PRC Computer aided design with low lt BYTEvalue gt Computer Design Delivers profile pads Cold forged alloy Rigid Yet Vibration Free Brakes calipers and beefy caliper
318. lumn is the primary key to the systables table This column is indexed and must contain unique values SYSTABAUTH The systabauth system catalog table describes each set of privileges that are granted on a table or on a view synonym or sequence It contains one row for each set of table privileges that are granted in the database the REVOKE statement can modify a row The systabauth table has the following columns Column Type Explanation grantor CHAR 32 IDS Name of the grantor of privilege IDS only CHAR 8 XPS grantee CHAR 32 IDS Name of the grantee of privilege IDS only CHAR 8 XPS tabid INTEGER Identifying code of the table view synonym or sequence tabauth CHAR 9 IDS Pattern that specifies privileges on the object CHAR 8 XPS s or S Select uor U Update Column level privilege see syscolauth page 1 46 ior I Insert dor D Delete x or X Index aor A Alter r or R References nor N Under privilege IDS 1 68 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSTABLES If the tabauth column shows a privilege code in uppercase for example s for select this indicates that the user also has the option to grant that privilege to others Privilege codes listed in lowercase for example s for select indicate that the user has the specified privilege but cannot grant it to others A hyphen indicates the absence of the privilege corresponding to that position within the tabauth pattern
319. lumn substring command file comment commit work Committed Read compile compile time error complex data type An Informix ESQL C host variable or SPL variable that holds an entire collection and provides access through a collection cursor to the individual elements of the collection A join that occurs locally on the coserver where the data resides The local coserver sends the data to the other coservers after the join is complete A data element that contains a specified type of information that occurs in every row of the table Also known as a display label or a field See also row An expression that includes a column name and optionally uses column subscripts to define a column substring A subscript in a column expression A substring in a column expression A system file that contains one or more statements or commands such as SQL statements Information in a program file that is not processed by the computer but that documents the program Special characters such as the sharp sign braces slash marks asterisks or a double hyphen can be used to identify comments depending on the programming context To complete a transaction by accepting all changes to the database since the beginning of the transaction See also roll back An Informix level of isolation in which the user can view only rows that are currently committed at the moment when the query is requested the user canno
320. m Catalog Tables 1 49 SYSINHERITS rps SYSINHERITS Column Type child INTEGER parent INTEGER class CHAR 1 ps SYSLANGAUTH 1 50 Column Type grantor CHAR 32 grantee CHAR 32 langid INTEGER langauth CHAR 1 duplicate values IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The sysinherits system catalog table stores information about table and named ROW type inheritance Every supertype subtype supertable and subtable in the database has a corresponding row in the sysinherits table Explanation Identifying code of the subtable or subtype Identifying code of the supertable or supertype Inheritance class t named row type T table The child and parent values are from sysxtdtypes extended_id for named ROW types or from systables tabid for tables Simple indexes on the child and parent columns allow duplicate values The syslangauth system catalog table contains the authorization information on computer languages that are used to write user defined routines UDRs Explanation Name of the grantor of the language authorization Name of the grantee of the language authorization Identifying code of language in sysroutinelangs table The language authorization u Usage privilege granted U Usage privilege granted WITH GRANT OPTION A composite index on the langid grantor and grantee columns allows only unique values A composite index on the langid and grantee columns allows XPS SYSLOGMAP SYSLOGM AP
321. m size of the column When you store a VARCHAR value in the database only its defined characters are stored The database server does not strip a VARCHAR string of any user entered trailing blanks nor does the database server pad the VARCHAR to the full length of the column However if you specify a minimum reserved space r and some data values are shorter than that amount some space reserved for rows goes unused 2 46 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS VARCHAR m r VARCHAR values are compared to other VARCHAR values and to other character string data types in the same way that CHAR values are compared The shorter value is padded on the right with blank spaces until the values have equal lengths then they are compared for the full length Nonprintable Characters with VARCHAR Nonprintable VARCHAR characters are entered displayed and treated in the same way that nonprintable characters in CHAR values are treated For details see the section Nonprintable Characters with CHAR on page 2 13 Storing Numeric Values in a VARCHAR Column When you insert a numeric value in a VARCHAR column the stored value does not get padded with trailing blanks to the maximum length of the column The number of digits in a numeric VARCHAR value is the number of characters that you need to store that value For example given the following statement the value that gets stored in table mytab is 1 create table mytab coll varc
322. m to other data types Declare and access host variables of these types in SPL and ESQL C Specific exceptions are mentioned in the description of each data type For an overview see Built In Data Types on page 2 48 and Extended Data Types on page 2 57 You assign data types to columns with the CREATE TABLE statement and change them with the ALTER TABLE statement When you change an existing column data type all data is converted to the new data type if possible For information on the ALTER TABLE and CREATE TABLE statements SOL statements that create specific data types and create and drop casts and other data type syntax conventions refer to the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax For information about how to create and use complex data types see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation For information about how to create user defined data types see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types All Informix database servers support the data types that Figure 2 2 lists This chapter describes each of these data types Figure 2 2 Data Types That All Informix Database Servers Support Data Type Explanation Page BYTE Stores any kind of binary data up to 231 bytes in length 2 11 CHAR n Stores character strings collation is in code set order 2 12 CHARACTER n Is a synonym for CHAR 2 14 CHARACTER Stores character strings of varying length 2 14 VARYING m r ANSI compliant collation is in
323. me of the database user or role CHAR 8 XPS usertype CHAR 1 Code specifying database level privileges C Connect work within existing tables D DBA all privileges G Role R Resource CREATE permanent tables user defined data types and indexes priority SMALLINT Reserved for future use password CHAR 16 IDS Reserved for future use CHAR 8 XPS An index on username allows only unique values The username value can be the login name of a user or on Dynamic Server the name of a role SYSVIEWS The sysviews system catalog table describes each view in the database Because it stores the SELECT statement that created the view sysviews can contain multiple rows for each view It has the following columns Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Identifying code of the view seqno SMALLINT Line number of the SELECT statement viewtext CHAR 64 Actual SELECT statement used to create the view A composite index on tabid and seqno allows only unique values XPS SYSVIOLATIONS SYSVIOLATIONS The sysviolations system catalog table stores information about the constraint violations for base tables Every table in the database that has a violations table and a diagnostics table associated with it has a corresponding row in the sysviolations table which has the following columns Column Type Explanation targettid INTEGER Identifying code of the target table the base table on which the violations table and the diagnostic
324. mer_num column The same customer number can appear in more than one row of the cust_calls table if the customer calls the distributor more than once with a problem or question In the cust_calls table the customer_num column is a foreign key that references the customer_num column in the customer table Figure A 16 shows this relationship customer Table detail customer_num fname 106 127 116 116 101 102 103 104 105 106 Ludwig Carole Philip Anthony Raymond George cust_calls Table detail customer_num call_dtime 1998 06 12 08 20 1998 07 31 14 30 1997 11 28 13 34 1997 12 21 11 24 Figure A 16 Tables That the customer_num Iname Column Joins Pauli Sadler Currie Higgins Vector Watson user_id maryj maryj mannyh mannyh The stores_demo Database A 15 The call_ type and cust_calls Tables The call_type and cust_calls Tables The call_type and cust_calls tables are joined by the call_code column The same call code can appear in more than one row of the cust_calls table because many customers can have the same type of problem In the cust_calls table the call_code column is a foreign key that references the call_code column in the call_type table Figure A 17 shows this relationship Figure A 17 call_type Table detail Tables That the call_code code_descr call_code Column Joins B billing error D damaged goods I incorrect merchandise sent L late shipment O other cust_calls
325. meters Pathname archecker config file Pathname C compiler Pathname database files Pathname executable programs Pathname HPL sblob handles Pathname installation Pathname libraries IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Environment Variable THREADLIB DBPATH CLIENT_LOCALE DB_LOCALE DBNLS SERVER_LOCALE ISM_COMPRESSION ISM_DEBUG_LEVEL ISM_ENCRYPTION See Configuration parameter INFORMIXOPCACHE IFX_DIRECTIVES OPTMSG OPTCOMPIND OPT_GOAL OPTOFC See Configuration parameter AC_CONFIG INFORMIXC DBPATH PATH PLOAD_LO_PATH INFORMIXDIR LD_LIBRARY_PATH Page 3 94 3 42 GLS Guide 3 40 GLS Guide 3 74 3 75 3 76 3 97 to 3 97 3 68 3 58 3 82 3 81 3 83 3 83 3 97 to 3 97 3 24 3 63 3 42 3 84 3 87 3 67 3 79 7 of 10 Topic Pathname message files Pathname parallel sorting Pathname remote shell Pathname xfer_config file Printing Privileges Query optimization Query prioritization Remote shell Role separation Routine DATETIME formatting Server Server locale Shared memory Shell remote Shell search path Sorting Index of Environment Variables Environment Variable LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH DBLANG PSORT_DBTEMP DBREMOTECMD XFER_CONFIG DBPRINT NODEFDAC IFX_DIRECTIVES OPTCOMPIND OPT_GOAL PDOPRIORITY DBREMOTECMD INF_ROLE_SEP DBTIME See Database server SERVER_LOCALE INFORMIXSHMBASE PLOAD_SHMBASE DBREMOTECMD PATH PSORT_DBTEMP PSORT_NPR
326. mix Guide to GLS Functionality Environment Variables 3 33 DBDATE End user formats affect the following contexts m When you display DATE values Informix products use the DBDATE environment variable to format the output m During data entry of DATE values Informix products use the DBDATE environment variable to interpret the input For example if you specify a literal DATE value in an INSERT statement the database server expects this literal value to be compatible with the format that DBDATE specifies Similarly the database server interprets the date that you specify as input to the DATE function in the format that DBDATE specifies DATE Expressions in Database Objects When an expression in a database object including a check constraint fragmentation expression SPL routine trigger or UDR contains a literal DATE value the database server evaluates the expression using the setting that DBDATE or other relevant environment variables had when the database object was created or was last modified If DBDATE has been reset to a new value the new value is ignored when the literal DATE is evaluated For example suppose DBDATE is set to MDY2 and a user creates a table with the following check constraint on the column orderdate orderdate lt 06 25 98 The date of the preceding expression is formatted according to the value of DBDATE when the constraint is defined The check constraint expression is interpreted
327. mix Guide to SQL Reference Description Complex data types that are made up of elements each of which is of the same data type A group of ordered elements each of which need not be unique within the group A group of elements each of which need not be unique The order of the elements is ignored A group of elements each of which is unique The order of the elements is ignored Complex data types that are made up of fields ROW types that are identified by their name ROW types that are identified by their structure Complex data types can be nested For example you can construct a row type whose fields include one or more SETs MULTISETs row types and or LISTs Likewise a collection type can have elements whose data type is a row type Complex Data Types All complex types that include opaque data types inherit the following support functions input assign output destroy send LO handles recv hash import lessthan export equal import binary lessthan row only export binary The following sections summarize the complex data types For more infor mation on complex data types see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Collection Data Types A collection data type is a complex type that is made up of one or more elements Every element in a collection has the same data type A collection element can be of any data type including other complex types except B
328. mix Guide to SQL Syntax 2 52 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Time Data Types In the following example subtracting the DATETIME YEAR TO HOUR value from the DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE value results in a positive interval value of 60 days 1 hour and 30 minutes Because minutes were not included in the second operand the database server sets the MINUTES value for the second operand to 0 before performing the subtraction DATETIME 2001 9 30 12 30 YEAR TO MINUTE DATETIME 2001 8 1 11 YEAR TO HOUR Result INTERVAL 60 01 30 DAY TO MINUTE If the second DATETIME operand has more fields than the first regardless of whether the precision of the extra fields is larger or smaller than those in the first operand the additional time unit fields in the second value are ignored in the calculation In the next expression and its result the year is not included for the second operand Therefore the year is set automatically to the current year from the system clock calendar in this example 2001 and the resulting INTERVAL is negative which indicates that the second date is later than the first DATETIME 2001 9 30 YEAR TO DAY DATETIME 10 1 MONTH TO DAY Result INTERVAL 1 DAY TO DAY assuming that the current year is 2001 Manipulating DATETIME with INTERVAL Values INTERVAL values can be added to or subtracted from DATETIME values In either case the result is a DATETIME value If you a
329. mn and most frequently on the last named column A join between two or more tables based on the relationship among two or more columns in each table See also simple join An indexing method that identifies records through a fragment identifier and a record identifier To append a second string to the end of a first string An operator whose notation is composed of two pipe symbols this is used in expressions to indicate the joining of two strings Access by two or more processes to the same database simultaneously A coserver that Informix designates to run CM software and store CM data A file read during database server disk or shared memory initialization that contains the parameters that specify values for configurable behavior Data base server and its archiving tool use configuration files A logical association between two applications or between an application and a database environment created by a CONNECT or DATABASE statement Database servers can also have connections to one another See also explicit connection implicit connection and multiplexed connection The coserver to which a client is directly connected See also coserver and par ticipating coserver An Extended Parallel Server feature enabled by a setting in the sqlhosts file whereby the database server attempts to establish a client connection with each coserver in a dbserver group until a connection succeeds Glossary 11 constant constrain
330. n An access method supports a key scan if it can return a key as well as a rowid from a call to the am_getnext function o FALSE Non Zero TRUE Whether a secondary access method can support unique keys o FALSE Non Zero TRUE Whether a primary access method supports clustering o FALSE Non Zero TRUE Whether a primary access method supports rowids o FALSE Non Zero TRUE Whether a primary access method can both read and write 0 access method is read only Non Zero access method is read write Whether an access method supports parallel execution 0 FALSE Non Zero TRUE The value to be multiplied by the cost of a scan in order to normalize it to costing done for built in access methods The scan cost is the output of the am_scancost function The routine specified for the AM_CREATE purpose for this access method value procid for the routine in the sysprocedures table The routine specified for the AM_DROP purpose function for this access method The routine specified for the AM_OPEN purpose function for this access method 2 of 3 System Catalog Tables 1 19 SYSAMS 1 20 Column am_close am_insert am_delete am_update am_stats am_scancost am_check am_beginscan am_endscan am_rescan am_getnext am_getbyid am_build am_init IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Type INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER INTEG
331. n using the ALTER TABLE statement if the new value does not duplicate any existing value in the column To insert into a SERIAL column your database server increments by 1 the previous value or the reset value if that is larger and assigns the result as the entered value If ALTER TABLE has reset the next value of a SERIAL column to a value smaller than values already in that column however the next value follows this formula maximum existing value in SERIAL column 1 For example if you reset the SERIAL value of customer customer_num to 50 when the largest existing value is 128 the next assigned number will be 129 For more details on SERIAL data entry see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax A SERIAL column can store unique codes for example order invoice or customer numbers SERIAL data values require 4 bytes of storage and have the same precision as the INTEGER data type For details of another way to assign unique whole numbers to each row of a database table see the CREATE SEQUENCE statement in Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Data Types 2 39 SERIAL8 SERI AL8 The SERIALS data type stores a sequential integer assigned automatically by the database server when a new row is inserted It behaves like the SERIAL data type but with a larger range For more information on how to insert values into SERIAL8 columns see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax A SERIAL8 data column is commonly used to store large unique n
332. n Bourne shell 3 9 Index 7 ABCDEFGH I how to set in Korn shell 3 9 listed alphabetically 3 18 listed by topic 3 95 manipulating in Windows environments 3 13 modifying settings 3 10 overriding a setting 3 8 3 54 rules of precedence in UNIX 3 12 rules of precedence in Windows 3 18 scope of reference 3 15 setting at the command line 3 6 for native Windows applications 3 13 in a configuration file 3 6 in a login file 3 6 in a shell file 3 9 in Windows environments 3 7 with command line utilities 3 15 with the Registry Editor 3 13 with the System applet 3 15 setting in autoexec bat 3 16 standard UNIX system 3 5 types of 3 5 unsetting 3 10 3 16 3 54 view current setting 3 11 where to set 3 9 en_us 8859 1 locale 5 Equality operator 2 15 Era based dates 3 52 Error message files 3 37 esql command 3 25 3 63 ESQL C DATETIME routines 3 49 esqlc command 3 25 long identifiers 3 59 message chaining 3 82 multithreaded applications 3 94 program compilation order 3 25 Exact numeric data types 1 83 Executable programs 3 84 Execute privilege 1 56 3 80 Explicit cast 1 23 2 66 Explicit pathnames 3 16 3 44 Explicit temporary tables 3 46 Exponent 2 22 export utility 3 9 8 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvYvY Z Expression based fragmentation 1 44 3 31 3 34 EXTEND function 2 54 Extended data types 1 79 2 57 B 22 Extended Parallel Server XPS 1 14 3 18 B 1 Extensible Mark
333. n page 2 26 but DATETIME represents a point in time rather than like INTERVAL a span of time The following differences exist between DATETIME and INTERVAL qualifiers m The DATETIME keyword replaces the INTERVAL keyword m DATETIME qualifiers cannot specify a non default precision for the largest_qualifier time unit m A DATETIME value that includes YEAR and or MONTH time units can also include smaller time units The largest_qualifier and smallest_qualifier of a DATETIME data type can be any of the fields that Figure 2 4 lists provided that smallest_qualifier does not specify a larger time unit than largest_qualifier The two time units can be the same for example DATETIME YEAR TO YEAR Figure 2 4 DATETIME Field Qualifiers Qualifier Field Valid Entries YEAR A year numbered from 1 to 9 999 A D MONTH A month numbered from 1 to 12 DAY A day numbered from 1 to 31 as appropriate to the month HOUR An hour numbered from 0 midnight to 23 1 of 2 DataTypes 2 17 DATETIME Qualifier Field Valid Entries MINUTE A minute numbered from 0 to 59 SECOND A second numbered from 0 to 59 FRACTION A decimal fraction of a second with up to 5 digits of scale The default scale is 3 digits a thousandth of a second For smallest_qualifier to specify another scale write FRACTION n where n is the desired number of digits from 1 to 5 2 of 2 A DATETIME column does not need to include all fields from YEAR to FRACTIO
334. n the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Environment Variables 3 95 Index of Environment Variables Figure 3 2 Uses for Environment Variables Topic Environment Variable Page Abbreviated year values DBCENTURY 3 28 ANSI ISO SQL compliance Informix syntax extensions DBANSIWARN 3 27 default table privileges NODEFDAC 3 80 archecker utility AC_CONFIG 3 24 Buffer fetch size FET_BUF_SIZE 3 55 network size IFX_NETBUF_SIZE 3 60 network pool size IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE 3 60 BYTE or TEXT data buffer DBBLOBBUF 3 28 Cache enabling STMT_CACHE 3 92 size for Optical Subsystem INFORMIXOPCACHE 3 68 Client server default server INFORMIXSERVER 3 68 shared memory segments INFORMIXSHMBASE 3 69 stacksize for client session INFORMIXSTACKSIZE 3 71 locale of client server CLIENT_LOCALE DBLOCALE GLS Guide locale for file I O SERVER_LOCALE GLS Guide Code set conversion code set of client server CLIENT_LOCALE GLS Guide DB_LOCALE character string conversion DBNLS 3 40 Communication Support INFORMIXKEYTAB 3 67 Module DCE GSS concsm cfg file INFORMIXCONCSMCFG 3 63 Compiler INFORMIXC 3 63 1 of 10 3 96 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Topic multibyte characters C ESQL C Configuration file database server ignore variables Configuration parameter COSERVER DBSERVERNAME DBSPACETEMP DIRECTIVES OPCACHEMAX OPTCOMPIND OPT_GOAL PDOPRIORITY STACKSIZE Connecting Data distributions Database locale
335. n the file you can also set the ENVIGNORE environment variable For a discussion of the use and format of environment configuration files and the ENVIGNORE environment variable see page 3 54 Rules of Precedence When an Informix product accesses an environment variable normally the following rules of precedence apply 1 Ofhighest precedence is the value that is defined in the environment shell by explicitly setting the value at the shell prompt 2 The second highest precedence goes to the value that is defined in the private environment configuration file in the home directory of the user informix 3 The next highest precedence goes to the value that is defined in the common environment configuration file INFORMIXDIR etc informix rc 4 The lowest precedence goes to the default value if one exists IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference WIN NT Using Environment Variables on Windows For precedence information about GLS environment variables see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Important If you set one or more environment variables before you start the database server and you do not explicitly set the same environment variables for your client products the clients will adopt the original settings Using Environment Variables on Windows The following sections discuss setting viewing unsetting and modifying environment variables for native Windows applications and command
336. nd stored procedure language SPL The Informix Guide to SQL Tutorial shows how to use basic and advanced SQL and SPL routines to access and manipulate the data in your databases The Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation shows how to use SQL to implement and manage your databases Introduction 3 Types of Users Types of Users This manual is written for the following users Database users Database administrators Database server administrators Database application programmers Performance engineers This manual assumes that you have the following background A working knowledge of your computer your operating system and the utilities that your operating system provides Some experience working with relational databases or exposure to database concepts Some experience with computer programming Some experience with database server administration operating system administration or network administration If you have limited experience with relational databases SQL or your operating system refer to the Getting Started manual for your database server for a list of supplementary titles Software Dependencies This manual is written with the assumption that you are using one of the following database servers Informix Extended Parallel Server Version 8 3 Informix Dynamic Server Version 9 3 4 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference l U on Assumptions About Your Locale Assumptions Abo
337. nd the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Creating Unnamed Row Types You can create an unnamed row type in several ways You can declare an unnamed row type using the row keyword Each field in a row can have a different field type To specify the field type use the following syntax ROW field_name field type The field_name must conform to the rules for SQL identifiers For more information see the Identifier section in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax You can generate an unnamed row type using row as a constructor and a series of values A corresponding unnamed row type is created using the default data types of the specified values For example a declaration of the following row value ROW 1 abc 5 30 defines this row type ROW x INTEGER y VARCHAR z DECIMAL You can create an unnamed row type by an implicit or explicit cast from a named row type or from another unnamed row type The rows of any table except a table defined on a named row type are unnamed row types Inserting Values into Unnamed Row Type Columns When you specify field values for an unnamed row type list the field values after the constructor and between parentheses For example suppose you have an unnamed row type column The following INSERT statement adds one group of field values to this row column INSERT INTO tablel VALUES ROW 4 abc You can specify a row column in the IN predicate in the WHERE clause of a
338. ng Flat That Can firmly in place Feather weight Carry You Through Marathon cushioning delivers Miles the responsiveness of a racing flat Specify men s women s size 10054 301 ANZ Cantilever sole provides shock lt BYTE value gt Motion Control Protection and absorption and energy rebound Extra Toebox Room Positive traction shoe with ample toe box Ideal for runners who need a wide shoe Available in men s and women s Specify size 10055 302 KAR Reusable ice pack with velcro strap lt BYTE value gt Finally an Ice Pack for Achilles For general use Velcro strap allows Injuries and Shin Splints That easy application to arms or legs You Can Take to the Office 10056 303 PRC Neon nylon Perfect for running or lt BYTE value gt Knock Their Socks Off With aerobics Indicate color Fluorescent pink yellow green and orange YOUR Socks 10 of 13 asegejeg ouap TS 10 S ay ul eq rv eoueJejey TOS 0 pIND xILOJU Wel catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10057 303 KAR 100 nylon blend for optimal lt BYTE value gt 100 Nylon Blend Socks No wicking and comfort We ve taken Cotton out the cotton to eliminate the risk of blisters and reduce the oppor tunity for infection Specify men s or women s 10058 304 ANZ Provides time date dual display of lt BYTE value gt Athletic Watch w 4 Lap lap cumulative splits 4 lap Memory memory 10 hr count down timer event timer alarm hour
339. ngth value is positive collength min_space 256 max_size m Ifthe collength value is negative collength 65536 min_space 256 max_size The database server uses the same formulas to encode the collength column for NVARCHAR data types 1 32 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSCOLUMNS Length for Time Data Types For columns of type DATETIME or INTERVAL collength is determined using the following formula length 256 first_qualifier 16 last_qualifier The length is the physical length of the DATETIME or INTERVAL field and first_qualifier and last_qualifier have values that the following table shows Field Qualifier Value Field Qualifier Value YEAR 0 FRACTION 1 11 MONTH 2 FRACTION 2 12 DAY 4 FRACTION 3 13 HOUR 6 FRACTION 4 14 MINUTE 8 FRACTION 5 15 SECOND 10 For example if a DATETIME YEAR TO MINUTE column has a length of 12 such as YYYY DD MO HH MD a first_qualifier value of 0 for YEAR and a last_qualifier value of 8 for MINUTE then the collength value is 3080 from 256 12 0 16 8 Length of Simple Large Object Columns If the data type of the column is BYTE or TEXT collength holds the length of the descriptor Storing Maximum and Minimum Values The colmin and colmax column values hold the second smallest and second largest data values in the column respectively For example if the values in an indexed column are 1 2 3 4 and 5 the colmin value is 2
340. nit command 3 57 Online help 12 Online manuals 12 onload utility 2 10 2 11 2 44 onpload utility 3 41 3 88 Opaque data type cast matrix 2 69 comparing 2 67 description 2 34 smart large objects 2 50 storage 2 31 sysxtddesc data 1 78 sysxtdtypes data 1 79 OPCACHEMAX configuration parameter 3 68 OPEN statement 3 83 Operator class sysams data 1 18 sysindices data 1 49 sysopclasses data 1 53 Operator precedence 2 70 OPTCOMPIND configuration parameter 3 82 OPTCOMPIND environment variable 3 81 Optical cluster INFORMIXOPCACHE setting 3 68 sysblobs type 1 22 sysopclstr data 1 54 Optimizer setting IFX_DIRECTIVES 3 58 setting OPTCOMPIND 3 82 setting OPTOFC 3 83 setting OPT_GOAL 3 83 sysdistrib data 1 38 OPTMSG environment variable 3 82 A BC D E F GH OPTOFC environment variable 3 83 OPT_GOAL configuration parameter 3 84 OPT_GOAL environment variable 3 83 OR operator 2 70 ORDER BY clause 2 11 2 44 3 47 orders table in superstores_demo database B 14 B 15 B 16 B 18 Ordinal positions 2 29 Output support function 2 31 Overflow error 2 21 Owner routines 1 61 3 80 P PAGE lock mode 1 70 3 57 Parallel database query See PDQ Parallel distributed queries setting with PDQPRIORITY 3 85 Parallel sorting setting with PSORT_NPROCS 3 89 Partial characters 2 12 PATH environment variable 3 84 Pathname for C compiler 3 63 for client or shared libraries 3 79 for concsm cfg file 3 64 for connectivity information
341. nits of storage See also root dbspace Acronym for data definition language a subset of the Structured Query Lan guage SQL for declaring modifying and dropping database objects such as tables constraints or indexes See also data definition statements A situation in which two or more threads cannot proceed because each is waiting for data locked by the other or another thread The database server monitors and prevents potential deadlock situations by sending an error message to the application if a request for a lock might result in a deadlock A file that receives output used for debugging purposes An application that provides information that is used for strategic planning decision making and reporting It typically executes in a batch environment in a sequential scan fashion and returns a large fraction of the rows scanned Decision support queries typically scan the entire database See also online transaction processing application A query that a decision support application generates It often requires mul tiple joins temporary tables and extensive calculations and can benefit sig nificantly from PDQ See also online transaction processing queries A programming language statement that describes or defines objects for example defining a program variable Compare with procedure See also data definition statements Values or behavior that take effect unless the user explicitly specifies another value or action
342. ns for the user who brings up the database server If the JAR_TEMP_PATH environment variable is not set temporary copies of jar files are stored in the tmp directory of the local file system for the database server Environment Variables 3 77 JAVA_COMPILER JAVA_COMPILER You can set the JAVA_COMPILER environment variable in the Java virtual machine environment to disable JIT compilation setenv JAVA_COMPILER The NONE and none settings are equivalent On UNIX systems that support the C shell and on which JAVA_COMPILER has been set to NONE or none you can enable the JIT compiler for the JVM environment by the following command unset JAVA_COMPILER JVM_MAX_HEAP_ SIZE The JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE environment variable an set a non default upper limit on the size of the heap for the Java virtual machine setenv JVM_MAX_HEAP_ SIZE size is a positive integer that specifies the maximum size in mega bytes For example the following command sets the maximum heap size at 12Mb set JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE 12 If you do not set JVM_MAX_HEAP_SIZE 16MB is the default maximum size 3 78 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference LD_LIBRARY_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH The LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable tells the shell on Solaris systems which directories to search for client or shared Informix general libraries You must specify the directory that contains your clie
343. nson Signature 10005 3 HSK Pro style wood Available in sizes lt BYTE value gt High Technology Design 31 32 33 34 35 Expands the Sweet Spot 10006 3 SHM Aluminum Blue with black tape lt BYTEvalue gt Durable Aluminum for High 31 20 oz or 22 oz 32 21 oz or 23 School and Collegiate Athletes oz 33 22 oz or 24 oz 10007 4 HSK Norm Van Brocklin signature style lt BYTE value gt Quality Pigskin with Norm Van Brocklin Signature 10008 4 HRO NFL Style pigskin lt BYTE value gt Highest Quality Football for High School and Collegiate Competitions 1 of 13 asegejeg ouap selojs y ul eeg Le y aseqejeq owap salo s ay catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10009 5 NRG Graphite frame Synthetic strings lt BYTE value gt Wide Body Amplifies Your Natural Abilities by Providing More Power Through Aerody namic Design 10010 5 SMT Aluminum frame Synthetic strings lt BYTE value gt Mid Sized Racquet for the Improving Player 10011 5 ANZ Wood frame cat gut strings lt BYTE value gt Antique Replica of Classic Wooden Racquet Built with Cat Gut Strings 10012 6 SMT Soft yellow color for easy visibility lt BYTEvalue gt High Visibility Tennis Day or in sunlight or artificial light Night 10013 6 ANZ Pro core Available in neon yellow lt BYTE value gt Durable Construction Coupled green and pink with the Brightest Colors Available 10014 7 HRO Indoor Classic NBA style Brown lt BYTEva
344. nstraints on the original SERIAL8 column SET e The SET data type is a collection type that stores unique elements it does not allow duplicate element values For a collection type that does allow duplicate values see the description of MULTISET in MULTISET e on page 2 32 The elements in a SET have no ordinal position That is no concept of a first second or third element in a SET exists For a collection type with ordinal positions for elements see the LIST data type in LIST e on page 2 29 All elements in a SET have the same element type To specify the element type use the following syntax SET element_type NOT NULL DataTypes 2 41 SET e The element_type of a collection can be any of the following types A built in type except SERIAL SERIAL8 BYTE and TEXT A named or unnamed row type Another collection type An opaque type You must specify the NOT NULL constraint for SET elements No other constraints are valid for SET columns For more information on the syntax of the SET collection type see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax You can use SET anywhere that you use any other data type unless otherwise indicated For example m After the IN predicate in the WHERE clause of a SELECT statement to search for matching SET values m Asan argument to the CARDINALITY or mi_collection_card function to determine the number of elements in a SET column You cannot use SET values as arguments t
345. nt application use one of the following application programming interfaces APIs m From within an Informix ESQL C program use the smart large object API For more information see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual m From within a DataBlade module use the Client and Server API For more information see the DataBlade API Programmer s Manual For information on smart large objects see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Time Data Types You can use DATE DATETIME and INTERVAL data in a variety of arithmetic and relational expressions You can manipulate a DATETIME value with another DATETIME value an INTERVAL value the current time specified by the keyword CURRENT or some unit of time identified by the keyword UNITS In most situations you can use a DATE value wherever it is appropriate to use a DATETIME value and vice versa You also can manipulate an INTERVAL value with the same choices as a DATETIME value In addition you can multiply or divide an INTERVAL value by a number An INTERVAL column can hold a value that represents the difference between two DATETIME values or the difference between or sum of two INTERVAL values In either case the result is a span of time which is an INTERVAL value Conversely if you add or subtract an INTERVAL from a DATETIME value another DATETIME value is produced because the result is a specific time Figure 2 11 l
346. nt libraries before you can use the product setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH PATH ME Cy ARM pathname specifies the search path for the library The following example sets the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable to the desired directory setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH INFORMIXDIR lib S INFORMIXDIR lib esql S LD_LIBRARY_PATH For INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Driver on AIX set LIBPATH For INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Driver on HP UX set SHLIB_PATH LIBPATH The LIBPATH environment variable tells the shell on AIX systems which directories to search for dynamic link libraries for the INTERSOLV DataDirect ODBC Driver You must specify the full pathname for the directory where you installed the product setenv _ LIBPATH a ee pathname specifies the search path for the libraries On Solaris set LD_LIBRARY_PATH On HP UX set SHLIB_PATH Environment Variables 3 79 NODEFDAC NODEFDAC When the NODEFDAC environment variable is setto yes it prevents default table privileges Select Insert Update and Delete from being granted to PUBLIC when a new table is created in a database that is not ANSI compliant If you do not set the NODEFDAC variable it is by default set to no setenv NODEFDAC y E yes no allows default table privileges to be granted to PUBLIC Also allows the Execute privilege on a new user defined routine to be granted to PUBLIC
347. nt settings after one or more Informix products are installed enter the following command at the command prompt set Sometimes you must add information to an environment variable that is already set For example the PATH environment variable is always set in Windows environments When you use an Informix product you must add the name of the directory where the executable files for the Informix products are stored to the PATH In the following example INFORMIXDIR is d informix that is during installation Informix products were installed in the d informix directory The executable files are in the bin subdirectory d informix bin To add this directory at the beginning of the PATH environment variable value use the following command set PATH d informix bin PATHS Rather than entering an explicit pathname you can use the value of the INFORMIXDIR environment variable represented as INFORMIXDIR as the following example shows set INFORMIXDIR d informix set PATH INFORMIXDIR bin PATHS 3 16 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities You might prefer to use this version to ensure that your PATH entry does not contradict the search path that was set in INFORMIXDIR and to avoid the need to reset PATH whenever you change INFORMIXDIR For more information about setting and modifying environment variables refer to your operating system manuals Us
348. ntain the required rows making queries faster A user defined algorithm for expression based fragmentation It defines the boundaries of each fragment in a table using SQL relational and logical oper ators Expressions in a range rule can use the following restricted set of oper ators gt lt gt lt and the logical operator AND See unbuffered disk I O See unbuffered disk I O A nonlogged permanent table that uses light appends An level of isolation that the SET TRANSACTION statement can specify in which a user can view rows that are currently committed at the moment of the query request but cannot view rows that were changed as part of a cur rently uncommitted transaction This is the default isolation level for databases that are not ANSI compliant See also Committed Read An ANSI compliant level of isolation set with the SET TRANSACTION state ment that does not account for locks This allows a user to view any existing rows even rows that currently can be altered within currently uncommitted transactions Read Uncommitted is the lowest level of isolation no isolation at all and is thus the most efficient See also Dirty Read See Informix user ID See row A four byte RSAM entity also known as RID that describes the logical posi tion of the record within a fragment Not the same as rowid To restore a database to a former condition after a system failure or other destructive event The recovery restores t
349. ntrolled site Examine these files before you begin using your database server Documentation notes release notes and machine notes are also located in the directory where the product is installed The following table describes these files On UNIX platforms the following online files appear in the INFORMIXDIR release en_us 0333 directory Online File sqlr_docnotes_9 30 html release_notes_9 30 html machine_notes_9 30 txt Purpose The documentation notes file for your version of this manual describes topics that are not covered in the manual or that were modified since publication The release notes file describes feature differ ences from earlier versions of Informix products and how these differences might affect current products This file also contains information about any known problems and their workarounds The machine notes file describes any special actions that you must take to configure and use Informix products on your computer Machine notes are named for the product described Introduction 13 Related Reading UNIX WIN NT The following items appear in the Informix folder To display this folder choose Start gt Programs Informix Dynamic Server 9 307 Documentation Notes or Release Notes from the task bar Program Group Item Description Documentation Notes This item includes additions or corrections to manuals with information about features that might not be covered in the manuals or
350. num fname Iname i Column Joins 101 Ludwig Pauli 102 Carole Sadler 103 Philip Currie 104 Anthony Higgins orders Table detail order_num order_date customer_num 1001 05 20 1998 104 1002 05 21 1998 101 1003 05 22 1998 104 1004 05 22 1998 106 A 10 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The orders and items Tables According to Figure A 11 customer 104 Anthony Higgins has placed two orders as his customer number appears in two rows of the orders table Because the customer number is a foreign key in the orders table you can retrieve Anthony Higgins s name address and information about his orders at the same time The orders and items Tables The orders and items tables are linked by an order_num column that contains an identification number for each order If an order includes several items the same order number appears in several rows of the items table In the items table the order_num column is a foreign key that references the order_num column in the orders table Figure A 12 shows this relationship Figure A 12 orders Table detail Tables That the order_num Column order_num order_date customer_num Joins 1001 05 20 1998 104 1002 05 21 1998 101 1003 05 22 1998 104 items Table detail item_num order_num stock_num manu_code 1 1001 1 HRO 4 1002 4 HSK 3 1002 3 HSK 9 1003 9 ANZ 8 1003 8 ANZ 5 1003 5 ANZ The stores_demo Database A 11 The items and stock Tables A 12 The items and stock Tables
351. number Informix applications display error messages on the screen or write them to files See exception handling A character that indicates that the next character normally interpreted by the program as having special significance is to be processed as a literal charac ter instead The escape character precedes the special character such as a wildcard or delimiter to escape that is ignore the special significance The physical key of a keyboard usually marked ESC that is used to terminate one mode and start another mode in most UNIX and DOS systems An API of C routines that an Informix ESQL C client application can use to access smart large objects as operating system files The ESQL C Smart Large Object API is part of the Informix ESQL C SQL API You can also access smart large objects with a set of functions in the DataBlade API An error or warning that the database server returns or a state that a SPL statement initiates The code in a program that anticipates and reacts to runtime errors and warn ings Also referred to as error handling or error trapping Sole access to a database or table by a user Other users are prevented from using it A lock on an object row page table or database that is held by a single thread that prevents other processes from acquiring a lock of any kind on the same object A file that contains code that can be executed directly A C language object file can be an executable fi
352. o an aggregate function such as AVG MAX MIN or SUM For more information see the Condition and Expression section in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax The following examples declare two sets The first example declares a set of integers and the second declares a set of character elements SET INTEGER NOT NULL SET CHAR 20 NOT NULL The following examples construct the same sets from value lists SET 1 5 13 SET Oakland Menlo Park Portland Lenexa In the following example a SET constructor function is part of a CREATE TABLE statement CREATE TABLE tab c CHAR 5 s SET INTEGER NOT NULL i 2 42 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SMALLFLOAT The following SET values are equal SET blue green yellow SET yellow blue green SM ALLFLOAT The SMALLFLOAT data type stores single precision floating point numbers with approximately nine significant digits SMALLFLOAT corresponds to the float data type in C The range of values for a SMALLFLOAT data type is the same as the range of values for the C float data type on your computer A SMALLFLOAT data type column typically stores scientific numbers that can be calculated only approximately Because floating point numbers retain only their most significant digits the number that you enter in this type of column and the number the database displays might differ slightly depending on how your computer stores floating point numbers internally
353. o columns allows only unique values A composite index on the tabid and grantee columns allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 27 SYSCOLDEPEND SYSCOLDEPEND The syscoldepend system catalog table tracks the table columns specified in check and NOT NULL constraints Because a check constraint can involve more than one column ina table the syscoldepend table can contain multiple rows for each check constraint one row is created for each column involved in the constraint The syscoldepend table has the following columns Column Type Explanation constrid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the constraint tabid INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the table colno SMALLINT Column number within the table A composite index on the constrid tabid and colno columns allows only unique values A composite index on the tabid and colno columns allows duplicate values See also the syscheckudrdep system catalog table in SYSCHECKUDRDEP on page 1 25 which lists every check constraint that is referenced by a user defined routine See also the sysnewdepend table in SYSNEWDEPEND on page 1 51 which describes the column dependencies of generalized key indexes See also the sysreferences table in SYSREFERENCES on page 1 63 which describes dependencies of referential constraints 1 28 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSCOLUMNS SYSCOLUMNS The syscolumns system catalog table describes each column in the databas
354. o et te ch ab ot Ee A Ms BE ome A An 2 25 INTEGER se 2 iria amp ohn Be od Gta Ada SY 2 26 INTERVAT 0 000 2 cite oe Aca de A a e AE ae a 2 26 LISTO e sar ew ee a Gea A aS aa a Ge e 2 29 Table of Contents v LVARCHAR MONEY p s MULTISET e NCHAR n NUMERIC p s NVARCHAR m r Opaque REAL Row Named Row Unnamed SERIAL n SERIAL8 SET e SMALLFLOAT SMALLINT TEXT VARCHAR m r Built In Data Types Large Object Data Types Time Data Types Extended Data Types Complex Data Types DISTINCT Data Types OPAQUE Data Types Data Type Casting and Conversion Using Built in Casts Using User Defined Casts Determining Which Cast to Apply Casts for Distinct Types What Extended Data Types Can Be Cast Operator Precedence vi IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference 2 31 2 31 2 32 2 34 2 34 2 34 2 34 2 35 2 35 2 37 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 43 2 43 2 44 2 46 2 48 2 48 2 51 2 57 2 58 2 61 2 61 2 62 2 63 2 66 2 67 2 68 2 69 2 70 Chapter 3 Environment Variables In This Chapter Types of Environment Variables Where to Set Environment Variables on UNIX Where to Set Environment Variables on Windows Using Environment Variables on UNIX Setting Environment Variables in a Configuration File Setting Environment Variables at Login Time Syntax for Setting Environment Variables Unsetting Environment Variables Modifying an Environment Variable Setting Vi
355. o the front of the C shell PATH environment variable use the following command setenv PATH usr informix bin PATH Rather than entering an explicit pathname you can use the value of the INFORMIXDIR environment variable represented as INFORMIXDIR as the following example shows setenv INFORMIXDIR usr informix setenv PATH SINFORMIXDIR bin PATH You might prefer to use this version to ensure that your PATH entry does not conflict with the search path that was set in INFORMIXDIR and so that you do not have to reset PATH whenever you change INFORMIXDIR IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Viewing Your Environment Variable Settings If you set the PATH environment variable on the C shell command line you might need to include braces with the existing INFORMIXDIR and PATH as the following command shows setenv PATH INFORMIXDIR bin PATH For more information about how to set and modify environment variables refer to the manuals for your operating system Viewing Your Environment Variable Settings After you have installed one or more Informix products enter the following command at the system prompt to view your current environment settings UNIX Version Command BSD UNIX env UNIX System V printenv Checking Environment Variables with the chkenv Utility The chkenv utility checks the validity of shared or private environment configuration files It validates the names of the environment variables in t
356. object mode of database objects The types of database objects that are listed in this table are indexes triggers and constraints Every index trigger and constraint in the database has a corresponding row in the sysobjstate table if a user creates the object Indexes that the database server creates on the system catalog tables are not listed in the sysobjstate table because their object mode cannot be changed The sysobjstate table has the following columns Column Type Explanation objtype CHAR 1 Code for the type of database object C Constraint I Index T Trigger owner CHAR 32 Name of the owner of the database object name VARCHAR 128 Name of the database object tabid INTEGER Identifying code of table on which the object is defined state CHAR 1 The current state object mode of the database object This value can be one of the following codes D Disabled E Enabled F Filtering with no integrity violation errors G Filtering with integrity violation errors A composite index on the objtype name owner and tabid columns allows only unique combinations of values A simple index on the tabid column allows duplicate values 1 52 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSOPCLASSES SYSOPCLASSES The sysopclasses system catalog table contains information about operator classes associated with secondary access methods It contains one row for each operator class that has been defined in the database The sysop
357. ocumentation Informix Dynamic Server documentation is provided in a variety of formats m Online manuals The Informix OnLine Documentation Web site at http www informix com answers contains manuals that Informix provides for your use This Web site enables you to print chapters or entire books m Online help Informix provides online help with each graphical user interface GUI that displays information about those interfaces and the functions that they perform Use the help facilities that each GUI provides to display the online help This facility can provide context sensitive help an error message ref erence language syntax and more To order a printed manual call 1 800 331 1763 or send email to moreinfo informix com Provide the following information when you place your order a The documentation that you need a The quantity that you need a Your name address and telephone number Documentation notes Documentation notes which contain additions and corrections to the manuals are also located at the OnLine Documentation site at http www informix com answers Examine these files before you begin using your database server IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference UNIX Additional Documentation m Release notes Release notes contain vital information about appli cation and performance issues These files are located at http www informix com informix services techinfo This site is a password co
358. of SQL statements that you can use to grant and revoke permissions and to lock tables The subset of SQL statements sometimes called data definition language or DDL to create alter drop and rename data objects including databases tables views synonyms triggers sequences and user defined routines Glossary 13 data dictionary data distribution data integrity data integrity statements data manipulation statements data partitioning data replication data restriction data type database Database Administrator database application database environment The set of tables that keeps track of the structure of the database and the inventory of database objects This is also called the system catalog Each database that a database server supports has its own system catalog A mapping of the data values within a column into a set of equivalence cate gories equivalent to a histogram or to a frequency distribution You can use the UPDATE STATISTICS statement specifying the MEDIUM or HIGH keyword options to create data distributions The process of ensuring that data corruption does not occur when multiple users simultaneously try to alter the same data Locking constraints and transaction logging are used to control data integrity SQL statements that you use to control transactions and audits Data integrity statements also include statements for repairing and recovering tables The SQL statements
359. of elements all of 2 29 the same data type e allows duplicate values LVARCHAR Stores variable length data that can exceed 255 bytes 2 30 MULTISET e Stores a non ordered collection of values with elements 2 32 all of the same data type e allows duplicate values 1 of 2 Description of Data Types Data Type Explanation Page Opaque Stores a user defined data type whose internal structureis 2 34 inaccessible to the database server ROW Named Stores a named row type 2 35 ROW Unnamed Stores an unnamed row type 2 37 SERIAL8 Stores large sequential integers in same range as INT8 2 40 SET e Stores a non ordered collection of elements all of the 2 41 same data type e does not allow duplicate values 2 of 2 For information about Informix internal data types that SQL statements support such as IMPEX IMPEXBIN and SENDRECV see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types Description of Data Types This section describes the data types that Informix database servers support Icons mark the data types that only Dynamic Server supports BLOB The BLOB data type stores any kind of binary data in random access chunks called sbspaces Binary data typically consists of saved spreadsheets program load modules digitized voice patterns and so on The database server performs no interpretation on the contents of a BLOB column A BLOB column can be up to 4 terabytes in length The term smart large object re
360. of the column Bit Value Significance When Bit Is Set 0x0100 NULL values are not allowed 0x0200 Value is from a host variable 0x0400 FLOAT to DECIMAL for networked database server 0x0800 DISTINCT data type 0x1000 Named ROW type 0x2000 DISTINCT type from LVARCHAR base type 0x4000 DISTINCT type from BOOLEAN base type 0x8000 Collection is processed on client system For example the coltype value 4118 for named ROW types is the decimal representation of the hexadecimal value 0x1016 which is the same as the hexadecimal coltype value for an unnamed ROW type 0 x 016 with the named ROW type bit set The file SINFORMIXDIR incl esql sqltypes h contains additional information about syscolumns coltype codes NOT NULL Constraints Similarly the coltype value is incremented by 256 if the column does not allow NULL values To determine the data type for such columns subtract 256 from the value and evaluate the remainder based on the possible coltype values For example if the coltype value is 262 subtracting 256 from 262 leaves a remainder of 6 indicating that the column has a SERIAL data type 1 30 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSCOLUMNS Storing Column Data Type The database server stores the coltype value as bitmap as listed in SYSCOLUMNS on page 1 29 This section provides additional information on coltype codes The BOOLEAN BLOB CLOB and LVARCHAR data types are implemented by the database server as built in
361. olon cast operator Explicit Casts Explicit casts unlike implicit casts or built in casts are never invoked automatically by the database server Users must invoke them explicitly with the CAST AS keywords or with the double colon cast operator Explicit casts do not allow you to convert a user defined data type to a built in data type or vice versa IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Determining Which Cast to Apply Determining Which Cast to Apply The database server uses the following rules to determine which cast to apply in a particular situation To compare two built in types the database server automatically invokes the appropriate built in casts The database server applies only one implicit cast per operand If two or more casts are needed to convert the operand to the desired type the user must explicitly invoke the additional casts In the following example the literal value 5 55 is implicitly cast to DECIMAL and is then explicitly cast to MONEY and finally to yen CREATE DISTINCT TYPE yen AS MONEY INSERT INTO currency_tab VALUES 5 55 MONEY yen To compare a DISTINCT type to its source type the user must explicitly cast one type to the other To compare a DISTINCT type to a type other than its source the database server looks for an implicit cast between the source type and the desired type If neither cast is registered the user must invoke an explicit cast between the DISTINCT
362. ombine separately compiled program modules usually into an executable program Compare with compile and execute A collection data type created with the LIST constructor in which elements are ordered and duplicates are allowed The representation of a data type value in a format that the database server accepts in data entry operations For example 234 is a literal integer and abcd is a literal character A hardware determined storage method in which the least significant byte of a multibyte number has the lowest address See also big endian The information required to load data into a relational database using the HPL This information includes the format map filter device array project and special options For Extended Parallel Server a replica of a table on a local coserver that is copied to multiple coservers This allows faster access to the data for OLTP transactions connected to those coservers because you do not have to send the data across the communication links between coservers A connection between the client application and database server that uses a network connection even though the client application and the database server are on the same computer A variable or identifier whose scope of reference is only within the routine in which it is defined Compare with global variable A set of Informix files that specify the linguistic conventions for a country region culture or language Informix products pro
363. onfiguration parameter 3 71 Staging area blobspace 3 68 Standard Graphic Markup Language SGML 2 14 START DATABASE statement 3 42 STAT data type 1 38 state table in stores_demo database A 8 state table in superstores_demo database B 19 Statement cache 3 92 Statements of SQL ALTER OPTICAL CLUSTER 1 55 ALTER TABLE 1 12 1 71 CLOSE 3 83 CONNECT 3 42 3 65 3 69 CREATE ACCESS METHOD 1 18 CREATE AGGREGATE 1 17 CREATE CAST 1 23 2 66 CREATE DATABASE 3 42 CREATE DISTINCT TYPE 1 79 2 24 B 22 CREATE EXTERNAL TABLE 1 40 1 41 CREATE FUNCTION 3 80 CREATE IMPLICIT CAST B 22 CREATE INDEX 1 7 1 46 1 48 1 51 1 64 1 71 3 53 CREATE OPAQUE TYPE 1 79 2 35 CREATE OPERATOR CLASS 1 53 CREATE OPTICAL CLUSTER 1 54 1 55 CREATE PROCEDURE 1 57 CREATE ROLE 1 65 1 76 CREATE ROUTINE FROM 1 65 CREATE ROW TYPE 1 79 2 36 CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION 1 6 CREATE SYNONYM 1 66 CREATE TABLE 1 36 1 63 1 67 CREATE TRIGGER 1 75 CREATE VIEW 1 76 DATABASE 3 43 DECLARE 3 83 DELETE 1 13 1 62 1 77 DESCRIBE 3 61 DROP CAST B 22 DROP DATABASE 3 43 DROP FUNCTION 1 61 DROP INDEX 1 71 DROP OPTICAL CLUSTER 1 55 DROP PROCEDURE 1 61 DROP ROUTINE 1 61 DROP ROW TYPE 2 36 DROP TYPE 2 24 2 35 DROP VIEW 1 81 FETCH 3 83 GET DIAGNOSTICS 1 39 GRANT 1 42 1 65 1 69 1 81 INSERT 1 77 2 60 3 26 3 34 Index 15 A BC D E F GH LOAD 2 11 2 44 3 27 3 35 OPEN 3 83 PREPARE 1 71 REVOKE 1 68 1 76 SELECT 1 12 1 37 1 62 3 47 SET OPTIMIZATION 3 84
364. ontains the following columns Column table_schema table_name column_name ordinal_position data_type char_max_length numeric_precision numeric_prec_radix Data Type VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 INTEGER VARCHAR 254 INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER Explanation Name of owner of table Name of table or view Name of the column in the table or view Position of the column within its table The ordinal_position value is a sequential number that starts at 1 for the first column This is an Informix extension to XPG4 Name of the data type of the column such as CHARACTER or DECIMAL Maximum length in bytes for character data types NULL otherwise Total number of digits allowed for exact numeric data types DECIMAL INTEGER MONEY and SMALLINT and the number of digits of mantissa precision for approximate data types FLOAT and SMALLFLOAT and NULL for all other data types The value is machine dependent for FLOAT and SMALLFLOAT Uses one of the following values 2 approximate data types FLOAT and SMALLFLOAT 10 exact numeric data types DECIMAL INTEGER MONEY and SMALLINT Null for all other data types 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 83 Structure of the Information Schema Views 1 84 Column numeric_scale datetime_precision is_nullable remarks Data Type INTEGER INTEGER VARCHAR 3 VARCHAR 254 Explanation Number of significant digits to the rig
365. operties column definitions constraints trig gers from a supertable above it in the table hierarchy and can add additional properties A named row type that inherits all representation data fields and behavior routines from a supertype above it in the type hierarchy and can add additional fields and routines The number of fields in a subtype is always greater than or equal to the number of fields in its supertype A typed table whose properties constraints storage options triggers are inherited by a subtable beneath it in the table hierarchy The scope of a query on a supertable is the supertable and its subtables A named row type whose representation data fields and behavior routines is inherited by a subtype below it in the type hierarchy Glossary 49 support function support routine symmetric multiprocessing system synonym sysmaster database system call system catalog system defined cast system defined hash fragmentation system descriptor area See aggregate support function opaque type support function and operator class support function See support function A system composed of multiple computers that are connected to a single high speed communication subsystem An SMP has fewer computers than an MPP system and cannot be partitioned into nodes Compare with massively parallel processing system A name that is assigned to a table view or sequence and that can be used in pl
366. or field with spaces or blanks when the input is shorter than the field 36 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference page parallel database query parallel processing platform parallelism parameter parent child relationship parent table participating coserver partition pattern PDQ PDQ priority The physical unit of disk storage and basic unit of memory storage that the database server uses to read from and write to Informix databases Page size is fixed for a particular operating system and platform A page is always entirely contained within a chunk See also home page and remainder page The execution of SQL queries in parallel rather than sequential order The tasks a query requires are distributed across several processors This type of distribution enhances database performance A parallel processing platform is a set of independent computers that oper ate in parallel and communicate over a high speed network bus or intercon nect See also symmetric multiprocessing system and massively parallel processing system Ability of an Informix database server to process a task in parallel by break ing the task into subtasks and processing the subtasks simultaneously thus improving performance A variable that is given a value for a specified application In the signature of a user defined routine a parameter serves as a placeholder for an argument The parameter specifies the data type of the value that the u
367. or messages 14 Messages chaining 3 82 error in syserrors 1 39 optimized transfers 3 82 reducing requests 3 83 trace message template 1 73 warning in syserrors 1 39 Microsoft C compiler 3 63 MINUTE keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 18 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 MITRACE_OFF configuration parameter 1 72 1 73 mi_collection_card function 2 30 2 33 2 42 mi_db_error_raise function 1 39 mkdir utility 3 37 MODERATE INTEG keywords ALTER TABLE statement 2 50 CREATE TABLE statement 2 50 Modifiers CLASS 1 60 COSTFUNC 1 60 HANDLESNULLS 1 60 INTERNAL 1 60 ITERATOR 1 60 NEGATOR 1 60 NOT VARIANT 1 60 PARALLELIZABLE 1 60 Index 11 A BC D E F GH SELCONST 1 60 STACK 1 60 VARIANT 1 60 MODIFY NEXT SIZE keywords 1 12 MONEY data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 31 display format 3 38 international money formats 2 32 length syscolumns 1 32 MONTH keyword DATETIME qualifier 2 17 INTERVAL qualifier 2 27 Multibyte characters CHAR data type 2 14 CLOB data type 2 15 TEXT data type 2 45 VARCHAR data type 2 47 MULTISET data type constructor 2 60 description 2 32 N Named ROW data type casting permitted 2 69 defining 2 35 description 2 35 equivalence 2 36 inheritance 1 50 2 36 typed tables 2 37 See also ROW type NCHAR data type N N N N N N N 12 collation order 2 34 conversion to CHAR 3 41 description 2 34 multibyte characters 2 34 egator function 1 60 ested dot nota
368. or more information on the above mentioned SQL statements see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax For information on how to create opaque types and an example of an opaque type see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types REAL The REAL data type is a synonym for SMALLFLOAT Row Named A named row type is declared by its name That identifier must be unique within the schema An unnamed row type is a row type that contains fields but has no user defined name Use a named row type if you want to use type inheritance For more information see Row Data Types on page 2 60 Defining Named Row Types You must define a named row type in the database Definitions for named row types are stored in the sysxtdtypes system catalog table The fields of a row type can be any data type The fields of a row type that are TEXT or BYTE type can be used in typed tables only If you want to assign a row type to a column its elements cannot be TEXT or BYTE data types Data Types 2 35 Row Named In general the data type of the field of a row type can be any of the following types A built in type except for the TEXT or BYTE data types A collection type LIST MULTISET or SET A distinct type A row type An opaque type The following SQL statements maintain the definitions of named row types in the database m The CREATE ROW TYPE statement adds a named row type to the database m The DROP ROW TYPE statemen
369. or sequence The syssynonyms table contains a row for every synonym that is defined in the database and has the following columns Column Type Explanation owner CHAR 32 IDS Name of the owner of the synonym CHAR 8 XPS synname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of the synonym CHAR 18 XPS created DATE Date when the synonym was created tabid INTEGER Identifying code of a table view or sequence A composite index on the owner and synonym columns allows only unique values The tabid column is indexed and allows duplicate values SYSSYNTABLE The syssyntable system catalog table outlines the mapping between each public synonym and the database object a table view or sequence that it represents It contains one row for each entry in the systables table that has a tabtype value of s The syssyntable table has the following columns Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Identifying code of the public synonym servername VARCHAR 128 IDS Name ofan external database server CHAR 18 XPS dbname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of an external database CHAR 18 XPS 1 of 2 1 66 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSTABAMDATA Column Type Explanation owner CHAR 32 IDS Name of the owner of an external object CHAR 8 XPS tabname VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of an external table view or CHAR 18 XPS sequence btabid INTEGER Identifying code of a base table view or sequence 2 of 2 If you define a synonym for a table that is in your current database
370. osite index Column idxname owner tabid idxtype clustered levels leaves nunique clust nrows SYSINDICES The sysindices system catalog table describes the indexes in the database It contains one row for each index that is defined in the database The sysindices table has the following columns Type VARCHAR 128 CHAR 32 INTEGER CHAR 1 CHAR 1 SMALLINT INTEGER INTEGER INTEGER FLOAT 1 48 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference on the idxname owner and tabid columns allows only unique values Explanation Name of index Name of owner of index user informix for system catalog tables and username for database tables Unique identifying code of table Index type U Unique D Duplicates allowed Clustered or nonclustered index C Clustered Number of tree levels Number of leaves Number of unique keys in the first column Degree of clustering smaller numbers correspond to greater clustering The maximum value is the number of rows in the table and the minimum value is the number of data pages in the table This column is blank until the UPDATE STATISTICS statement is run on the table Estimated number of rows in the table zero until UPDATE STATISTICS is run on the table 1 of 2 Column Type indexkeys INDEX KEYARRAY amid INTEGER amparam LVARCHAR SYSINDICES Explanation This column has a maximum of three fields displayed in the following form
371. otes 13 Documentation notes program item 14 A BC D E F GH Documentation types of 12 documentation notes 13 machine notes 13 release notes 13 Dollar sign 2 32 3 38 Double data type of C 2 24 DOUBLE PRECISION data type See FLOAT data type Double precision floating point number 2 24 DROP CAST statement B 22 DROP DATABASE statement 3 42 DROP FUNCTION statement 1 61 DROP INDEX statement 1 71 DROP OPTICAL CLUSTER statement 1 55 DROP PROCEDURE statement 1 61 DROP ROUTINE statement 1 61 DROP ROW TYPE statement 2 36 DROP TYPE statement 2 24 2 35 DROP VIEW statement 1 81 E EBCDIC collation 1 41 1 86 Editor DBEDIT setting 3 35 EMACS text editor 3 36 Empty set 2 60 Encryption 3 76 END configuration parameter 3 81 Enterprise Replication 1 6 env utility 3 11 ENVIGNORE environment variable description 3 8 3 54 relation to chkenv utility 3 12 Environment configuration file debugging with chkenv 3 12 setting environment variables in UNIX 3 6 3 8 Environment registry key 3 13 Environment variable AC_CONFIG 3 24 AFDEBUG 3 24 C8BITLEVEL 3 19 CLIENT_LOCALE 3 19 3 33 CPFIRST 3 25 JK L MN OP QR S DBACCNOIGN 3 26 DBANSIWARN 3 27 DBBLOBBUF 3 28 DBCENTURY 2 16 3 28 DBDATE 2 16 3 32 DBDELIMITER 3 35 DBEDIT 3 35 DBFLTMASK 3 36 DBLANG 3 37 DBMONEY 2 32 3 38 DBNLS 3 40 DBONPLOAD 3 41 DBPATH 3 42 DBPRINT 3 44 DBREMOTECMD 3 45 DBSPACETEMP 3 46 DBTEMP 3 48 DBTIME 2 20 3 48 DBUPSPACE 3 52 DB_LO
372. our statement The path always approaches elements from the left and continues to the right except in the case of separators in loops For separators in loops the path approaches counterclockwise from the right Unless otherwise noted at least one blank character separates syntax elements Sample Code Conventions Examples of SOL code occur throughout this manual Except where noted the code is not specific to any single Informix application development tool If only SQL statements are listed in the example they are not delimited by semicolons For instance you might see the code in the following example CONNECT TO stores_demo DELETE FROM customer WHERE customer_num 121 COMMIT WORK DISCONNECT CURRENT To use this SQL code for a specific product you must apply the syntax rules for that product For example if you are using DB Access you must delimit multiple statements with semicolons If you are using an SQL API you must use EXEC SQL at the start of each statement and a semicolon or other appro priate delimiter at the end of the statement Tip Ellipsis points in a code example indicate that more code would be added in a full application but it is not necessary to show it to describe the concept being discussed For detailed directions on using SQL statements for a particular application development tool or SQL API see the manual for your product Introduction 11 Additional Documentation 12 Additional D
373. outine or in an external language external routine that the database server supports See Informix user ID See Informix user password See Informix user ID See Informix user password User threads include session threads called sqlexec threads that are the pri mary threads that the database server runs to service client applications User threads also include a thread to service requests from the onmode utility threads for recovery and page cleaner threads See thread The identifier for a location in memory that stores the value of a program object whose value can change during program execution Compare with con stant macro and pointer A user defined function that might return different values when passed the same arguments A variant function can contain SQL statements Compare with nonvariant function A dynamically controlled picture of the contents in a database that allows a programmer to determine what information the user sees and manipulates A view represents a virtual table based on a specified SELECT statement A special table that holds rows that fail to satisfy constraints and unique index requirements during data manipulation operations on base tables You use the START VIOLATIONS TABLE statement to create a violations table and associate it with a base table Glossary 55 virtual column virtual column index virtual processor virtual table VLDB warning white space wide character A de
374. pensate for an increase in query size by adding a corre sponding amount of computer resources so that processing time does not also increase Glossary 43 scan thread schema scope of reference scroll cursor secondary access method secure auditing select select cursor selection selective index selectivity self join A database server thread that is assigned the task of reading rows from a table When a query is executed in parallel the database server allocates mul tiple scan threads to perform the query in parallel The structure of a database or a table The schema for a table lists the names of the columns their data types and where applicable the lengths indexing and other information about the structure of the table The portion of a routine or application program where an identifier can be accessed Three possible scopes exist local applies only in a single statement block modular applies throughout a single module and global applies throughout the entire program See also local variable and global variable A cursor created with the SCROLL keyword that allows you to fetch rows of the active set in any sequence An access method whose routines access an index with such operations as inserting deleting updating and scanning See also operator class and pri mary access method Not for Extended Parallel Server A facility of Informix database servers that lets a database server admini
375. pes 2 21 DECIMAL DECIMAL Storage The database server uses one byte of disk storage to store two digits of a decimal number plus an additional byte to store the exponent and sign The significant digits to the left of the decimal and the significant digits to the right of the decimal are stored in separate groups of bytes How the database server stores DECIMAL numbers is illustrated in the following example If you specify DECIMAL 6 3 the data type consists of three significant digits in the integral part and three significant digits in the fractional part for instance 123 456 The three digits to the left of the decimal are stored on 2 bytes where one of the bytes only holds a single digit and the three digits to the right of the decimal are stored on another 2 bytes as Figure 2 7 illustrates The exponent byte is not shown With the additional byte required for the exponent and sign DECIMAL 6 3 requires a total of 5 bytes of storage Figure 2 7 Schematic That Illustrates the Storage of Digits in a Decimal Value Significant digits to the left of Significant digits to the right of decimal decimal You can use the following formulas rounded down to a whole number of bytes to calculate the byte storage N for a decimal data type where N includes the byte that is required to store the exponent and the sign If the scale is odd N precision 4 2 If the scale is even N precision 3 2 For exampl
376. ple both the TAB and blank might be defined as space characters in one locale but certain combi nations of the CTRL key and another character might be defined as space char acters in a different locale A form of a code set that involves normalizing the size of each multibyte character so that each character is the same size This size must be equal to or greater than the largest character that an operating system can support and it must match the size of an integer data type that the C compiler can scale Some examples of an integer data type that the C compiler can scale are short integer short int integer int or long integer long int 56 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference wildcard window WORM X Open X Open Portability Guide XPG zoned decimal A special symbol representing any character or any string of zero or more characters In SQL for example you can use the asterisk question mark percent sign and underscore _ as wildcard characters in some contexts Asterisk and question mark are also UNIX wildcards A rectangular area on the screen in which you can take actions without leav ing the context of the background program Acronym for Write Once Read Many optical media When a bit of data is writ ten to a WORM platter a permanent mark is made on that optical platter An independent consortium that produces and develops specifications and standards for open systems products and t
377. pwards in the tree until you reach a parent node that needs no change An option to specify whether a user who requests a lock on an already locked object waits until the object is released to receive the lock or immediately receives an error or waits for some span of time before receiving an error A concurrency feature temporarily limiting access to an object database table page or row to prevent conflicting interactions among concurrent pro cesses An exclusive lock restricts read and write access to only one user a shared lock allows read only access to other users An update lock begins as a shared lock but is upgraded to an exclusive lock after a row is changed The size of a locked object The size can be a database table page or row An allocation of disk space that the database server manages that contains records of all changes that were performed on a database during the period when the log was active It is used to roll back transactions recover from sys tem failures and restore databases from archives See also physical log The process of identifying oneself to a computer See Informix user password See Informix user ID Glossary 31 logslice LVARCHAR macro mantissa map massively parallel processing system megabyte Memory Grant Manager MGM menu MGM mirroring MODE ANSI monochrome MPP A dbslice whose contents are comprised solely of logical log files The logi cal
378. r privileges are granted on the Information Schema views they cannot be updated You can query the Information Schema views as you would query any other table or view in the database System Catalog Tables 1 81 Structure of the Information Schema Views 1 82 Structure of the Information Schema Views The following views are described in this section tables columns sql_languages server_info In order to accept long identifier names most of the columns in the views are defined as VARCHAR data types with large maximum sizes The tables Information Schema View The tables Information Schema view contains one row for each table to which you have access It contains the following columns Column Data Type Explanation table_schema VARCHAR 128 Name of owner of table table_name VARCHAR 128 Name of table or view table_type VARCHAR 128 BASE TABLE for table or VIEW for view remarks VARCHAR 255 Reserved for future use The visible rows in the tables view depend on your privileges For example if you have one or more privileges on a table such as Insert Delete Select References Alter Index or Update on one or more columns or if privileges are granted to PUBLIC you see the row that describes that table IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Structure of the Information Schema Views The columns Information Schema View The columns Information Schema view contains one row for each accessible column It c
379. r collection data type The data type of the elements in a collection The SQL statements that are placed within some other host language For example Informix supports embedded SQL in C The default object mode of database objects When a constraint index or trig ger is in this mode the database server recognizes the existence of the object and takes the object into consideration while executing data manipulation statements See also object mode The format in which data appears within a client application as literal strings or character variables End user formats are useful for data types whose data base format is different from the format to which users are accustomed A user defined routine UDR that performs a task within an SQL statement that the existing built in routines do not perform Examples of tasks include encapsulating multiple SQL statements creating trigger actions and restrict ing who can access database objects Glossary 19 environment variable error log error message error trapping escape character escape key ESQL C Smart Large Object API exception exception handling exclusive access exclusive lock executable file execute explicit cast A variable that the operating system maintains for each user and makes available to all programs that the user runs A file that receives error information whenever a program runs A message that is associated with a usually negative
380. r defined routines Developers use the tracing facility by calling the appropriate DataBlade API routines within their code To create a new trace class insert a row directly into the systraceclasses table By default all users can view this table but only users with the DBA privilege can modify it The database cannot support tracing unless the MITRACE_OFF configuration parameter is undefined A unique index on the name column requires each trace class to have a unique name The database server assigns to each class a unique sequential code The index on this classid column also allows only unique values 1 72 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSTRACEMSGS SYSTRACEMSGS The systracemsgs system catalog table stores internationalized trace messages that you can use in debugging user defined routines The systracemsgs table has the following columns Column Type Explanation name VARCHAR 128 Name of the message msgid SERIAL Identifying code of the message template locale CHAR 36 Locale with which this version of the message is associated for example en_us 8859 1 seqno SMALLINT Reserved for future use message VARCHAR 255 The message text DataBlade module developers create a trace message by inserting a row directly into the systracemsgs table Once a message is created the devel opment team can specify it either by name or by msgid code using trace statements that the DataBlade API provides To create a
381. r functions have corresponding operators suchas plus and You can overload an operator function so that it handles a user defined data type See also routine overloading An amount of space on an optical disc that is reserved for storing a group of logically related simple large objects or smart large objects A group of optical discs theoretically unlimited in number A removable optical disc that stores data in an optical storage subsystem The SQL statements that you use to control optical clustering One side of a removable Write Once Read Many WORM optical disc An asymmetric joining of a dominant outer table and a subservient table in a query where the values for the outer part of the join are preserved even though no matching rows exist in the subservient table Any dominant table rows that do not have a matching row in the subservient table contain NULL values in the columns selected from the subservient table The process by which Optical Subsystem migrates TEXT or BYTE data from the Dynamic Server environment to an optical storage subsystem The result that the computer produces in response to a query or a request for a report See routine overloading A class of SPL routines that any user can create who has Resource database privileges A storage format that represents either two decimal digits or a sign and one decimal digit in each byte Usually to fill empty places at the beginning or end of a line string
382. r join input input parameter insert cursor installation interactive international ization interquery parallelization interrupt A user ID password that must be valid on all computer systems operating systems involved in the client s database access When the client specifies an explicit user ID most computer systems require the Informix user password The process that allows an object to acquire the properties of another object Inheritance allows for incremental modification so that an object can inherit a general set of properties and add properties that are specific to itself See also type inheritance and table inheritance To prepare for execution To initialize a variable you assign it a starting value To initialize the database server you start its operation The process by which Optical Subsystem migrates TEXT and BYTE data from the optical storage subsystem into the Dynamic Server environment See simple join The information that is received from an external source for example from the keyboard a file or another program and processed by a program A placeholder within a prepared SQL statement that indicates a value is to be provided at the time the statement is executed A cursor for insert operations associated with an INSERT statement Allows bulk insert data to be buffered in memory and written to disk The loading of software from some magnetic medium tape cartridge or floppy disk
383. r table as the following example shows idxname c_num_ix state_ix owner maryl maryl tabid 101 101 idxtype U D clustered partl 1 8 part2 0 0 part3 0 0 part4 0 0 part5 0 0 part6 0 0 part7 0 0 part8 0 0 part9 0 0 part10 0 0 partl1 0 0 part12 0 0 part13 0 0 partl4 0 0 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 11 Accessing the System Catalog 1 12 idxname c_num_ix state_ix partl5 0 0 partl6 0 0 levels leaves nunique clust 2 of 2 In this table the idxtype column identifies whether the created index requires unique values U or accepts duplicate values D For example the c_num_ix index on the customer customer_num column is unique Accessing the System Catalog Normal user access to the system catalog is read only Users with Connect or Resource privileges cannot alter the catalog but they can access data in the system catalog tables on a read only basis using standard SELECT statements For example the following SELECT statement displays all the table names and corresponding tabid codes of user created tables in the database SELECT tabname tabid FROM systables WHERE tabid gt 99 When you use DB Access only the tables that you created are displayed To display the system catalog tables enter the following statement SELECT tabname tabid FROM systables WHERE tabid lt 100 You can use SUBSTR or SUBSTRING function to select only part of a source string To display the list of tables in columns en
384. racters or to execute a command immediately press RETURN after the entry When you are instructed to type the text or to press other keys no RETURN is required Introduction 7 Icon Conventions Icon Conventions different types of icons Comment Icons describes This informa Icon Label Warning Throughout the documentation you will find text that is identified by several This section describes these icons Comment icons identify three types of information as the following table tion always appears in italics Description Identifies paragraphs that contain vital instructions cautions or critical information Important Identifies paragraphs that contain significant information about the feature or operation that is being described Tip a gt Icon Identifies paragraphs that offer additional details or shortcuts for the functionality that is being described Feature Product and Platform Icons Feature product and platform icons identify paragraphs that contain feature specific product specific or platform specific information Description Identifies information that is specific to C user defined routines UDRs it Identifies information that is specific to DB Access E C 8 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Identifies information that is specific to Informix ESQL C 1 of 2 Icon Conventions Icon D
385. rage determines The term simple large object refers to the TEXT and BYTE data types TEXT columns typically store memos manual chapters business documents program source files and so on In the default U S English locale data objects of type TEXT can contain a combination of printable ASCII characters and the following control characters m Tab CTRL I m New line CTRL J m New page CTRL L You can store retrieve update or delete the contents of a TEXT column You cannot however use TEXT operands in arithmetic or string expressions nor can you assign literals to TEXT columns with the SET clause of the UPDATE statement You also cannot use TEXT items in any of the following ways With aggregate functions With the IN clause With the MATCHES or LIKE clauses With the GROUP BY clause With the ORDER BY clause You can use TEXT operands in Boolean expressions only when you are testing for NULL values with the IS NULL or IS NOT NULL operators You can insert data into TEXT columns in the following ways m With the dbload or onload utilities m With the LOAD statement DB Access m From TEXT host variables Informix ESQL C IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS TEXT You cannot use a quoted text string number or any other actual value to insert or update TEXT columns When you select a TEXT column you can choose to receive all or part of it To retrieve it all use the regular syntax for
386. ram item 14 Remote database server 3 56 Remote shell 3 45 Remote tape devices 3 45 Repeatable read 3 81 Replica identifier 1 44 Resource contention 3 86 Resource privilege 1 12 1 76 REVOKE statement 1 68 Right to left locales 2 12 Role INF_ROLE_SEP setting 3 73 sysroleauth data 1 65 sysusers data 1 76 Role separation 3 73 Round robin fragmentation 1 44 Routine DataBlade API routine 1 72 DATETIME formatting 3 48 owner 1 58 privileges 1 56 protected 1 61 Stored Procedure Language SPL 2 60 syserrors data 1 39 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze syslangauth data 1 50 sysprocauth data 1 56 sysprocbody data 1 57 sysprocedures data 1 58 sysprocplan data 1 62 sysroutinelangs data 1 65 systraceclasses data 1 72 systracemsgs data 1 73 See also User defined routine Routine identifier description 1 58 ROW lock mode 1 70 3 57 ROW type 2 60 casting permitted 2 69 equivalence 2 36 fields 1 21 2 60 inheritance 1 50 2 36 inserting values 2 38 named 2 35 sysattrtypes data 1 21 sysxtddesc data 1 78 sysxtdtypes data 1 78 1 79 unnamed 2 37 Rowids 1 19 RTNPARAMTYPES data type 1 59 R tree index 3 53 Runtime warnings DBANSIWARN 3 27 S sales table in sales_demo database B 5 sales_demo database customer table columns B 3 description B 3 geography table columns B 4 product table columns B 4 sales table columns B 5 time table columns B 6 sales_rep table in superstores_demo database B 1
387. rch path for the libraries On Solaris systems set LD_LIBRARY_PATH On AIX systems set LIBPATH Environment Variables 3 91 STMT_CACHE rps STMT_CACHE Use the STMT_CACHE environment variable to control the use of the shared statement cache on a session This feature can reduce memory consumption and can speed query processing among different user sessions Valid STMT_CACHE values are 1 and 0 setenv STMT_CACHE 1 enables the SQL statement cache 0 disables the SOL statement cache Set the STMT_CACHE environment variable for applications that do not use the SET STMT_CACHE statement to control the use of the SOL statement cache By default a statement cache of 512 kilobytes is enabled but this feature can be disabled or set to a non default size through the STMT_CACHE parameter of the onconfig std file or by the SET STMT_CACHE statement This environment variable has no effect if the SOL statement cache is disabled through the configuration file setting Executing the SET STMT_CACHE statement in the application overrides the STMT_CACHE setting TERM The TERM environment variable is used for terminal handling It lets DB Access and other character based applications recognize and commu nicate with the terminal that you are using setenv TERM type type specifies the terminal type 3 92 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference UNIX setenv
388. re adding an INTERVAL value to a DATETIME value the order of values is unimportant however if you are subtracting the DATETIME value must come first Adding or subtracting a positive INTERVAL value simply moves the DATETIME result forward or backward in time The expression shown in the following example moves the date ahead by three years and five months DATETIME 1994 8 1 YEAR TO DAY INTERVAL 3 5 YEAR TO MONTH Result DATETIME 1998 01 01 YEAR TO DAY Important Evaluate the logic of your addition or subtraction Remember that months can have 28 29 30 or 31 days and that years can have 365 or 366 days Data Types 2 53 Time Data Types In most situations the database server automatically adjusts the calculation when the initial values do not have the same precision In certain situations however you must explicitly adjust the precision of one value to perform the calculation If the INTERVAL value you are adding or subtracting has fields that are not included in the DATETIME value you must use the EXTEND function to explicitly extend the field qualifier of the DATETIME value For more information on the EXTEND function see the Expression segment in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax For example you cannot subtract an INTERVAL MINUTE TO MINUTE value from the DATETIME value in the previous example that has a YEAR TO DAY field qualifier You can however use the EXTEND function to perform this calculation as the fol
389. red object file on a Windows system See also shared library 18 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference dynamic management statements dynamic routine name specification Dynamic Server instance dynamic SQL dynamic statements EBCDIC element element type embedded SQL enabled mode end user format end user routine The SQL statements that describe execute and prepare other statements The execution of a user defined routine whose name is determined at runtime through an SPL variable in the EXECUTE PROCEDURE EXECUTE ROUTINE or EXECUTE FUNCTION statement The set of processes storage spaces and shared memory that together com prise a complete database server A single Dynamic Server instance can sup port more than one database The statements and structures that allow a program to form an SQL statement at runtime so that portions of the statement can be determined by user input The SQL statements that are specified at runtime when the program is exe cuted rather than when the program is compiled You can use the PREPARE statement to create dynamic SQL statements Acronym for Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code a 256 element 8 bit character set that was originally designed for mainframe computers A member of a collection such as a LIST MULTISET or SET data type An ele ment can be a value of any built in data type opaque data type distinct data type named row type unnamed row type o
390. rent queries It needs to be evaluated only once and the results can be used there after In independent subqueries both the parent and subquery are parallel ized See also correlated subquery and subquery A structure of entries each of which contains a value or values and a pointer to the corresponding location in a table or smart large object An index might improve the performance of database queries by ordering a table according to key column values or by providing access to data inside of large objects Consists of zero or more index items grouped together which can be stored in the same dbspace as the associated table fragment or in a separate dbspace An index fragment also might occupy an sbspace or an extspace A login user ID login user name or authorization identifier that must be valid on all computer systems operating systems involved in the client s database access Often referred to as the client s user ID This need not refer to a fully functional user account on the computer system only the user identity com ponents of the user account information are significant to Informix database servers A given user typically has the same Informix user ID on all net worked computer systems involved in the database access The authoriza tion identifier informix is required for some database objects and operations 26 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Informix user password inheritance initialize inmigration inne
391. request a range of memory allocation Other parallel operations can occur when the PDQPRIORITY setting is LOW When the PDOPRIORITY environment variable is not set the default value is the value of the PDOPRIORITY configuration parameter When PDOPRIORITY is set to 0 the database server can execute a query in parallel depending on the number of available processors the fragmentation of tables queried the complexity of the query and so on PDOPRIORITY does not affect the degree of parallelism in Extended Parallel Server Usually the more resources a database server uses the better its performance for a given query If the server uses too many resources however contention among the resources can result and take resources away from other queries resulting in degraded performance For more information on performance considerations for PDOPRIORITY refer to your Performance Guide An application can override the setting of this environment variable when it issues the SOL statement SET PDOPRIORITY which the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax describes 3 86 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv setenv PLCONFIG PLCONFIG The PLCONFIG environment variable specifies the name of the configuration file that the High Performance Loader HPL uses This file must reside in the INFORMIXDIR etc directory If the PLCONFIG environment variable is not set then INFORMIXDIR etc plconfig is the default configuration file
392. rived column of information created with an SOL statement that is not stored in the database For example you can create virtual columns in a SELECT statement by arithmetically manipulating a single column such as multiplying existing values by a constant or by combining multiple col umns such as adding the values from two columns A type of generalized key index that contains keys that are the result of an expression A multithreaded process that makes up the database server and is similar to the hardware processors in the computer It can serve multiple clients and where necessary run multiple threads to work in parallel for a single query A table whose data you create to access data in an external file external DBMS or smart large object The database server does not manage external data or directly manipulate data within a smart large object The Virtual Table Interface allows users to access the external data in a virtual table using SQL DML statements and join the external data with Dynamic Server table data Acronym for very large database A message or other indicator about a condition that software such as the database server or compiler detects A condition that results in a warning does not necessarily affect the ability of the code to run See also compile time error and runtime error A series of one or more space characters The GLS locale defines the characters that are considered to be space characters For exam
393. rmation such as the name data type length scale and precision of the column The system descriptor area is the X Open standard for handling dynamic columns See also descriptor and sqlda 50 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference system monitoring interface table table fragment table fragmentation table hierarchy table inheritance target table tblspace TCP IP A collection of tables and pseudo tables in the sysmaster database that main tains dynamically updated information about the operation of the database server The tables are constructed in memory but are not recorded on disk Users can query the SMI tables with the SELECT statement of SOL A rectangular array of data in which each row describes a single entity and each column contains the values for each category of description For exam ple a table can contain the names and addresses of customers Each row corresponds to a different customer and the columns correspond to the name and address items A table is sometimes referred to as a base table to distin guish it from the views indexes and other objects defined on the underlying table or associated with it Zero or more rows that are grouped together and stored in a dbspace that you specify when you create the fragment A virtual table fragment might reside in an sbspace or an extspace A method of separating a table into potentially balanced fragments to distrib ute the workload and optimize the ef
394. rows have the duplicate key value You create a bitmap index with the USING BITMAP keywords in the CREATE INDEX statement See also B tree index A legacy term for a large object that is now known as a simple large object and includes TEXT or BYTE data types These data objects effectively have no maximum size theoretically as large as 2 bytes See also simple large object Acronym for binary large object A data type for a smart large object that stores any type of binary data including images It can be stored and retrieved in pieces and has database properties such as recovery and transaction rollback See also CLOB Not for Extended Parallel Server The unit of disk allocation within a blobspace The database server administrator determines the size of a blobpage The size can vary depending on the size of the TEXT or BYTE data that the user inserts Not for Extended Parallel Server A logical collection of chunks that is used to store TEXT and BYTE data A variable or an expression that can take on the logical values TRUE 1 FALSE 0 or UNKNOWN if NULL values are involved Glossary 5 BOOLEAN Boolean function branch node buffer buffered disk 1 0 buffered logging built in built in data type byte BYTE Cartesian product A built in data type that supports single byte true false values TRUE is rep resented internally as 0 and externally as t FALSE is represented internally as 1 and externally
395. rrors system catalog table stores information about error warning and informational messages returned by DataBlade modules and user defined routines using the mi_db_error_raise DataBlade API function The syserrors table has the following columns Column Type Explanation sqlstate CHAR 5 SQLSTATE value associated with the error For more information about SOLSTATE values and their meanings see the GET DIAGNOSTICS statement in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax locale CHAR 36 The locale with which this version of the message is associated for example en_us 8859 1 level SMALLINT Reserved for future use seqno SMALLINT Reserved for future use message VARCHAR 255 Message text System Catalog Tables 1 39 SYSEXTCOLS XPS To create a new message insert a row directly into the syserrors table By default all users can view this table but only users with the DBA privilege can modify it A composite index on the sqlstate locale level and seqno columns allows only unique values SYSEXTCOLS The sysextcols system catalog table contains a row that describes each of the internal columns in external table tabid of format type fmttype FIXED The sysextcols table has the following columns Column Type Explanation tabid INTEGER Unique identifying code of a table colno SMALLINT Code identifying the column exttype SMALLINT Code identifying an external column type extstart SMALLINT Starting position of column in
396. s symbols and single byte and in some locales multibyte characters The main difference between VARCHAR and NVARCHAR data types is the collation order Collation of VARCHAR data follows code set order but NVARCHAR collation can be locale specific The section Collating VARCHAR Values on page 2 47 describes an exception For more infor mation about NVARCHAR see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Opaque An opaque type is a data type for which you must provide the following information to the database server m A data structure for how the data values are stored on disk m Support functions to determine how to convert between the disk storage format and the user format for data entry and display m Secondary access methods that determine how the index on this data type is built used and manipulated m User functions that use the data type m A row in a system catalog table to register the opaque type in the database 2 34 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference REAL The internal structure of an opaque type is not visible to the database server and can only be accessed through user defined routines Definitions for opaque types are stored in the sysxtdtypes system catalog table These SQL statements maintain the definitions of opaque types in the database m The CREATE OPAQUE TYPE statement adds an opaque type to the database m The DROP TYPE statement removes a previously defined opaque type from the database F
397. s and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Other company product and service names used in this publication may be trademarks or service marks of others Documentation Team Jennifer Leland Karin Moore Judith Sherwood IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Chapter 1 Table of Contents Introduction In This Introduction About This Manual Types of Users Software Dependencies A Assumptions About Your Locale Demonstration Database New Features in Dynamic Server Version 9 3 SQL Enhancements Documentation Conventions Typographical Conventions Icon Conventions Syntax Conventions Sample Code Conventions Additional Documentation Related Reading Compliance with Industry Sbndardo Informix Welcomes Your Comments System Catalog Tables In This Chapter Objects That the System Catalog Tables Tack Using the System Catalog Accessing the System Catalog Updating System Catalog Data Structure of the System Catalog SYSAGGREGATES SYSAMS SYSATTRTYPES SYSBLOBS o NN DADA FF OK BW Q m om e e e a aw rN FO 15 1 6 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 17 1 18 1 21 1 22 SYSCASTS o e ros BEM Y 28 SYSCHECKS s dec a 2 el ee E a ee ee Ge a ELA SYSCHECKUDRDEP 1 25 SYSCOLATTRIBS a 2 1 ee 1 26 SYSCOLAUTH 2 1 e ee ee 1 27 SYSCOLDEPEND 1 28 SYSCOLUMNS 4 cio ts Seb ds lp Back ate gogn dy Gh we 129 SYSC
398. s are national character types NCHAR and NVARCHAR For more information about locales and collation order of data types see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality For more information about SQL data types see Chapter 2 of this manual IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSAGGREGATES The sysaggregates system catalog table records user defined aggregates UDAs The sysaggregates table has the following columns Column name owner aggid init_func iter_func combine_func final_func handlesnulls Type VARCHAR 128 CHAR 32 SERIAL VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 VARCHAR 128 BOOLEAN SYSAGGREGATES Explanation Name of the aggregate Name of the owner of the aggregate Unique code identifying the aggregate Name of initialization UDR Name of iterator UDR Name of combine UDR Name of finalization UDR NULL handling indicator t handles NULLs f does not handle NULLs Each user defined aggregate has one entry in sysaggregates that is uniquely identified by its identifying code the aggid value Only user defined aggre gates aggregates that are not built in have entries in sysaggregates Both a simple index on the aggid column and a composite index on the name and owner columns require unique values System Catalog Tables 1 17 SYSAMS Wo SYsams 1 18 Column am_name am_owner am_id am_type am_sptype am_defopclass IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Type
399. s or to process the customers in alphabetical order or in reverse alphabetical order by their last names when last_name serves as the key A word that has a pre defined meaning in a programming language For example the word SELECT is a keyword in SQL A unit of storage that consists of 1024 bytes An Informix product that provides the locale files and error messages to sup port one or more languages The International Language Supplement sup ports several European languages Informix provides separate Language Supplements for several Asian languages A data object that is logically stored in a column of a table but physically stored independently of the column due to its size Large objects can be sim ple large objects TEXT BYTE or smart large objects BLOB CLOB Index page containing index items and horizontal pointers to other leaf nodes A database server creates leaf nodes when the root node becomes full See isolation Glossary 29 library light append link LIST literal little endian load job local copy local loopback local variable locale A group of precompiled routines designed to perform tasks that are common to a given kind of application An application programming interface API can include a library of routines that you can call from application programs See also dynamic link library DLL shared library and shared object file An unbuffered unlogged insert operation To c
400. ser defined rou tine expects when it receives the associated argument at runtime See also con figuration file input parameter and routine signature See referential constraint The referenced table in a referential constraint See also child table A coserver that controls one or more fragments of a table that Extended Par allel Server accesses See also coserver and connection coserver See table fragment An identifiable or repeatable series of characters or symbols Acronym for parallel database query Determines the amount of resources that a database server allocates to pro cess a query in parallel These resources include memory threads such as scan threads and sort space The level of parallelism is established by using the PDQPRIORITY environment variable or various database server configuration parameters including PDQPRIORITY and MAX_PDOPRIORITY or dynamically through the SET PDOPRIORITY statement Glossary 37 permission phantom row physical log physslice pointer polymorphism precision predefined opaque data type predicate predicate lock prepared statement preprocessor primary access method On some operating systems the right to access files and directories A row ofa table that is initially modified or inserted during a transaction but is subsequently rolled back Another user can see a phantom row if the isola tion level is Informix Dirty Read or ANSI compliant Read Uncommitte
401. served value that cannot be used The INT8 data type is typically used to store large counts quantities and so on The way that the database server stores the INT8 data is platform dependent On 64 bit platforms INT8 is stored as a signed binary integer the data type requires 8 bytes per value On 32 bit platforms the database server uses an internal format that can require up to 10 bytes of storage Arithmetic operations and sort comparisons are performed more efficiently on integer data than on floating point or fixed point decimal data but INT8 cannot store data with absolute values beyond 263 1 If a value exceeds the numeric range of INT8 the database server does not store the value DataTypes 2 25 INTEGER INTEGER The INTEGER data type stores whole numbers that range from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 for 9 or 10 digits of precision The number 2 147 483 648 is a reserved value and cannot be used The INTEGER value is stored as a signed binary integer and is typically used to store counts quantities and so on Arithmetic operations and sort comparisons are performed more efficiently on integer data than on float or decimal data INTEGER columns however cannot store absolute values beyond 2 1 If a data value lies outside the numeric range of INTEGER the database server does not store the value INTEGER data types require 4 bytes of storage per value INTERVAL The INTERVAL data type stores a valu
402. server as DECIMAL values DECIMAL Floating Point The DECIMAL data type stores decimal floating point numbers up to a maximum of 32 significant digits where p is the total number of significant digits the precision Specifying precision is optional If you do not specify the precision p DECIMAL is treated as DECIMAL 16 a floating point decimal with a precision of 16 places DECIMAL p has an absolute exponent range between 10 and 102 If you use an ANSI compliant database and specify DECIMAL p the value defaults to DECIMAL p 0 meaning that only whole number values can be stored in this data type DECIMAL Fixed Point In fixed point numbers DECIMAL p s the decimal point is fixed at a specific place regardless of the value of the number When you specify a column of this type you declare its precision p as the total number of digits that it can store from 1 to 32 You declare its scale s as the total number of digits in the fractional part that is to the right of the decimal point All numbers with an absolute value less than 0 5 10 have the value zero The largest absolute value of a DECIMAL p s data type that you can store without an overflow error is 10 10 A DECIMAL column typically stores numbers with fractional parts that must be stored and displayed exactly for example rates or percentages In an ANSI compliant database all DECIMAL numbers must have absolute values in the range 10 to 101 Data Ty
403. set at the command line or in a shell file m Ina login file Values of environment variables set in your login cshre or profile file are assigned automatically every time you log into the system In Informix ESQL C you can set supported environment variables within an application with the putenv system call and retrieve values with the getenv system call if your UNIX system supports these functions For more information on putenv and getenv see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual and your C documentation 3 6 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference WIN NT E C Where to Set Environment Variables on Windows Where to Set Environment Variables on Windows You might be able to set environment variables in several places on Windows depending on which Informix application you use For native Windows Informix applications such as the database server environment variables can be set only in the Windows registry Environment variables set in the registry cannot be modified elsewhere For utilities that run in a command prompt session such as dbaccess environment variables can be set in several ways as described in Setting Environment Variables for Command Prompt Utilities on page 3 15 To use client applications such as ESQL C or the Schema Tools on Windows environment use the Setnet32 utility to set environment variables For infor mation about the Setnet32 utility see the Informix Client Products
404. sign one name to multiple user defined routines and specify parameters of different data types on which each routine can operate An over loaded routine is uniquely defined by its routine signature The process that the database server uses to determine which user defined rou tine to execute based on the routine signature See also routine overloading The information that the database server uses to uniquely identify a user defined routine The signature includes the type of routine function or proce dure the routine name and the number order and data types of the param eters See also routine overloading and specific name 42 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference row row type row variable rowid rule runtime environment runtime error sbspace scale scale up A group of related items of information about a single entity across all col umns in a database table In a table of customer information for example a row contains information about a single customer A row is sometimes referred to as a record or tuple In an object relational model each row of a table stands for one instance of the subject of the table which is one particular example of that entity In a screen form a row can refer to a line of the screen A complex data type that contains one or more related data fields of any data type that form a template for a record The data in a row type can be stored in a row or column See also named row
405. sion changes the data type of all values that currently exist in the column as well as any new values that might be added m Use the CAST AS keywords or the double colon cast operator to cast a value to a different data type Casting does not permanently alter the data type of a value it expresses the value in a more convenient form Casting user defined data types into built in types allows client programs to manipulate data types without knowledge of their internal structure If you change data types the new data type must be able to store all the old value Both data type conversion and casting depend on casts registered in the syscasts system catalog table For information about syscasts see SYSCASTS on page 1 23 A cast is either built in or user defined Guidelines exist for casting DISTINCT and extended data types For more information about casting opaque types see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types For information about casting other extended types see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Using Built in Casts Using Built in Casts User informix owns built in casts They govern conversions from one built in data type to another Built in casts allow the database server to attempt the following data type conversions m A character type to any other character type m A character type to or from another built in type m A n
406. son Long 10066 309 SHM Extra gentle formula Can be used lt BYTE value gt Swimmer s Ear Drops Specially every day for prevention or Formulated for Children treatment of swimmer s ear 10067 310 SHM Blue heavy duty foam board with lt BYTEvalue gt Exceptionally Durable Shimara or team logo Compact Kickboard for Team Practice 10068 310 ANZ White Standard size lt BYTE value gt High Quality Kickboard 10069 311 SHM Swim gloves Webbing between lt BYTE value gt Hot Training Tool Webbed fingers promotes strengthening of arms Cannot be used in competition Swim Gloves Build Arm Strength and Endurance 12 of 13 asegejeg ouap SeJoJs ay ul eq crv eoueJejey TOS 019P ING xIWOJU Wel catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10070 312 SHM Hydrodynamic egg shaped lens lt BYTE value gt Anti Fog Swimmer s Goggles Ground in anti fog elements Quantity Discount Available in blue or smoke 10071 312 HRO Durable competition style goggles lt BYTE value gt Swim Goggles Traditional Available in blue grey or white Rounded Lens For Greater Comfort 10072 313 SHM Silicone swim cap One size lt BYTE value gt Team Logo Silicone Swim Cap Available in white silver or navy Team Logo Imprinting Available 10073 314 ANZ Silicone swim cap Squared off top lt BYTE value gt Durable Squared off Silicone One size White Swim Cap 10074 315 HRO Re usable ice pack Store in the lt BYTE value gt
407. strator keep track of unusual or potentially harmful user activity Use the onaudit utility to enable auditing of events and create audit masks and the onshowaudit utility to extract the audit event information for analysis See query A cursor that is associated with a SELECT statement which lets you scan multiple rows of data moving data row by row into a set of receiving variables Taking a horizontal subset of the rows of a single table that satisfies a speci fied condition Selection is implemented through the WHERE clause of a SELECT statement and returns some of the rows and all of the columns in a table See also projection and join A type of generalized key index that contains keys for only a subset of a table The proportion of rows within the table that a query filter can pass A join between a table and itself A self join occurs when a table is used two or more times in a SELECT statement with different aliases and joined to itself 44 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference semaphore sequential cursor Serializable server locale server name server number server processing locale session SET shared library shared lock shared memory An operating system communication device that signals a process to awaken A cursor that can fetch only the next row in sequence A sequential cursor can read through a table only once each time the sequential cursor is opened An ANSI compliant level of
408. t constructed data type constructor control character cooked files coordinating server correlated subquery correlation name corrupted database A value that cannot change during the execution of a program or command In some programming languages a constant has a name that can be refer enced Compare with variable See also literal A restriction on what kinds of data can be inserted or updated in tables See also check constraint primary key constraint referential constraint not null constraint and unique constraint See complex data type See type constructor A character whose occurrence in a particular context initiates modifies or stops a control function an operation to control a device for example in moving a visual cursor or in reading data In a program you can define actions that use the CTRL key with another key to execute some program ming action for example entering CTRL W to obtain online Help in Informix products A control character is sometimes referred to as a control key Compare with printable character See buffered disk I O Ina query that spans multiple database servers the server in which the query is initiated is called the coordinator or coordinating server This server is also sometimes called the local server because it is the local server to the client ini tiating the query To respond to the query the coordinating server starts ses sions on the other servers involv
409. t applications use that setting by default If IFX_LONGID is set to different values on the client and on the database server however the client setting takes precedence Important ESQL executables that have been built with the static option using the libos a library version that does not support long identifiers cannot use the IFX_LONGID environment variable You must recompile such applications with the new libos a library that includes support for long identifiers Executables that use shared libraries no static option can use IFX_LONGID without recompilation provided that they use the new libifos so that provides support for long identifiers For details see your ESQL product manual Environment Variables 3 59 IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE The IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE environment variable specifies the maximum size of the free unused private network buffer pool for each database server session setenv IFX_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE count is an integer specifying the number of units buffers in the pool The default size is 1 buffer If IF X_NETBUF_PVTPOOL_SIZE is set to 0 then each session obtains buffers from the free global network buffer pool You must specify the value in decimal form IFX_NETBUF_SIZE The IFX_NETBUF_SIZE environment variable lets you configure the network buffers to the optimum size It specifies the size of all network buffers in the free unused
410. t removes a previously defined named row type from the database For details about these SQL syntax statements see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax For examples of how to create and use named row types see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Equivalence and Named Row Types No two named row types can be equal even if they have identical structures because they have different names For example the following named row types have the same structure the same number of fields and the same sequence of data types of fields within the row but are not equal name_t lname CHAR 15 initial CHAR 1 fname CHAR 15 emp_t lname CHAR 15 initial CHAR 1 fname CHAR 15 Named Row Types and Inheritance Named row types can be part of a type inheritance hierarchy That is one named row type can be the parent supertype of another named row type A subtype in a hierarchy inherits all the properties of its supertype Type inher itance is discussed in the CREATE ROW TYPE statement in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax and in the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation 2 36 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Row Unnamed Typed Tables Tables that are part of an inheritance hierarchy must be typed tables Typed tables are tables that have been assigned a named row type For the syntax you use to create typed tables see the CREATE TABLE statement in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Table inheri
411. t utility Delimited identifiers Disk space Editor ESQL C ANSI compliance C compiler DATETIME formatting delimited identifiers multibyte characters multithreaded applications C preprocessor Executable programs Fetch buffer size Filenames multibyte Files field delimiter Files installation Files locale Index of Environment Variables Environment Variable INFORMIXSERVER INFORMIXTERM TERM TERMCAP TERMINFO DBDELIMITER DELIMIDENT DBUPSPACE DBEDIT DBANSIWARN INFORMIXC DBTIME DELIMIDENT CLIENT_LOCALE ESQLMF THREADLIB CPFIRST PATH FET_BUF_SIZE GLS8BITSYS DBDELIMITER INFORMIXDIR CLIENT_LOCALE DB_LOCALE SERVER_LOCALE Page 3 68 3 72 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 35 3 53 3 52 3 35 3 27 3 63 3 48 GLS Guide 3 53 GLS Guide 3 94 3 25 3 84 3 55 GLS Guide 3 35 3 67 GLS Guide GLS Guide 4 of 10 Environment Variables 3 99 Index of Environment Variables Topic Files map for C Files message Files temporary Files temporary for Gateways Files temporary sorting Files termcap terminfo Formats date and time Format money Gateways High Performance Loader Identifiers delimited Identifiers long Identifiers multibyte characters Informix Storage Manager 3 100 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Environment Variable INFORMIXCPPMAP DBLANG DBSPACETEMP DBTEMP PSORT_DBTEMP INFORMIXTERM TERM TERMCAP TERMINFO DBDATE DBTIME DBMONEY DBTE
412. t view rows that were changed as a part of a currently uncommitted transaction Committed Read is available through a database server and set with the SET ISOLATION statement It is the default level of isolation for databases that are not ANSI compliant See also Read Committed To translate source code in a high level language into executable code Com pare with execute and link See also source file An error that occurs when you compile the program source code This type of error indicates syntax errors in the source code Compare with runtime error A data type that is built from a combination of other data types using an SQL type constructor and whose components can be accessed through SQL state ments See also row type and collection data type 10 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference component composite data type composite index composite join compressed bitmap concatenate concatenation operator concurrency configuration management CM coserver configuration file connection connection coserver connection redirector In the High Performance Loader HPL the information required to load or unload data is organized in several components The components are format map filter query project device array load job and unload job See row type An index constructed on two or more columns of a table The ordering imposed by the composite index varies least frequently on the first named colu
413. ta type identifier type and the length and description of the data type For DISTINCT types created from built in data types the type column codes correspond to the value of the syscolumns coltype column indicating the source type as listed on page 1 29 but incremented by the hexadecimal value 0x0000800 The file INFORMIXDIR incl esql sqltypes h contains information about sysxtdtypes type and syscolumns coltype codes An index on the extended_id column allows only unique values An index on the locator column allows duplicate values as does a composite indexes on the name and owner columns A composite index on the type and source columns also allows duplicate values Information Schema The Information Schema consists of read only views that provide infor mation about all the tables views and columns on the current database server to which you have access In addition Information Schema views provide information about SQL dialects such as Informix Oracle or Sybase and SQL standards This version of the Information Schema views are X Open CAE standards Informix provides them so that applications developed on other database systems can obtain Informix system catalog information without accessing the Informix system catalog tables directly Important Because the X Open CAE standards Information Schema views differ from ANSI compliant Information Schema views Informix recommends that you do not install the X Open CAE Informa
414. tabase If DBACCNOIGN is not set the database server inserts the first forty nine rows DBANSIWARN Setting the DBANSIWARN environment variable indicates that you want to check for Informix extensions to ANSI standard SQL syntax Unlike most environment variables you do not need to set DBANSIWARN to a value You can set it to any value or to no value DBANSIWARN If you set the DBANSIWARN environment variable for DB Access it is functionally equivalent to including the ansi flag when you invoke DB Access or any Informix product that recognizes the ansi flag from the command line If you set DBANSIWARN before you run DB Access any syntax extension warnings are displayed on the screen within the SOL menu At runtime the DBANSIWARN environment variable causes the sixth character of the sqlwarn array in the SQL Communication Area SQLCA to be set to w when a statement is executed that is recognized as including any Informix extension to the ANSI ISO standard for SOL syntax For more infor mation on SQLCA see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual After you set DBANSIWARN Informix extension checking is automatic until you log out or unset DBANSIWARN To turn off Informix extension checking you can disable DBANSIWARN by entering the following command unsetenv DBANSIWARN Environment Variables 3 27 DBBLOBBUF setenv DBBLOBBUF The DBBLOBBUF environment variable controls whether TEXT or BYTE data is stored
415. tabase servers support in descending highest to lowest order of prece dence Operators with the same precedence are listed in the same row Operator Precedence membership substring UNITS unary cast ep binary concatenation ANY ALL SOME lt lt gt gt l lt gt IN BETWEEN LIKE MATCHES AND OR Example in Expression customer phone 1 3 d x UNITS DAY my NULL TEXT xly x y customer fname customer Iname orders ship_date gt SOME SELECT paid_date FROM orders NOT y customer fname MATCHES y x AND y x OR y See the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax for the syntax and semantics of these SQL operators IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Environment Variables In This Chapter s w 6 02 2 a a we wy ak we a CR e Bes 3 5 Types of Environment Variables 2 2 a 0 3 5 Where to Set Environment Variables on UNIX 3 6 Where to Set Environment Variables on Windows 3 7 Using Environment Variables on UNIX E 3 8 Setting Environment Variables in a Configuration File wee ead B58 Setting Environment Variables at Login Time 3 9 Syntax for Setting Environment Variables 2 1 3 9 Unsetting Environment Variables bo Sew a a LO Modifying an Environment Variable Sting a ea 310 Viewing Your Environment Variable Settings 3 11 Checking Environment Variables with the chkenv Ut
416. tables are built You can list dbspaces separated by colon or comma symbols to spread temporary space across any number of disks 3 DBSPACETEMP MS dbspace temp_dbspace is the name of a valid existing temporary dbspace DBSPACETEMP overrides any default dbspaces that the DBSPACETEMP parameter specifies in the configuration file of the database server Important The dbspaces that you list in DBSPACETEMP must be composed of chunks that are allocated as raw UNIX devices For example the following command to set the DBSPACETEMP environment variable specifies three dbspaces for temporary tables setenv DBSPACETEMP sorttmpl sorttmp2 sorttmp3 Separate the dbspace entries with either colons or commas The number of dbspaces is limited by the maximum size of the environment variable as defined by your operating system Your database server does not create a dbspace specified by the environment variable if the dbspace does not exist The two classes of temporary tables are explicit temporary tables that the user creates and implicit temporary tables that the database server creates Use DBSPACETEMP to specify the dbspaces for both types of temporary tables If you create an explicit temporary table with the CREATE TEMP TABLE statement and do not specify a dbspace for the table either in the IN dbspace clause or in the FRAGMENT BY clause the database server uses the settings in DBSPACETEMP to
417. tance and how it relates to type inheritance is also discussed in that section For information about how to create and use typed tables see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Row Unnamed An unnamed row type contains fields but has no user defined name An unnamed row type is defined by its structure Two unnamed row types are equal if they have the same structure meaning the ordered list of the data types of the fields If two unnamed row types have the same number of fields and if the sequence of the data type of each field in one row type matches the sequence of data types of the corresponding fields in the other ROW data type then the two unnamed row data types are equal For example the following unnamed row types are equal ROW lname char 15 initial char 1 fname char 15 ROW dept char 15 rating char 1 name char 15 The following row types have the same number of fields and the same data types but are not equal because their fields are not in the same order ROW x integer y varchar 20 z real ROW x integer z real y varchar 20 A field of an unnamed row type can be any of the following data types A built in type A collection type A distinct type A row type An opaque type Unnamed row types cannot be used in typed tables or in type inheritance hierarchies DataTypes 2 37 Row Unnamed For more information on unnamed row types see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax a
418. ter the following statement SELECT SUBSTR tabname 1 18 tabid FROM systables Warning Although user informix and DBAs can modify most system catalog tables only user informix can modify systables Informix strongly recommends that you do not update delete or insert any rows in them Modifying the system catalog tables can destroy the integrity of the database Informix does support use of the ALTER TABLE statement to modify the size of the next extent of system catalog tables IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Updating System Catalog Data In certain catalog tables of Dynamic Server however it is valid to add entries to the system catalog tables For instance in the case of the syserrors system catalog table and the systracemsgs system catalog table a developer of DataBlade modules can directly insert message entries that appear in these system catalog tables Updating System Catalog Data The optimizer in Informix database servers determines the most efficient strategy for executing SQL queries The optimizer allows you to query the database without having to consider fully which tables to search first in a join or which indexes to use The optimizer uses information from the system catalog to determine the best query strategy If you use the UPDATE STATISTICS statement to update the system catalog you can ensure that the information provided to the optimizer is current When you delete or modify a table the database s
419. tes an error it cannot complete the ALTER TABLE statement or cast and leaves the column values as characters You receive an error message and the statement is rolled back whether you are in a trans action or not Converting Between INTEGER and DATE or DATETIME You can convert an integer column SMALLINT INTEGER or INT8 to a DATE or DATETIME value The database server interprets the integer as a value in the internal format of the DATE or DATETIME column You can also convert a DATE or DATETIME column to an integer column The database server stores the internal format of the DATE or DATETIME column as an integer For a DATE column the internal format is a Julian date For a DATETIME column the internal format stores the date and time in a condensed integer format Converting Between DATE and DATETIME You can convert DATE columns to DATETIME columns However if the DATETIME column contains more fields than the DATE column the database server either ignores the fields or fills them with zeros The illustrations in the following list show how these two data types are converted assuming that the default date format is mm dd yyyy m If youconvert DATE to DATETIME YEAR TO DAY the database server converts the existing DATE values to DATETIME values For example the value 08 15 2002 becomes 2002 08 15 m Ifyou convert DATETIME YEAR TO DAY to the DATE format the value 2002 08 15 becomes 08 15 2002 m If you convert DATE to DATET
420. that have been modified since publication Release Notes This item describes feature differences from earlier versions of Informix products and how these differences might affect current products This file also contains information about any known problems and their workarounds Machine notes do not apply to Windows NT platforms Error message files Informix software products provide ASCII files that contain Informix error messages and their corrective actions For a detailed description of these error messages refer to Informix Error Messages in Answers OnLine To read the error messages on UNIX use the following command Command Description finderr Displays error messages online To read error messages and corrective actions on Windows NT use the Informix Find Error utility To display this utility choose Start gt Programs gt Informix from the task bar Related Reading For a list of publications that provide an introduction to database servers and operating system platforms refer to your Getting Started manual 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Compliance with Industry Standards Compliance with Industry Standards The American National Standards Institute ANSI has established a set of industry standards for SQL Informix SQL based products are fully compliant with SQL 92 Entry Level published as ANSI X3 135 1992 which is identical to ISO 9075 1992 In addition many features of Inform
421. the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Important The behavior of DBCENTURY for Dynamic Server and Extended Parallel Server is not backwards compatible DBDATE The DBDATE environment variable specifies the end user formats of DATE values On UNIX systems that use the C shell set DBDATE with this syntax DBDATE are characters that can appear as separators in a DATE format 0 indicates that no separator is displayed between time units D M are characters that represent the day and the month Y2 Y4 are characters that represent the year and the precision of the year Some East Asian locales support additional syntax for era based dates For a description of era based formats see Informix Guide to GLS Functionality DBDATE can specify the following attributes of the display format m The order of time units the month day and year in a date m Whether the year appears with two digits Y2 or four digits Y4 m The separator between the month day and year time units 3 32 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS DBDATE For the U S English locale the default for DBDATE is MDY4 where M repre sents the month D represents the day Y4 represents a four digit year and slash is the time units separator for example 01 08 2002 Other valid characters for the separator are a hyphen a period or a zero 0 To indicate no separator use the zero The slash is used
422. the data type see the description of syscolumns coltype page 1 29 length SMALLINT Length in bytes of the member xtd_type_id INTEGER Code identifying this data type see the description of sysxtdtypes extended_id page 1 79 2 of 2 Two indexes on the extended_id column and the xtd_type_id column allow duplicate values A composite index on the extended_id and seqno columns allows only unique values SYSBLOBS The sysblobs system catalog table specifies the storage location of BYTE and TEXT column values Its name is based on a legacy term for BYTE and TEXT columns also known as simple large objects The sysblobs table contains one row for each BYTE or TEXT column and has the following columns Column Type Explanation spacename VARCHAR 128 IDS Name of partition dbspace or family CHAR 18 XPS type CHAR 1 Code identifying the type of storage media M Magnetic O Optical IDS only tabid INTEGER Code identifying the table colno SMALLINT Column number within its table A composite index on tabid and colno allows only unique values For information about the location and size of chunks of blobspaces dbspaces and sbspaces for TEXT BYTE BLOB and CLOB columns see the Administrator s Guide and the Administrator s Reference 1 22 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSCASTS SYSCASTS The syscasts system catalog table describes the casts in the database It contains one row for each built in cast each
423. the description of DBLANG in the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality DBM ONEY The DBMONEY environment variable specifies the display format of values in columns of SMALLFLOAT FLOAT DECIMAL or MONEY data types and of complex data types derived from any of these data types setenv DBMONEY E tt k 3 back front pack is a currency symbol that precedes MONEY values in the default locale if no other front symbol is specified or if DBMONEY is not set 3 38 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference GLS DBMONEY or isacommaor period the default that separates the integral part from the fractional part of the FLOAT DECIMAL or MONEY value back is a currency symbol that follows the MONEY value The back symbol can be up to seven characters and can contain any character that the locale supports except a digit a comma or a period symbol front isacurrency symbol that precedes the MONEY value The front symbol can be up to seven characters and can contain any character that the locale supports except a digit a comma or a period If you specify any character that is not a letter of the alphabet for front or back you must enclose the front or back setting between single quotation marks When you display MONEY values Informix products use the DBMONEY setting to format the output DBMONEY has no effect however on the internal format of data values that are stored in columns of the databas
424. the distinct type to its source type m A cast from the source type to the distinct type You can create an implicit cast between a distinct type and its source type To create an implicit cast however you must first drop the default explicit cast between the distinct type and its source type You also can use all casts that have been registered for the source type without modification on the distinct type You can also create and register new casts and support functions that apply only to the distinct type For examples that show how to create a cast function for a distinct type and register the function as cast see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation Important For releases of Dynamic Server earlier than Version 9 21 distinct data types inherited the built in casts that are provided for the source type The built in casts of the source type are not inherited by distinct data types in this release IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference What Extended Data Types Can Be Cast What Extended Data Types Can Be Cast The following table shows the extended data type combinations that you can cast The table shows only whether or not a cast between a source type and a target type are possible In some cases you must first create a user defined cast before you can perform a conversion between two data types In other cases the database server provides either an implicit cast or a built in cast that you must explicitly
425. the following columns Column Type Explanation extended_id INTEGER Code uniquely identifying the extended data types seqno SMALLINT Value to order and identify one line of the description of the UDT A new line is created only if the remaining text string is larger than 255 bytes description CHAR 256 Textual description of the extended data type A composite index on extended_id and seqno allows duplicate values SYSXTDTYPEAUTH The sysxtdtypeauth system catalog table identifies the privileges for each UDT user defined data type The sysxtdtypeauth table contains one row for each set of privileges granted and has the following columns Column Type Explanation grantor CHAR 32 Name of grantor of privilege grantee CHAR 32 Name of grantee of privilege type INTEGER Code identifying the UDT auth CHAR 2 Code identifying privileges on the UDT nor N Under privilege uor U Usage privilege If the privilege code in the auth column is uppercase for example U for usage a user who has this privilege can also grant it to others If the code is in lowercase a user who has the privilege cannot grant it to others A composite index on type grantor and grantee allows only unique values A composite index on the type and grantee columns allows duplicate values 1 78 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSXTDTYPES The sysxtdtype system catalog table has an entry for each UDT user defined data type including OPAQUE and
426. the manufacturer You need both columns to uniquely identify an item In the catalog table the stock_num and manu_code columns are foreign keys that reference the stock_num and manu_code columns in the stock table Figure A 14 shows this relationship Figure A 14 stock Table detail Tables That the ar stock_num and stock_num manu_code description manu code HRO baseball gloves Columns Join HSK baseball gloves SMT baseball gloves catalog Table detail catalog num stock_num manu_code 10001 HRO 10002 HSK 10003 SMT 10004 HRO The stores_demo Database A 13 The stock and manufact Tables The stock and manufact Tables The stock table and the manufact table are joined by the manu_code column The same manufacturer code can appear in more than one row of the stock table if the manufacturer produces more than one piece of equipment In the stock table the manu_code column is a foreign key that references the manu_code column in the manufact table Figure A 15 shows this relationship Figure A 15 stock Table detail Tables That the TE manu_code Column stock_num manu_code description Joins HRO baseball gloves HSK baseball gloves SMT baseball gloves manufact Table detail manu_code manu_name NRG Norge HSK Husky HRO Hero A 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The cust_calls and customer Tables The cust_calls and customer Tables The cust_calls table and the customer table are joined by the custo
427. the stock table The stock and manufact Tables The stock table and the manufact table are joined by the manu_code column The same manufacturer code can appear in more than one row of the stock table if the manufacturer produces more than one piece of equipment In the stock table the manu_code column is a foreign key that references the manu_code column in the manufact table IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Referential Relationships The cust_calls and customer Tables The cust_calls table and the customer table are joined by the customer_num column The same customer number can appear in more than one row of the cust_calls table if the customer calls the distributor more than once with a problem or question In the cust_calls table the customer_num column is a foreign key that references the customer_num column in the customer table The call_type and cust_calls Tables The call_type and cust_calls tables are joined by the call_code column The same call code can appear in more than one row of the cust_calls table because many customers can have the same type of problem In the cust_calls table the call_code column is a foreign key that references the call_code column in the call_type table The state and customer Tables The state table and the customer table are joined by a column that contains the state code This column is called code in the state table and state in the customer table If several customers live in the
428. ther of the preceding conditions setenv DBACCNOIGN For example assume DB Access runs the following SOL commands DATABASE mystore BEGIN WORK INSERT INTO receipts VALUES custl 10 INSERT INTO receipt VALUES custl 20 INSERT INTO receipts VALUES custl 30 UPDATE customer SET balance SELECT balance 60 FROM customer WHERE custid custl WHERE custid custl COMMIT WORK In this example one statement has a misspelled table name The receipt table does not exist If your environment does not have DBACCNOIGN set DB Access inserts two records into the receipts table and updates the customer table The decrease in the customer balance exceeds the sum of the inserted receipts If DBACCNOIGN is set to 1 messages appear indicating that DB Access rolled back all the INSERT and UPDATE statements The messages also identify the cause of the error so that you can resolve the problem 3 26 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference setenv DBANSIWARN Load Statement Example You can set DBACCNOIGN to protect data integrity during a LOAD statement even if DB Access runs the LOAD statement in menu mode Assume you execute the LOAD statement from the DB Access SQL menu Forty nine rows of data load correctly but the fiftieth row contains an invalid value that causes an error If you set DBACCNOIGN to 1 the database server does not insert the forty nine previous rows into the da
429. tion 2 60 ested loop join 3 81 etwork buffers 3 60 etwork environment variable DBPATH 3 42 FS directory 3 48 O KEEP ACCESS TIME keywords ALTER TABLE statement 2 50 CREATE TABLE statement 2 50 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference JK L MN OP QRS TU VW X Y ze no setting of NODEFDAC 3 80 NODE configuration parameter 3 81 NODEFDAC environment variable 3 80 NOLOG keyword ALTER TABLE statement 2 50 CREATE TABLE statement 2 50 ONE setting ISM_ENCRYPTION 3 76 JAVA_COMPILER 3 78 Nonprintable characters CHAR data type 2 13 TEXT data type 2 45 VARCHAR data type 2 47 Not null constraint collection elements 2 30 2 33 2 42 2 59 syscoldepend data 1 28 sysconstraints data 1 35 NOT NULL keywords 2 11 2 30 2 44 NOT operator 2 70 NULL value allowed or not allowed 1 30 BYTE data type 2 11 TEXT data type 2 44 NULLvalue allowed or not allowed 1 17 BOOLEAN literal 2 10 Numeric data types casting between 2 64 casting to character types 2 64 listed 2 48 NUMERIC data type See DECIMAL data type NVARCHAR data type collation order 2 34 conversion to VARCHAR 3 41 description 2 34 length syscolumns 1 32 multibyte characters 2 34 Z O Object mode of database objects 1 52 Object relational schema B 1 ODBC driver 3 79 3 91 OFF setting IFX_DIRECTIVES 3 58 PDQPRIORITY 3 85 ON setting IFX_DIRECTIVES 3 58 ON Bar 3 75 ONCONFIG environment variable 3 80 onconfig std file 3 81 3 92 onconfig xps file 3 81 oni
430. tion Schema views on ANSI compliant databases The following Information Schema views are available tables columns sql_languages server_info IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Generating the Information Schema Views Sections that follow contain information about how to generate and access Information Schema views as well as information about their structure Generating the Information Schema Views The Information Schema views are generated automatically when you as DBA run the following DB Access command dbaccess database name SINFORMIXDIR etc xpg4_is sql The views display data from the system catalog tables If tables views or routines exist with any of the same names as the Information Schema views you must either rename those database objects or rename the views in the script before you can install the views You can drop the views with the DROP VIEW statement on each view To re create the views rerun the script Important In addition to the columns specified for each Information Schema view individual vendors might include additional columns or change the order of the columns Informix recommends that applications not use the forms SELECT or SELECT table name to access an Information Schema view Accessing the Information Schema Views All Information Schema views have the Select privilege granted to PUBLIC WITH GRANT OPTION so that all users can query the views Because no othe
431. tion about the sales district and region Figure B 3 shows the columns of the geography table Figure B 3 The geography Table Name Type Description district_code SERIAL District code district_name CHAR 15 District name state_code CHAR 2 State code state_name CHAR 18 State name region SMALLINT Region name The product Table The product table contains information about the products sold through the data warehouse Figure B 4 shows the columns of the product table Figure B 4 The product Table Name Type Description product_code INTEGER Product code product_name CHAR 31 Product name vendor_code CHAR 3 Vendor code vendor_name CHAR 15 Vendor name product_line_code SMALLINT Product line code product_line_name CHAR 15 Name of product line IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference The sales Table Structure of the sales_demo Tables The sales fact table contains information about product sales and has a pointer to each dimension table For example the customer_code column references the customer table the district_code column references the geography table and so on The sales table also contains the measures for the units sold revenue cost and net profit Figure B 5 shows the columns of the sales table Name Type customer_code INTEGER district_code SMALLINT time_code INTEGER product_code INTEGER units_sold SMALLINT revenue MONEY 8 2 cost MONE Y 8 2 net_profit MONEY 8 2 Figure B 5 The sales Table
432. tory DBTIME The DBTIME environment variable specifies a display and data entry format for DATETIME values Like DBDATE GL_DATE or GL_DATETIME this environment variable controls only the character string representation of data values it cannot change the internal storage format of DATETIME columns 3 48 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference DBTIME You can specify a non default format for DATETIME values in input and output operations by using DBTIME to define a formatting mask This quoted string can include literal characters as well as placeholders for the values of individual time units and other elements of a DATETIME value setenv DBTIME literal rar 7 special gt min precision 0 literal is a literal white space or any printable character min is a literal integer setting the minimum number of characters in the substring for the value that special specifies precision is the number of digits for the value of any time unit or the max imum number of characters in the name of a month special is one of the placeholder characters that are listed on page 3 50 These terms and symbols are described in the pages that follow DBTIME takes effect only when you call certain Informix ESQL C DATETIME routines For details see the Informix ESQL C Programmer s Manual If DBTIME is not set the behavior of these Informix ESOL C DATETIME routines is undefined and yyyY MM DD hh mm ss fffff
433. ts Valid Entry YEAR MONTH YEAR A number of years INTERVAL MONTH A number of months DAY TIME DAY A number of days INTERVAL HOUR A number of hours MINUTE A number of minutes SECOND A number of seconds FRACTION A decimal fraction of a second with up to 5 digits The default scale is 3 digits thousandth of a second To specify a non default scale write FRACTION n where n is the desired number of digits from 1 to 5 As with DATETIME data types you can define an INTERVAL to include only the subset of time units that you need But because the construct of month as used in calendar dates is not a time unit that has a fixed number of days a single INTERVAL value cannot combine months and days arithmetic that involves operands of the two different INTERVAL classes is not supported A value entered into an INTERVAL column need not include the full range of time units that were specified in the data type declaration of the column For example you can enter a value of HOUR TO SECOND precision into a column defined as DAY TO SECOND A value must always consist however of a contiguous sequence of time units In the previous example you cannot enter only the HOUR and SECOND values you must also include MINUTE values A valid INTERVAL literal contains the INTERVAL keyword the values to be entered and the field qualifiers See the discussion of literal intervals in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax When a value contains only one
434. ts the user specify two fragmentation methods Usually one method is used globally and one method is used locally Glossary 25 identifier implicit transaction implicit cast implicit connection implicit select list incremental archiving independent subquery index index fragment Informix user ID In the default locale a sequence of letters digits and underscores _ that is the unqualified name of a database storage or program object Additional characters are valid in other locales or if the DELIMIDENT variable is set A transaction that begins implicitly after the COMMIT WORK or ROLLBACK WORK statement This is the only type of transaction that ANSI compliant databases support but is also available for other databases that support log ging See also explicit transaction and singleton implicit transaction A built in or user defined cast that the database server automatically invokes to perform data type conversion See also explicit cast A connection that is made using the DATABASE CREATE DATABASE START DATABASE or DROP DATABASE statement See also explicit connection A SELECT statement that uses the asterisk wildcard symbol so that a query returns values from all columns of the table A system of archiving that allows the option to archive only those parts of the data that have changed since the last archive was created A subquery that has no relationship to or dependency on any of its pa
435. two or more tables based on the relationship between one column in each table Rows that do not satisfy the join criteria are discarded from the result Also known as an inner join See also composite join A large object thatis stored in a blobspace or dbspace is not recoverable and does not obey transaction isolation modes Simple large objects include TEXT and BYTE data types Extended Parallel Server does not support simple large objects that are stored in a blobspace A search condition in the WHERE clause that has one of the following forms f column constant f constant column or f column where f is a binary or unary function that returns a Boolean value TRUE FALSE or UNKNOWN A character that uses one byte of storage Because a single byte can store val ues in the range of 0 to 255 it can uniquely identify 256 characters With these code sets an application can assume that one character is always stored in one byte See also 8 bit character and multibyte character A single statement transaction that does not require either a BEGIN WORK or a COMMIT WORK statement This type of transaction can occur only in a data base that is not ANSI compliant but that supports transaction logging See also explicit transaction and implicit transaction A SELECT statement that returns a single row 46 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference smart large object SMI SMP source file source type specific name speed up SPL
436. type NOT NULL The element_type of a LIST can be any of the following data types A built in type except SERIAL SERIAL8 BYTE and TEXT A DISTINCT type An unnamed or named ROW type Another collection type An OPAQUE type You must specify the NOT NULL constraint for LIST elements No other constraints are valid for LIST columns For more information on the syntax of the LIST data type see the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax You can use LIST anywhere that you would use any other data type for example m After the IN predicate in the WHERE clause of a SELECT statement to search for matching LIST values m Asan argument to the CARDINALITY or mi_collection_card function to determine the number of elements in a LIST column You cannot use LIST values as arguments to an aggregate function such as AVG MAX MIN or SUM Two LIST values are equal if they have the same elements in the same order The following examples both are LIST values but are not equal LIST blue green yellow LIST yellow blue green The above statements are not equal because the values are not in the same order To be equal the second statement would have to be LIST blue green yellow 2 30 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference LVARCHAR LVARCHAR You can use the LVARCHAR data type to create a column for storing variable length character strings that can be larger than 255 bytes By default the database s
437. type and the desired type If this cast is not registered the database server automatically invokes a cast from the source type to the desired type If none of these casts is defined the comparison fails To compare an OPAQUE type to a built in type the user must explicitly cast the opaque type to a data type that the database server understands such as LVARCHAR SENDRECV IMPEX or IMPEXBIN The database server then invokes built in casts to convert the results to the desired built in type To compare two opaque types the user must explicitly cast one opaque type to a form that the database server understands such as LVARCHAR SENDRECV IMPEX or IMPEXBIN and then explicitly cast this type to the second opaque type For information about casting and the IMPEX IMPEXBIN LVARCHAR and SENDRECV types see Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types DataTypes 2 67 Casts for Distinct Types 2 68 Casts for Distinct Types You define a distinct type based on a built in type or an existing opaque type or row type Although data of the distinct type has the same length and alignment and is passed in the same way as data of the source type the two cannot be compared directly To compare a distinct type and its source type you must explicitly cast one type to the other When you create a new distinct type the database server automatically registers two explicit casts m A cast from
438. ually used in complex subqueries and required for a self join In a form specification file or any SQL query alias refers to a single word alternative name used in place of a qualified table name for example tl as an alias for owner table_name Legacy acronym for Asian Language Support ALS a feature for multibyte East Asian locales Supplanted by Global Language Support GLS Acronym for the American National Standards Institute This group sets standards in many areas including the computer industry and standards for the SQL language A database conforming to ANSI ISO standards for SQL A database is either ANSI compliant or not ANSI compliant An ANSI compliant database enforces certain ANSI requirements such as implicit transactions explicit owner naming no public synonyms and for Dynamic Server unbuffered logging that are not enforced in databases that are not ANSI compliant See application programming interface API Software such as INFORMIX 4GL that you can use to create and maintain a database The software allows a user to send instructions and data to and receive information from the database server The process that manages an ESQL or other program at runtime It executes the program logic and initiates SQL requests Memory that is allocated for program variables program data and the fetch buffer is part of this process See also database server process Tools that are used to write applications An exe
439. uired for an INTERVAL value total number of digits for all fields 2 1 For example a YEAR TO MONTH qualifier requires a total of six digits four for year and two for month This data value requires 4 or 6 2 1 bytes of storage For information on using INTERVAL data in arithmetic and relational operations see Manipulating DATE with DATETIME and INTERVAL Values on page 2 54 For information on using INTERVAL as a constant expression see the description of the INTERVAL Field Qualifier in the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax LIST e The LIST data type is a collection type that stores ordered non unique elements that is it allows duplicate element values The elements of a LIST have ordinal positions That is the list has a first element a second element and so on For a collection type with no ordinal positions see the MULTISET data type in MULTISET e on page 2 32 and the SET data type in SET e on page 2 41 By default the database server inserts LIST elements at the end of the list To support the ordinal position of a LIST the INSERT statement provides the AT clause This clause allows you to specify the position at which you want to insert a list element value For more information see the INSERT statementin the Informix Guide to SQL Syntax Data Types 2 29 LIST e All elements in a LIST have the same element type To specify the element type use the following syntax LIST element_
440. umeric codes for example order invoice or customer numbers SERIAL8 data values have the same precision and storage requirements as INT8 values page 2 25 The following restrictions apply to SERIAL8 columns m You can define only one SERIAL8 column in a table However a table can have one SERIAL8 and one SERIAL column m SERIALS column values are not automatically unique You must apply a unique index or primary key constraint to this col umn to prevent duplicate SERIAL8 numbers m The SERIAL8 data type does not allow a NULL value If you are using the interactive schema editor in DB Access to define the table a unique index is applied automatically to a SERIAL8 column The DEFINE variable LIKE column syntax of SPL for indirect typing declares a variable of the INT8 data type if column is a SERIALS data type Assigning a Starting Value for SERIAL8 The default serial starting number is 1 but you can assign an initial value n when you create or alter the table To start the values at 1 in a SERIAL8 column of a table give the value 0 for the SERIAL8 column when you insert rows into that table The database server will assign the value 1 to the SERIAL8 column of the first row of the table The highest SERIAL8 number you can assign is 2831 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 If you assign a number greater than this value you receive a syntax error When the database server generates a SERIAL8 value of this maximum number it wraps around
441. umeric type to any other numeric type The database server automatically invokes appropriate built in casts when required For time data types conversion between DATE and DATETIME data types requires explicit casts with the EXTEND function and explicit casts with the UNITS operator are required for number to INTERVAL conversion Built in casts are not available for converting large BYTE BLOB CLOB and TEXT built in types to other built in data types When you convert a column from one built in data type to another the database server applies the appropriate built in casts to each value already in the column If the new data type cannot store any of the resulting values the ALTER TABLE statement fails For example if you try to convert a column from the INTEGER data type to the SMALLINT data type and the following values exist in the INTEGER column the database server does not change the data type because SMALLINT columns cannot accommodate numbers greater than 32 767 100 400 700 50000 700 The same situation might occur if you attempt to transfer data from FLOAT or SMALLFLOAT columns to INTEGER SMALLINT or DECIMAL columns Errors of overflow underflow or truncation can occur during data type conversion Sections that follow describe database server behavior during certain types of casts and conversions Data Types 2 63 Using Built in Casts 2 64 Converting from Number to Number When you convert data from one numb
442. umns requires unique combinations of values 1 64 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference SYSROLEAUTH SYSROLEAUTH The sysroleauth system catalog table describes the roles that are granted to users It contains one row for each role that is granted to a user in the database The sysroleauth table has the following columns Column Type Explanation rolename CHAR 32 Name of the role grantee CHAR 32 Name of the grantee of the role is_grantable CHAR 1 Specifies whether the role is grantable Y Grantable N Not grantable The is_grantable column indicates whether the role was granted with the WITH GRANT OPTION of the GRANT statement A composite index on the rolename and grantee columns allows only unique values SYSROUTINELANGS The sysroutinelangs system catalog table lists the supported programming languages for writing user defined routines UDRs The sysroutinelangs table has the following columns Column Type Explanation langid SERIAL Code uniquely identifying a supported language langname CHAR 30 Name of the language such as C or SPL langinitfunc VARCHAR 128 Name of initialization function for the language langpath CHAR 255 Directory path for the UDR language langclass CHAR 18 Name of the class of the UDR language An index on the langname column allows duplicate values System Catalog Tables 1 65 SYSSYNONYMS SYSSYNONYMS The syssynonyms system catalog table lists the synonyms for each table view
443. up Language XML 2 14 Extension checking DBANSIWARN 3 27 Extension to SQL symbol for 9 Extent changing size 1 12 External database 1 66 External database server 1 66 External routine 1 59 External sequence 1 67 External table sysextcols data 1 40 sysextdfiles data 1 41 sysexternal data 1 41 syssyntable data 1 67 systables data 1 70 External view 1 67 extspace 1 18 F Fact table B 3 FALSE setting Boolean value 2 10 CPFIRST 3 25 ISM_COMPRESSION 3 75 Farsi locales 2 12 Feature icons 8 Features in 9 3 6 Fetch buffer 3 55 Fetch buffer size 3 55 FETCH statement 3 83 FET_BUF_SIZE environment variable 3 55 Field delimiter DBDELIMITER 3 35 Field of a ROW data type 2 60 Field qualifier DATETIME values 2 17 EXTEND function 2 54 INTERVAL values 2 26 File environment configuration files 3 12 installation directory 3 67 permission settings 3 8 shell 3 9 temporary 3 46 3 48 3 89 temporary for SE 3 48 termcap terminfo 3 72 3 93 3 94 File extensions a 3 59 cfg 3 63 cmd 3 17 ec 3 25 ecp 3 25 diem 3 37 jar 3 77 rc 3 8 3 12 3 54 3 57 so 3 59 sql 1 81 3 42 3 54 B 2 B 6 Std 3 24 3 81 3 92 xps 3 81 FILETOBLOB function 2 10 FILETOCLOB function 2 15 Filtering mode 1 52 1 77 Finalization function 1 17 finderr utility 14 FIXED column format 1 40 1 41 Fixed point decimal 2 21 2 31 3 39 Fixed length UDT 1 79 FLOAT data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 24 display format 3 36 3 3
444. upports a shortcut as the last row indicates Environment variables are case sensitive Shell Command C setenv ABCD value Bourne ABCD value export ABCD Korn ABCD value export ABCD Korn export ABCD value The following diagram shows how the syntax for setting an environment variable is represented throughout this chapter These diagrams indicate the setting for the C shell for the Bourne or Korn shells use the syntax illustrated in the preceding table setenv ABCD value E Environment Variables 3 9 Unsetting Environment Variables 3 10 For more information on how to read syntax diagrams see Syntax Conven tions on page 10 of the Introduction Unsetting Environment Variables To unset an environment variable enter the following command Shell Command C unsetenv ABCD Bourne or Korn unset ABCD Modifying an Environment Variable Setting Sometimes you must add information to an environment variable that is already set For example the PATH environment variable is always set on UNIX When you use an Informix product you must add to the PATH setting the name of the directory where the executable files for the Informix products are stored In the following example the INFORMIXDIR is usr informix That is during installation the Informix products were installed in the usr informix directory The executable files are in the bin subdirectory usr informix bin To add this directory t
445. ustomer_num SERIAL Unique customer identifier customer_type CHAR 1 Code to indicate type of customer m R retail m W wholesale customer_name name_t Name of customer customer _loc INTEGER Location of customer contact_dates LIST DATETIME Dates of contact with customer YEAR TO DAY NOT NULL cust_discount percent Customer discount 1 of 2 tf Structure of the superstores_demo Tables Name Type Description credit_status CHAR 1 Customer credit status m D deadbeat m L lost m N new m P preferred m R regular resale_license CHAR 15 Resale license number terms_net SMALLINT Net term in days 2 of 2 The items Table An order can include one or more items One row exists in the items table for each item in an order Figure B 13 shows the columns of the items table Figure B 13 The items Table Name Type Description item_num SMALLINT Sequentially assigned item number for an order order_num INT8 Order number foreign key to orders table stock_num SMALLINT Stock number for item foreign key to stock table manu_code CHAR 3 Manufacturer code for item ordered foreign key to stock table 1 of 2 The sales_demo and superstores_demo Databases B 13 Structure of the superstores_ demo Tables B 14 Name Type Description unit CHAR 4 Unit by which item is ordered foreign key to stock table quantity SMALLINT Quantity ordered value must be gt 1 item_subtotal MONEY 8 2 Quantity ordered unit pri
446. ut Your Locale Informix products can support many languages cultures and code sets All the information related to character set collation and representation of numeric data currency date and time is brought together in a single environment called a Global Language Support GLS locale This manual assumes that you use the U S 8859 1 English locale as the default locale The default is en_us 8859 1 ISO 8859 1 on UNIX platforms or en_us 1252 Microsoft 1252 for Windows NT environments This locale supports U S English format conventions for dates times and currency and also supports the ISO 8859 1 or Microsoft 1252 code set which includes the ASCII code set plus many 8 bit characters such as and If you plan to use nondefault characters in your data or your SQL identifiers or if you want to conform to the nondefault collation rules of character data you need to specify the appropriate nondefault locale For instructions on how to specify a nondefault locale additional syntax and other considerations related to GLS locales see the Informix Guide to GLS Functionality Demonstration Database The DB Access utility which Informix provides with its database server products includes one or more of the following demonstration databases m The stores_demo database illustrates a relational schema with infor mation about a fictitious wholesale sporting goods distributor Many examples in Informix manuals are based on
447. v INF_ROLE_SEP INF_ROLE_SEP The INF_ROLE_SEP environment variable configures the security feature of role separation when the database server is installed Role separation enforces separating administrative tasks by people who run and audit the database server If INF_ROLE_SEP is not set then user informix the default can perform all administrative tasks INF_ROLE_SEP n n is any positive integer To enable role separation for database servers on Windows choose the role separation option during installation If INF_ROLE_SEP is set role separation is implemented and a separate group is specified to serve each of the following responsibilities m The database system security officer DBSSO m The audit analysis officer AAO m The standard user For more information about the security feature of role separation see the Trusted Facility Manual To learn how to configure role separation when you install your database server see your Installation Guide Environment Variables 3 73 INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF INTERACTIVE DESKTOP_OFF The INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF environment variable lets you prevent interaction with the Windows Desktop when an SPL routine executes a SYSTEM command setenv INTERACTIVE_DESKTOP_OFF E Fi 1 Prevents the database server from acquiring desktop resources for the user executing the stored procedure 0 SYSTEM commands in a stored procedure can int
448. variable see your Administrator s Guide and your Performance Guide PSORT_NPROCS The PSORT_NPROCS environment variable enables the database server to improve the performance of the parallel process sorting package by allocating more threads for sorting XPS PSORT_NPROCS does not necessarily improve sorting speed for Extended Parallel Server because the database server sorts in parallel whether this environment variable is set or not Environment Variables 3 89 PSORT_NPROCS Before the sorting package performs a parallel sort make sure that the database server has enough memory for the sort setenv PSORT_NPROCS threads threads specifies the maximum number of threads to be used to sort a query This value cannot be greater than 10 The following command sets PSORT_NPROCS to 4 setenv PSORT_NPROCS 4 To disable parallel sorting enter the following command unsetenv PSORT_NPROCS Informix recommends that you initially set PSORT_NPROCS to 2 when your computer has multiple CPUs If subsequent CPU activity is lower than I O activity you can increase the value of PSORT_NPROCS Tip If the PDQPRIORITY environment variable is not set the database server allocates the minimum amount of memory to sorting This minimum memory is insufficient to start even two sort threads If you have not set PDQPRIORITY check the available memory before you perform a large scale sort such as an index build to make sur
449. vel A symbol indicates the end of compliance information that appears in one or more paragraphs within a section Syntax Conventions This section describes conventions for syntax diagrams Each diagram displays the sequences of required and optional keywords terms and symbols that are valid in a given statement command line or other specifi cation as in Figure 1 Figure 1 Example of a Simple Syntax Diagram GOTO Dar label ABBA III Keep in mind the following rules when you read syntax diagrams in this book m To make keywords like GOTO in Figure 1 easy to identify they are shown in UPPERCASE letters even though you can type them in either uppercase or lowercase letters m Terms for which you must supply specific values are in italics In Figure 1 you must replace label with an identifier Below each diagram that contains an italicized term a table explains what you can substitute for the term m All the punctuation and other nonalphabetic characters are literal symbols In Figure 1 the colon is a literal symbol m Each syntax diagram begins at the upper left corner and ends at the upper right corner with a vertical terminator Between these points any path that does not stop or reverse direction describes a possible form of the statement 10 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Sample Code Conventions Syntax elements in a path represent terms keywords symbols and segments that can appear in y
450. verted into 1 minute which produces the final result of 38 minutes 45 seconds and 0 0005 of a second The result of any calculation has the same precision as the original INTERVAL operand Extended Data Types Dynamic Server lets you create extended data types to characterize data that cannot be easily represented with the built in data types However you cannot use extended data types in distributed transactions You can create the following extended data types m Complex data types m DISTINCT data types m OPAQUE data types The following sections provide an overview of each of these data types For more information about extended data types see the Informix Guide to Database Design and Implementation and Creating User Defined Routines and User Defined Data Types DataTypes 2 57 Complex Data Types Complex Data Types A complex data type is a data type that you build from other data types built in and extended Figure 2 supports The table that follows describes the structure of these data types 13 shows the complex types that Dynamic Server Figure 2 13 Supported Complex Data Types Complex data types Collection data types Row data types MULTISET Named ROW type Unnamed ROW type 2 58 Data Type Collection types LIST MULTISET SET Row types Named row type Unnamed row type or a collection type IBM Infor
451. vide predefined locales that customers cannot modify A locale provides the name of the code set that the application data uses the collation order to use for character data and the end user format See also client locale database locale default locale server locale and server processing locale 30 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference localized order locally detached index lock coupling lock mode locking locking granularity logical log login login password login user ID The collation order as specified within a given locale Localized order can also specify a dictionary or phone book order For example in dictionary order uppercase characters and lowercase characters are treated the same one does not take precedence over the other For Extended Parallel Server a type of index that has a fragmentation strat egy that is independent of the table fragmentation but where the database server recognizes that each index row resides on the same co server as the referenced data row You can use an expression system defined hash or hybrid distribution scheme to create locally detached indexes for any table See also globally detached index A locking feature that holds a lock on the child node until a lock is obtained on the parent node during upward movement when updating an R tree index Lock coupling is used if the bounding box of a leaf node has changed You must propagate the change to the parent node by moving u
452. wap sajo s ay catalog_num stock_num manu_code cat_descr cat_picture cat_advert 10031 110 ANZ No buckle so no plastic touches lt BYTE value gt Minimum Chin Contact your chin Meets both ANSI and Feather Light Maximum Snell standards for impact Protection Helmet protection 7 5 oz Lycra cover 10032 110 SHM Dense outer layer combines with lt BYTE value gt Mountain Bike Helmet Smooth softer inner layer to eliminate the Cover Eliminates the Worry of mesh cover no snagging on brush Brush Snags But Delivers Meets both ANSI and Snell Maximum Protection standards for impact protection 8 0 OZ 10033 110 HRO Newest ultralight helmet uses lt BYTE value gt Lightweight Plastic with Vents plastic shell Largest ventilation Assures Cool Comfort Without channels of any helmet on the Sacrificing Protection market 8 5 oz 10034 110 HSK Aerodynamic teardrop helmet lt BYTE value gt Teardrop Design Used by covered with anti drag fabric Yellow Jerseys You Can Time Credited with shaving 2 the Difference seconds mile from winner s time in Tour de France time trial 7 5 oz 10035 111 SHM Light action shifting 10 speed lt BYTE value gt Fully Equipped Bicycle Designed for the city commuter with shock absorbing front fork and drilled eyelets for carry all racks or bicycle trailers Internal wiring for generator lights 33 Ibs Designed for the Serious Commuter Who Mixes Business With Pleasure 6 of 13 asegejeg ouap Se oJs
453. when the user defined routine is created in Owner mode yes prevents default table privileges from being granted to PUBLIC on new tables in a database that is not ANSI compliant This setting also prevents the Execute privilege for a new user defined routine from being granted to PUBLIC when the routine is created in Owner mode ONCONFIG The ONCONFIG environment variable specifies the name of the active file that holds configuration parameters for the database server This file is read as input during the initialization procedure After you prepare the ONCONFIG configuration file set the ONCONFIG environment variable to the name of the file If the ONCONFIG environment variable is not set the database server uses configuration values from either the ONCONFIG file or the INFORMIXDIR etc onconfig file setenv ONCONFIG filename filename is the name of a file in INFORMIXDIR etc that contains the configuration parameters for your database 3 80 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference XPS OPTCOMPIND To prepare the ONCONFIG file make a copy of the onconfig std file and modify the copy Informix recommends that you name the ONCONFIG file so that it can easily be related to a specific database server If you have multiple instances of a database server each instance must have its own uniquely named ONCONFIG file To prepare the ONCONFIG file for Extended Parallel Server ma
454. xample would instead be expanded to 1 1 1901 if the current date were 1 1 2001 and DBCENTURY P Setting DBCENTURY does not affect Informix products when the locale specifies anon Gregorian calendar such as Hebrew or Islamic calendars The leading digits of the current year are used for alternate calendar systems DBCENTURY Abbreviated Years and Expressions in Database Objects When an expression in a database object including a check constraint fragmentation expression SPL routine trigger or UDR contains a literal DATE or DATETIME value in which the year has 1 or 2 digits the database server evaluates the expression using the setting that DBCENTURY and other relevant environment variables had when the database object was created or was last modified If DBCENTURY has been reset to a new value the new value is ignored when the abbreviated year is expanded For example suppose a user creates a table and defines the following check constraint on a column named birthdate birthdate lt 09 25 50 The expression is interpreted according to the value of DBCENTURY when the constraint was defined If the table that contains the birthdate column is created on 09 23 2000 and DBCENTURY c the check constraint expression is consistently interpreted as birthdate lt 09 25 1950 when inserts or updates are performed on the birthdate column regardless of any changes to the value of DBCENTURY Even if different values of DBCENTURY ar
455. y 3 7 Setting environment variables in UNIX 3 8 in Windows 3 13 SGML Standard Graphic Markup Language 2 14 Shared environment configuration file 3 12 Shared libraries 3 59 Shared memory INFORMIXSHMBASE 3 69 PLOAD_SHMBASE 3 88 Shell remote 3 45 search path 3 84 setting environment variables ina file 3 9 specifying with DBREMOTECMD 3 45 SHLIB_PATH environment variable 3 91 Simple large objects description 2 49 length syscolumns 1 33 location sysblobs 1 22 Single precision floating point number 2 35 2 43 Small Table Broadcast 3 56 SMALLFLOAT data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 43 display format 3 36 3 38 SMALLINT data type built in casts 2 64 description 2 43 length syscolumns 1 32 JKLMNOPQRSTUVV VxtvY ze Smart large objects description 2 50 syscolattribs data 1 26 See also sbspacee Smart large object handles 3 87 Software dependencies 4 SOFTWARE registry key 3 13 SOME operator 2 70 Sorting DBSPACETEMP environment variable 3 46 PSORT_DBTEMP environment variable 3 89 PSORT_NPROCS environment variable 3 89 See also Collation Sort merge join 3 81 Space DATETIME delimiter 2 18 INTERVAL delimiter 2 28 SPL routine 1 58 2 60 3 31 3 34 SPL variables 2 60 SQL new features 6 SQL character set 3 54 SQL Communication Area SQLCA 3 27 SQL Structured Query Language 3 27 sqlhosts file 3 61 3 69 3 70 SQLHOSTS subkey 3 71 SQLSTATE value 1 39 sqlwarn array 3 27 Stack size 1 60 3 71 STACKSIZE c
456. y set the value of INFORMIXSTACKSIZE it can cause the database server to fail Environment Variables 3 71 INFORMIXTERM UNIX setenv INFORM IXTERM The INFORMIXTERM environment variable specifies whether DB Access should use the information in the termcap file or the terminfo directory On character based systems the termcap file and terminfo directory determine terminal dependent keyboard and screen capabilities such as the operation of function keys color and intensity attributes in screen displays and the definition of window borders and graphic characters INFORMIXTERM a termcap terminfo If INFORMIXTERM is not set the default setting is termcap When DB Access is installed on your system a termcap file is placed in the etc subdirectory of INFORMIXDIR This file is a superset of an operating system termcap file You can use the termcap file that Informix supplies the system termcap file or a termcap file that you create You must set the TERMCAP environment variable if you do not use the default termcap file For information on setting the TERMCAP environment variable see page 3 93 The terminfo directory contains a file for each terminal name that has been defined The terminfo setting for INFORMIXTERM is supported only on computers that provide full support for the UNIX System V terminfo library For details see the machine notes file for your product 3 72 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference seten
457. y to field width and precision specifications m If the data value supplies fewer digits than precision specifies the value is padded with leading zeros m Ifa data value supplies more characters than precision specifies excess characters are truncated on the right m If no field width nor precision is specified for d H I m M S or y placeholders a default of 0 2 is used A default of 0 4 is used for Y placeholders m A precision specification is significant only when converting a DATETIME value to an ASCII string but not vice versa The F placeholder does not support this field width and precision syntax For formatting DATE values see the discussion of DBDATE on page 3 32 Environment Variables 3 51 DBUPSPACE GLS 3 52 setenv In East Asian locales that support era based dates DBTIME can also specify Japanese or Taiwanese eras See Informix Guide to GLS Functionality for details of additional placeholder symbols for setting DBTIME to display era based DATETIME values and for descriptions of the GL_DATETIME and GL_DATE environment variables DBUPSPACE The DBUPSPACE environment variable lets you specify and constrain the amount of system disk space that the UPDATE STATISTICS statement can use when trying to simultaneously construct multiple column distributions DBUPSPACE max max is a positive integer specifying the maximum disk space in kilo bytes For example to set DBUPS
458. ying code of an external table fmttype CHAR 1 Type of format D delimited F fixed I Informix codeset CHAR 18 ASCII EBCDIC recdelim CHAR 4 The record delimiter flddelim CHAR 4 The field delimiter datefmt CHAR 8 Reserved for future use moneyfmt CHAR 20 Reserved for future use 1 of 2 System Catalog Tables 1 41 SYSFRAGAUTH Column Type Explanation maxerrors INTEGER Number of errors to allow per coserver rejectfile CHAR 128 Name of reject file flags INTEGER Optional load flags ndfiles INTEGER Number of data files in sysextdfiles 2 of 2 You can use DBSCHEMA to write out the description of the external tables To query these system catalog tables about an external table use the tabid as stored in systables with tabtype E An index on the tabid column allows only unique values SYSFRAGAUTH The sysfragauth system catalog table stores information about the privileges that are granted on table fragments This table has the following columns Column Type Explanation grantor CHAR 32 Name of the grantor of privilege grantee CHAR 32 Name of the grantee of privilege tabid INTEGER Identifying code of the fragmented table fragment VARCHAR 128 Name of dbspace where fragment is stored fragauth CHAR 6 A 6 byte pattern that specifies fragment privileges including 3 bytes reserved for future use uor U Update ior I Insert dor D Delete In the fragauth column an uppercase code such as
459. ype 1 23 1 79 ALL operator 2 70 ALTER OPTICAL CLUSTER statement 1 55 Alter privilege 1 10 1 68 1 82 ALTER TABLE statement casting effects 2 63 changing data types 2 6 lock mode 3 57 next extent size 1 12 SERIAL columns 2 39 SERIAL8 columns 2 40 systables version 1 71 am_beginscan function 1 20 am_close function 1 20 am_getnext function 1 19 am_insert function 1 20 am_open function 1 19 AND operator 1 24 2 70 ANSI compliance ansi flag 3 27 DATETIME literals 3 51 DBANSIWARN environment variable 3 27 DECIMAL range 2 21 DECIMAL p data type 2 21 icon 9 Information Schema views 1 80 isolation level 1 86 level 15 public synonyms 1 67 1 70 ANY operator 2 70 Arabic locales 2 12 A BC D E F GH archecker utility 3 24 Archiving setting DBREMOTECMD 3 45 Arithmetic DATE operands 2 16 2 54 DATETIME operands 2 52 integer operands 2 25 2 26 2 41 2 43 INTERVAL operands 2 27 2 53 operators 2 70 string operands 2 13 time operands 2 51 AS keyword 2 66 2 67 ASCII code set 1 41 AT keyword 2 29 Attached indexes 1 45 3 31 3 90 Audit analysis officer AAO 3 73 Authentication information file 3 67 Authorization identifier 1 76 1 86 Backslash symbol 3 35 BETWEEN operator 2 70 bin subdirectory 3 10 Binding style 1 85 BLOB data type casting not available 2 10 coltype code 1 31 description 2 9 inserting data 2 10 syscolattribs data 1 26 Blobspace defined 2 49 memory cache for staging 3 68 nam
460. yscoldepend Vv Vv 1 28 syscolumns Vv Vv 1 29 sysconstraints Vv Vv 1 34 sysdefaults Vv Vv 1 35 sysdepend Vv Vv 1 37 sysdistrib Vv Vv 1 37 sysdomains Vv 1 39 syserrors Vv 1 39 sysextcols Vv 1 40 sysextdfiles Vv 1 41 sysexternal Vv 1 41 1 of 3 1 14 IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference Structure of the System Catalog System Catalog Table XPS IDS Page sysfragauth Vv 1 42 sysfragments Vv Vv 1 43 sysindexes Vv Vv 1 46 sysindices Vv 1 48 sysinherits Vv 1 50 syslangauth Vv 1 50 syslogmap Vv 1 51 sysnewdepend Vv 1 51 sysobjstate Vv 1 52 sysopclasses Vv 1 53 sysopclstr Vv Vv 1 54 sysprocauth Vv Vv 1 56 sysprocbody Vv Vv 1 57 sysprocedures Vv Vv 1 58 sysprocplan Vv Vv 1 62 sysreferences Vv Vv 1 63 sysrepository Vv 1 64 sysroleauth Vv 1 65 sysroutinelangs Vv 1 65 syssynonyms Vv Vv 1 66 syssyntable Vv Vv 1 66 systabamdata Vv 1 67 systabauth Vv Vv 1 68 systables Vv Vv 1 69 2 of 3 System Catalog Tables 1 15 Structure of the System Catalog GLS 1 16 System Catalog Table systraceclasses systracemsgs systrigbody systriggers sysusers sysviews sysviolations sysxtddesc systdtypeauth sysxtdtypes XPS SSN NN a SN NNNL NN LN Page 1 72 1 73 1 74 1 75 1 76 1 76 1 77 1 78 1 78 1 79 3 of 3 If the database locale is the default U S English ISO 8859 1 codeset then the character column types are CHAR and VARCHAR For all other locales and collation orders the character column type

IBM Informix Guide to SQL Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents